Dell Data Protection Encryption AdminHelp Security Management Server V9.10 User Manual Admin Help Reference Guide4 En Us

User Manual: Dell dell-data-protection-encryption - AdminHelp - Security Management Server v9.10

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 304

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Security Management Server - AdminHelp
v9.10

Table of Contents
Welcome ......................................................................................................................... 1
About the Online Help System ............................................................................................ 1
Attributions, Copyrights, and Trademarks .............................................................................. 1
Get Started ..................................................................................................................... 11
Get Started with Dell Data Security ..................................................................................... 11
Log In ......................................................................................................................... 11
Log Out ....................................................................................................................... 11
Dashboard ................................................................................................................... 12
Start Services ............................................................................................................... 14
Stop Services ................................................................................................................ 15
Change the Superadmin Password ....................................................................................... 16
Components .................................................................................................................... 17
Remote Management Console ............................................................................................ 17
Architecture Drawings ..................................................................................................... 17
Architecture with Manager ............................................................................................. 17
Architecture with Encryption Enterprise for Windows/Manager ................................................. 18
Default Port Values ........................................................................................................ 18
Proxy Servers ................................................................................................................ 19
Types of Proxy Servers .................................................................................................. 19
Policy Proxy ................................................................................................................. 20
Time Slotting ............................................................................................................. 20
Polling ..................................................................................................................... 20
Poll Triggers ........................................................................................................... 20
Failed Poll Attempts .................................................................................................. 20
General Information .................................................................................................. 20
Navigate the Dell Server ..................................................................................................... 21
Navigation ................................................................................................................... 21
Dashboard ................................................................................................................. 21
Populations ............................................................................................................... 21
Reporting.................................................................................................................. 21
Management .............................................................................................................. 21
Masthead icons .............................................................................................................. 21

Table of Contents
Disconnected Mode ......................................................................................................... 21
Client Activation ......................................................................................................... 22
Remote Management Console ......................................................................................... 22
Functionality ............................................................................................................. 22
Dashboard ................................................................................................................... 22
Dashboard ................................................................................................................. 23
Notifications List ......................................................................................................... 25
Notification Types .................................................................................................... 25
Priority Levels ......................................................................................................... 26
Endpoint Protection Status ............................................................................................. 26
Protection Status ........................................................................................................ 26
Threat Protection Status ............................................................................................... 27
Threat Protection Status for Severity Level ......................................................................... 27
Advanced Threat Prevention Events .................................................................................. 28
Advanced Threats by Priority .......................................................................................... 28
Advanced Threat Prevention Classifications ........................................................................ 30
Type of Threat ........................................................................................................ 30
Score .................................................................................................................... 32
File Type ............................................................................................................... 32
Priority Level .......................................................................................................... 32
Advanced Threats Top Ten ............................................................................................. 32
Endpoint Protection History............................................................................................ 33
Endpoint Inventory History ............................................................................................. 33
Summary Statistics ...................................................................................................... 33
Endpoint OS Report...................................................................................................... 34
Platform Report .......................................................................................................... 34
Populations .................................................................................................................. 34
Populations ............................................................................................................... 34
Enterprise ................................................................................................................. 35
View or Modify Enterprise-Level Policies ......................................................................... 35
View Threat Events ................................................................................................... 35
Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats ............................................................................. 35
Advanced Threats tab ............................................................................................. 35
Advanced Threat Events tab...................................................................................... 36

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Domains ................................................................................................................... 36
Domains ................................................................................................................ 36
Add a Domain ....................................................................................................... 36
Users .................................................................................................................... 37
Add a User by Domain ............................................................................................. 37
User Groups ............................................................................................................ 38
Add a User Group................................................................................................... 38
Add Non-Domain Users ............................................................................................... 38
View or Modify Domain Policies and Information ................................................................ 38
Domain Details & Actions ............................................................................................ 39
Domain Members ...................................................................................................... 39
Domain Settings ....................................................................................................... 40
Domain Key Server .................................................................................................... 41
User Groups ............................................................................................................... 41
User Groups ............................................................................................................ 41
Add a User Group................................................................................................... 41
Remove User Groups ................................................................................................. 42
Find User Groups ...................................................................................................... 42
View or Modify User Group Policies and Information............................................................ 42
VDI User Policies ...................................................................................................... 43
Policy and Configuration Requirements for VDI Users ........................................................ 43
User Group Details & Actions ....................................................................................... 44
User Group Members ................................................................................................. 44
Add Users to the Group ........................................................................................... 44
Remove Users from the Group ................................................................................... 45
User Group Admin .................................................................................................... 45
Edit Group Priority .................................................................................................... 45
Edit Endpoint Group Priority ..................................................................................... 45
Edit User Group Priority ........................................................................................... 46
Assign or Modify Administrator Roles .............................................................................. 47
View Reconciliation Date ............................................................................................ 48
View Policy Proxy State .............................................................................................. 48
Users ....................................................................................................................... 48
Users .................................................................................................................... 48

iii

Table of Contents
Add a User by Domain ............................................................................................. 48
Remove Users .......................................................................................................... 49
Find Users .............................................................................................................. 49
Deactivate/Suspend Users ........................................................................................... 49
Reinstate Suspended Users .......................................................................................... 50
View or Modify User Policies and Information .................................................................... 50
User Details & Actions................................................................................................ 51
User Endpoints ........................................................................................................ 51
User Groups ............................................................................................................ 52
User Admin ............................................................................................................. 53
View Reconciliation Date ............................................................................................ 53
View Policy Proxy State .............................................................................................. 53
Issue a User Decryption Policy ...................................................................................... 54
Endpoint Groups ......................................................................................................... 54
Endpoint Groups ...................................................................................................... 54
Types of Endpoint Groups ......................................................................................... 54
Add an Endpoint Group ............................................................................................ 54
Remove an Endpoint Group ....................................................................................... 55
Modify an Endpoint Group ........................................................................................ 55
VDI Endpoint Groups .................................................................................................. 55
Policy and Configuration Requirements for VDI Endpoint Groups .......................................... 55
Persistent vs. Non-Persistent VDI................................................................................... 56
Endpoint Groups Specification ...................................................................................... 57
Endpoint Group Specification .................................................................................... 57
Operators and Expressions ........................................................................................ 58
Summary .......................................................................................................... 59
Examples .......................................................................................................... 59
Edit Group Priority .................................................................................................... 60
Edit Endpoint Group Priority ..................................................................................... 60
Edit User Group Priority ........................................................................................... 61
View Endpoints in an Endpoint Group ............................................................................. 62
View or Modify Endpoint Group Policies and Information ...................................................... 62
Endpoint Group Details & Actions .................................................................................. 63
Endpoint Group Members ............................................................................................ 63

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Add Endpoints to an Admin-Defined Endpoint Group ......................................................... 63
Remove Endpoints from an Admin-Defined Endpoint Group ................................................ 64
Endpoints ................................................................................................................. 64
Endpoints ............................................................................................................... 64
Add Endpoint to Group ............................................................................................ 65
Remove Endpoints.................................................................................................. 65
Find Endpoints ......................................................................................................... 65
View or Modify Endpoint Policies and Information .............................................................. 66
View Effective Policy ................................................................................................. 66
Endpoint Details & Actions .......................................................................................... 67
Endpoint Detail ..................................................................................................... 67
Shield Detail ........................................................................................................ 68
Manager Detail (Windows only) .................................................................................. 71
States ................................................................................................................ 71
Threat Protection Detail (Windows only) ....................................................................... 73
Advanced Threat Prevention Detail ............................................................................. 73
Mobile Device Detail ............................................................................................... 73
Cloud Device Control .............................................................................................. 74
FDE Device Control (Windows only) ............................................................................. 74
PBA Device Control (Windows only) ............................................................................. 74
Protected Status ...................................................................................................... 75
Endpoint Users ........................................................................................................ 75
Shield ................................................................................................................ 76
Cloud ................................................................................................................. 76
Endpoint Groups ...................................................................................................... 76
Endpoint Threat Events .............................................................................................. 76
Endpoint Advanced Threats ......................................................................................... 77
List of Events ....................................................................................................... 77
Configure the Threat List ......................................................................................... 78
Export ............................................................................................................. 78
Quarantine........................................................................................................ 78
Waive .............................................................................................................. 79
Exploit Attempts ................................................................................................... 79
Endpoint Advanced Threat Events ................................................................................. 79

Table of Contents
Server Encryption Clients ............................................................................................ 80
Suspend a Server Encryption Client ............................................................................. 80
Reinstate a Suspended Server Encryption Client .............................................................. 80
Commands for Self-Encrypting Drives ............................................................................. 81
Priority of Commands for Self-Encrypting Drives ............................................................. 81
Allow PBA Login Bypass ........................................................................................... 81
Unlock a Self-Encrypting Drive ................................................................................... 82
Remove Users from Endpoint with Self-Encrypting Drive .................................................... 82
Lock a Self-Encrypting Drive...................................................................................... 82
Send Wipe Command to Self-Encrypting Drive ................................................................ 83
Set the Server Connection Retry Interval ...................................................................... 83
Administrators............................................................................................................ 83
Assign or Modify Administrator Roles .............................................................................. 83
Administrator Roles ................................................................................................... 84
Delegate Administrator Rights ...................................................................................... 87
Reporting .................................................................................................................... 88
Manage Reports .......................................................................................................... 88
Manage Reports ....................................................................................................... 88
Manage reports ..................................................................................................... 88
View or modify an existing report ............................................................................... 88
Create a new report ............................................................................................... 88
View Report ............................................................................................................ 89
Query using Search and More... to filter ....................................................................... 90
Export File ........................................................................................................... 90
Compliance Reporter .................................................................................................... 90
Data Guardian Audit Events ............................................................................................ 91
Map visualization ...................................................................................................... 91
Audit event options and filters ..................................................................................... 92
Options in the Columns dropdown ............................................................................... 93
Protected Office Document audit events ......................................................................... 94
Examples of Map Visualization and Column Filters ........................................................... 96
Example of drilling in at the map level ...................................................................... 96
Get Started with Data Guardian Audit Events....................................................................... 97
Audit Protected Office Documents ................................................................................. 97

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Audit Cloud Encryption............................................................................................... 98
Default Monikers and Columns ...................................................................................... 98
EU General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) .................................................................. 99
View Audit Events (Geolocation) ...................................................................................... 99
Event Data ........................................................................................................... 100
Export Events to a SIEM/Syslog Server ............................................................................. 100
Export Audit Events with TLS/SSL over TCP .................................................................... 101
Advanced Threat Prevention Syslog Event Types ................................................................. 102
Advanced Threat Prevention Syslog IP Addresses ................................................................ 105
Management ............................................................................................................... 106
Commit Policies ........................................................................................................ 106
Log Analyzer ............................................................................................................ 106
Recovery ................................................................................................................ 107
Recover Data - Encryption External Media Authentication Failure ......................................... 107
Encryption External Media Recovery for User "Removed" from Database .................................. 110
Enable Federated Key Recovery .................................................................................. 111
Recover Data - BitLocker Manager ............................................................................... 111
SED Recovery ........................................................................................................ 111
SED Authentication Failure ..................................................................................... 111
SED Endpoint Recovery .......................................................................................... 111
Recover Endpoint ................................................................................................... 112
Windows Recovery ............................................................................................... 112
SED Recovery ..................................................................................................... 112
Encryption External Media Recovery .......................................................................... 112
Mac Recovery ..................................................................................................... 112
License Management .................................................................................................. 112
License Management ............................................................................................... 113
Upload Client Access Licenses ................................................................................. 113
View or Add License Notifications ............................................................................. 113
CAL Information ..................................................................................................... 113
Licensing ........................................................................................................... 113
Upload Client Access Licenses .................................................................................... 114
Services Management ................................................................................................. 115
Services Management .............................................................................................. 115

vii

Table of Contents
Provision or Recover Advanced Threat Prevention Service .................................................. 115
Provision service ................................................................................................. 115
Recover service ................................................................................................... 115
Enroll for Advanced Threat Prevention Agent Auto Updates ................................................ 116
Receive agent auto updates .................................................................................... 116
Stop receiving agent auto updates ............................................................................ 116
Events Management - Export Audit Events to a SIEM Server ................................................. 116
Product Notifications ................................................................................................. 116
Receive product notifications ..................................................................................... 116
Stop receiving product notifications ............................................................................. 117
Notification Management ............................................................................................. 117
Notification Management .......................................................................................... 117
Enable SMTP Server for Email Notifications .................................................................... 117
NotificationObjects.config ...................................................................................... 117
Notification.config ............................................................................................... 118
External User Management ........................................................................................... 118
Allow or Block Access .............................................................................................. 118
Key Request .......................................................................................................... 119
Key Revocation ...................................................................................................... 119
Change the Superadmin Password .................................................................................. 119
Change Account Lockout Settings ................................................................................... 120
Manage Policies.............................................................................................................. 121
Manage Security Policies ................................................................................................ 121
Localize Policies Displayed on the Endpoint Computer ............................................................ 122
Localizable Policies ...................................................................................................... 123
Windows Encryption...................................................................................................... 125
Windows Encryption ................................................................................................... 125
Variables ............................................................................................................. 134
%CSIDL:name% ................................................................................................. 134
%HKCU:regpath% ............................................................................................... 136
%HKLM:regpath% ............................................................................................... 136
%ENV:envname% ............................................................................................... 136
%% ................................................................................................................ 136
Windows Policies that Require Reboot .......................................................................... 136

viii

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Windows Policies that Require Logoff ........................................................................... 136
Advanced Windows Encryption ...................................................................................... 136
Variables ............................................................................................................. 166
%CSIDL:name% ................................................................................................. 166
%HKCU:regpath% ............................................................................................... 168
%HKLM:regpath% ............................................................................................... 168
%ENV:envname% ............................................................................................... 168
%% ................................................................................................................ 168
Windows Policies that Require Reboot .......................................................................... 168
Windows Policies that Require Logoff ........................................................................... 168
Encryption Rules ....................................................................................................... 169
Protected Directories .............................................................................................. 169
Modifiers – What they are and what they do ................................................................... 171
Using the Override Modifier ....................................................................................... 171
Encrypting/Not Encrypting Extensions .......................................................................... 171
Examples of extension inclusions/exclusion .............................................................. 171
Encrypting/Not Encrypting Directories .......................................................................... 172
Examples of folder inclusion/exclusion .................................................................... 172
Sub-directories and Precedence of Directives.................................................................. 172
Example of sub-directories .................................................................................. 172
Example 1 of competing directives: ........................................................................ 172
Example 2 of competing directives: ........................................................................ 173
Example 3 of competing directives: ........................................................................ 173
Environment Variables, KNOWNFOLDERID constants, and CSIDL ............................................ 173
Application Data Encryption (ADE) ............................................................................... 175
Example Policies for Common/User Key Encryption ........................................................ 175
System Data Encryption (SDE) .................................................................................... 175
Policies for SDE Encryption ..................................................................................... 176
Notes .................................................................................................................. 180
Protection of SystemRoot ....................................................................................... 180
Encryption External Media ...................................................................................... 180
What Happens When Policies Tie .............................................................................. 181
Generic Drive Statements....................................................................................... 181
Remove System Data Encryption (SDE) ............................................................................. 181

Table of Contents
Remove HCA-Based Encryption ...................................................................................... 181
Authentication ............................................................................................................ 181
Authentication ......................................................................................................... 181
Advanced Authentication ............................................................................................. 183
Threat Prevention ........................................................................................................ 190
Threat Prevention ..................................................................................................... 190
Advanced Threat Prevention ......................................................................................... 194
Client Firewall Settings and Rules .................................................................................. 227
Client Firewall Options .......................................................................................... 227
Client Firewall Rules ............................................................................................. 229
Policies Set by Application Control ................................................................................. 232
Advanced Threat Events tab fields and filters .................................................................... 233
Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Protection ............................................................... 233
Threats ............................................................................................................... 233
File Details ........................................................................................................... 235
Script Control Table ................................................................................................ 235
Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Agents ................................................................... 236
Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Certificate .............................................................. 236
Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Cylance Score and Threat Model Updates ......................... 237
Threat Model Updates .............................................................................................. 237
Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Global List............................................................... 238
Global Quarantine .................................................................................................. 238
Safe ................................................................................................................... 239
Unassigned ........................................................................................................... 240
Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Options .................................................................. 241
Threat Data Report .................................................................................................... 242
Export Data .......................................................................................................... 242
Advanced Threat Prevention Classifications ...................................................................... 242
Enable Compatibility Mode for Memory Protection .............................................................. 242
Disconnected Mode Policy Examples ............................................................................... 244
Global Allow policy example ...................................................................................... 244
Quarantine List and Safe List policy examples ................................................................. 246
Threat Protection Policy Overview ................................................................................. 247
Configurable Actions - After Threat is Detected ......................................................... 248

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Reputation Service Sensitivity policies..................................................................... 248
Client Firewall Policies .......................................................................................... 249
Client Firewall options........................................................................................ 249
Client Firewall rules .......................................................................................... 249
Web Protection Policies ......................................................................................... 249
Designate a Threat Protection Signature Update Server ........................................................ 250
Data Guardian............................................................................................................. 251
Data Guardian .......................................................................................................... 251
Advanced Data Guardian ............................................................................................. 255
Set Cover Page Policies ............................................................................................ 263
Cloud Profile Update .................................................................................................. 264
Set Policies to Protect Office Documents in Windows ........................................................... 264
Set Policies for Protected Office Documents ................................................................... 265
Determine Impact on Windows Users for Opt-in or Force Protected Modes ............................... 265
Enable Both Cloud Encryption and Protected Office Documents ............................................ 267
Set Policies to Protect Office Documents in Mac ................................................................. 267
Set Protected Office Document Policies ........................................................................ 268
Set Policies to Protect Office Documents in Mobile Devices .................................................... 268
Set Protected Office Document Policies ........................................................................ 268
Set Policies to Protect Office Documents on the web client ................................................... 269
Set Protected Office Document Policies ........................................................................ 269
Removable Media Encryption ........................................................................................... 269
Removable Media Encryption ........................................................................................ 269
Removable Media Policies that Require Logoff ................................................................ 272
Advanced Removable Media Encryption............................................................................ 272
Removable Media Policies that Require Logoff ................................................................ 281
Mac Encryption............................................................................................................ 281
Mac Encryption ......................................................................................................... 281
Advanced Mac Encryption ............................................................................................ 284
Port Control ............................................................................................................... 285
Port Control ............................................................................................................ 285
Advanced Port Control ................................................................................................ 286
Global Settings ............................................................................................................ 288
Advanced Global Settings ............................................................................................... 289

Welcome
About the Online Help System
Version: 9.10

Attributions, Copyrights, and Trademarks
Dell Encryption is a trademark of Dell Inc.
Protected by one or more U.S. Patents, including: Number 7665125; Number 7437752; and Number 7665118.
The software described in this help system is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in
accordance with the terms of the agreement.
Third Party Software
I.

OpenSSL License - Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
LICENSE ISSUES
==============
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the
original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses
are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact
openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
====================================================================
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
A. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
B. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
C. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)".
D. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please
contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
E. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" * nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
F.

Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

Welcome
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
====================================================================
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This
product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL
implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to
conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this
distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given
attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message
at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution
and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
a. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
b. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
c. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The
word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not
cryptographic related.
d. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory
(application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and
distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence
[including the GNU Public Licence.].
II. Portions of this product use Commons IO, Commons DBCP, and Commons LANG. You may obtain a copy
of the licenses at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
III. Portions of this product use OrientDB. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
IV. Portions of this product use Apache Wink. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
V. Portions of this product use Jackson JSON. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
VI. Portions of this product use Jetty. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
VII. Portions of this product use ActiveMQ. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use jasypt. You may obtain a copy of the license at
VIII.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
IX. Portions of this product make use of zlib. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.zlib.net/zlib_license.html.
/* zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library version 1.2.7, May 2nd, 2012
Copyright (C) 1995-2012 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the
use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
A. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the
original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
B. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being
the original software.
C. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler
jloup@gzip.org madler@alumni.caltech.edu.
X. Portions of this product make use of Apache Tomcat (www.apache.org). You may obtain a copy of the
license at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.txt.
XI. Portions of this product make use of Apache Commons HTTPClient. You may obtain a copy of the license
at http://opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.
XII. Portions of this product make use of log4net. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://logging.apache.org/log4net/license.html.
Portions of this product make use of MVVM Light Toolkit. You may obtain a copy of the license at
XIII.
http://mvvmlight.codeplex.com/license.
XIV. Portions of this product make use of Apache JDBCLog, Apache Software Foundation. You may obtain a
copy of the license at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.txt.
XV. Portions of this product make use of Apache Log4J, Apache Software Foundation. You may obtain a copy
of the license at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.txt.
XVI. Portions of this product make use of Apache Struts, Apache Software Foundation. You may obtain a
copy of the license at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.txt.
Portions of this product make use of Struts2. You may obtain a copy of the license at
XVII.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product make use of Struts Beanutils, Apache Software Foundation. You may obtain
XVIII.
a copy of the license at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.txt.
XIX. Portions of this product make use of Struts Digester, Apache Software Foundation. You may obtain a
copy of the license at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.txt.

Welcome
XX. Portions of this product make use of Apache xmlrpc, Apache Software Foundation. You may obtain a
copy of the license at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.txt.
XXI. Portions of this product make use of Bean Scripting Framework (http://commons.apache.org/bsf/),
Apache License, Version 2.0, January 2004 http://commons.apache.org/license.html.
Portions of this product make use of Apache Commons CLI (http://commons.apache.org/cli/),
XXII.
Apache License, Version 2.0, January 2004 http://commons.apache.org/license.html.
Portions of this product make use of Apache Commons EL (http://commons.apache.org/el/),
XXIII.
Apache License, Version 2.0, January 2004 http://commons.apache.org/license.html.
Portions of this product make use of Groovy. You may obtain a copy of the license at
XXIV.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.html.
Portions of this product make use of H2. You may obtain a copy of the license at
XXV.
http://www.h2database.com/html/license.html.
Portions of this product make use of Spring.net Application Framework. You may obtain a copy of
XXVI.
the license at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.html.
XXVII. Portions of this product make use of Java Service Wrapper
(http://www.tanukisoftware.com/en/index.php). You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://wrapper.tanukisoftware.com/doc/english/licenseOverview.html.
XXVIII. Portions of this product make use of Xalan. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://xml.apache.org/xalan-j/.
Portions of this product make use of FreeMarker. You may obtain a copy of the license at
XXIX.
http://freemarker.sourceforge.net/docs/app_license.html.
Portions of this product make use of Velocity. You may obtain a copy of the license at
XXX.
http://velocity.apache.org/.
Portions of this product make use of MSV. You may obtain a copy of the license at
XXXI.
http://opensource.org/licenses/apache2.0.
XXXII. Portions of this product make use of FLIB. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://opensource.org/licenses/artistic-license.html.
XXXIII. Portions of this product makes use of libraries developed by Boost
(http://www.boost.org/users/license.html), under the following license: Boost Software License - Version
1.0 - August 17th, 2003.
XXXIV. Portions of this product make use of ANTLR. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://antlr.org/license.html.
XXXV. Portions of this product make use of BIRT. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.eclipse.org/org/documents/epl-v10.php.
XXXVI. Portions of this product make use of the getopt function, Copyright © 1987-2002 The Regents of the
University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
A. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
B. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
C. Neither the names of the copyright holders nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
XXXVII. Portions of this product make use of the SHA-2 algorithm, Copyright © 2002, Dr. Brian Gladman
(brg@gladman.me.uk), Worcester, UK. All rights reserved.
A. LICENSE TERMS
The free distribution and use of this software in both source and binary form is allowed (with or
without changes) provided that:
1. Distributions of this source code include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer;
2. Distributions in binary form include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other associated materials;
3. The copyright holder's name is not used to endorse products built using this software without
specific written permission.
DISCLAIMER
This software is provided "as is" with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its
properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and/or fitness for purpose.
XXXVIII. Portions of this product make use of STLport. A copy of the license may be obtained at
http://www.stlport.org/doc/license.html.
A. License Agreement:
Boris Fomitchev grants Licensee a non-exclusive, non-transferable, royalty-free license to use STLport
and its documentation without fee.
By downloading, using, or copying STLport or any portion thereof, Licensee agrees to abide by the
intellectual property laws and all other applicable laws of the United States of America, and to all of
the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
Licensee shall maintain the following copyright and permission notices on STLport sources and its
documentation unchanged:
Copyright 1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev
This material is provided "as is", with absolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Any use is at your
own risk.
Permission to use or copy this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided the
above notices are retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code and to distribute modified
code is granted, provided the above notices are retained, and a notice that the code was modified is
included with the above copyright notice.
The Licensee may distribute binaries compiled with STLport (whether original or modified) without
any royalties or restrictions.
The Licensee may distribute original or modified STLport sources, provided that:

The conditions indicated in the above permission notice are met;

Welcome
The following copyright notices are retained when present, and conditions provided in
accompanying permission notices are met :

Copyright 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company - Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and
sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard
Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
Copyright 1996,97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. - Permission to use, copy, modify,
distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Silicon
Graphics makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology - Permission to use, copy, modify,
distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Moscow
Center for SPARC Technology makes no representations about the suitability of this software
for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
XXXIX. Portions of this product make use of The Legion of Bouncy Castle Software. Copyright (c) 2000 2016 The Legion Of The Bouncy Castle. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.bouncycastle.org/licence.html.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT
OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Note: Our license is an adaptation of the MIT X11 License and should be read as such.
License
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT
OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
XL. Portions of this product make use of ResizableLib. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://opensource.org/licenses/artistic-license-1.0.
XLI. Portions of this product make use of Spring Framework. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
XLII.

Portions of this product use $File:
6

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
A. LEGAL NOTICE,v 1.15 2006/05/03 18:48:33 christos Exp $. Copyright (c) Ian F. Darwin 1986, 1987,
1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1994, 1995. Software written by Ian F. Darwin and others; maintained 1994Christos Zoulas. This software is not subject to any export provision of the United States Department of
Commerce, and may be exported to any country or planet. Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice immediately at the
beginning of the file, without modification, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Portions of this product use UFSD – Paragon NTFS for Windows Driver based on Paragon Universal File
XLIII.
System Driver (UFSD) Technology. Copyright (C) 2008 Paragon Technologie GmbH. All rights reserved. This
software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty.
XLIV.

Portions of this product use JDBC drivers - licensed from DataDirect Technologies.

XLV.
Portions of this product make use of DIMime, available at
http://www.zeitungsjunge.de/delphi/mime/.
XLVI.

Portions of this product make use of RSA Security Inc. PKCS #11 Crypto Token Interface (Cryptoki).

XLVII. Portions of this product use DropNet. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
XLVIII. Portions of this product use Hardcodet WPF NotifyIcon 1.0.8. You may obtain a copy of the license
at http://www.codeproject.com/info/cpol10.aspx.
Portions of this product use MahApps.Metro 1.2.4.0. You may obtain a copy of the license at
XLIX.
http://opensource.org/licenses/ms-pl.
L. Portions of this product use Microsoft Practices Enterprise Library 6.0.1304.0. You may obtain a copy of
the license at http://opensource.org/licenses/ms-pl.
LI. Portions of this product use Microsoft Practices Prism 4.1. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://opensource.org/licenses/ms-pl.
LII. Portions of this product use Microsoft Practices Unity 2.1. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://opensource.org/licenses/ms-pl.
Portions of this product use RestSharp 105.2.3. You may obtain a copy of the license at
LIII.
https://github.com/restsharp/RestSharp/blob/master/LICENSE.txt.
LIV. Portions of this product use System.Data.SQLite 1.0.102.0. You may obtain a copy of the copyright
statement at http://www.sqlite.org/copyright.html.
LV. Portions of this product use android-passwordsafe 0.6.0. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
LVI. Portions of this product use Dropbox.NET 3.4.0. You may obtain a copy of the license at
https://github.com/dropbox/dropbox-sdk-dotnet/blob/master/LICENSE.
7

Welcome
LVII.
Portions of this product use Newtonsoft JSON 9.0.1. You may obtain a copy of the license at
https://raw.githubusercontent.com/JamesNK/Newtonsoft.Json/master/LICENSE.md.
Portions of this product use NT Security Classes for .NET. You may obtain a copy of the license at
LVIII.
http://www.codeproject.com/info/cpol10.aspx.
LIX. Portions of this product use Prism Core 6.1. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
LX. System.IdentityModel.Tokens.Jwt 4.0.2. You may obtain a copy of the license at
https://github.com/AzureAD/azure-activedirectory-identitymodel-extensions-fordotnet/blob/master/LICENSE.txt.
LXI. Portions of this product use Unity 4.0.1. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use the Dropbox Android SDK 1.6.3. You may obtain a copy of the license at
LXII.
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
Portions of this product use the Dropbox json_simple-1.1.jar. You may obtain a copy of the license
LXIII.
at http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
Portions of this product use the Box Android Library V2. You may obtain a copy of the license at
LXIV.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use the Box Java Library V2. You may obtain a copy of the license at
LXV.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use Apache HttpClient Cache 4.2.5. You may obtain a copy of the license at
LXVI.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
LXVII. Portions of this product use Apache HttpClient 4.2.5. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
LXVIII. Portions of this product use Apache HttpCore 4.2.4. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use Apache HttpClient Mime 4.2.5. You may obtain a copy of the license at
LXIX.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use Apache Commons IO 2.4. You may obtain a copy of the license at
LXX.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use Apache Commons Lang 2.6. You may obtain a copy of the license at
LXXI.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
LXXII. Portions of this product use JUnit 4.11. You may obtain a copy of the license at
https://www.eclipse.org/legal/epl-v10.html.
LXXIII. Portions of this product use EasyMock 3.1. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
LXXIV. Portions of this product use Jackson Databind 2.4.4. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
LXXV. Portions of this product use Jackson Core 2.4.4. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
LXXVI. Portions of this product use Jackson Annotations 2.4.4. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
LXXVII. Portions of this product use Apache Maven Wagon 2.2. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
LXXVIII. Portions of this product use Scribe OAuth Library 1.3.0. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
LXXIX. Portions of this product use JSON Web Token Support for the JVM 0.6.0. You may obtain a copy of
the license at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
LXXX. Portions of this product use OneDrive SDK Android 1.2.2. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
LXXXI. Portions of this product use Microsoft Services MSA Auth 0.8.4. You may obtain a copy of the license
at http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
LXXXII. Portions of this product use Adal 1.1.7. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
LXXXIII. Portions of this product use Google API Client Library for Java with Android Platform Extensions and
GSON Extensions 1.20.0. You may obtain a copy of the license at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE2.0.
LXXXIV. Portions of this product use Google Drive API V3 Rev 170 1.22.0. You may obtain a copy of the
license at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
LXXXV. Portions of this product use Backport Util Concurrent 3.1. You may obtain a copy of the license at
https://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0.
LXXXVI. Portions of this product use Apache Commons Logging 1.1.3. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use Flurry Analytics 4.1.0. You may obtain a copy of the license at
LXXXVII.
https://developer.yahoo.com/flurry/legal-privacy/terms-service/flurry-analytics-terms-service.html.
Portions of this product use kSOAP2 3.4.0. You may obtain a copy of the license at
LXXXVIII.
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
LXXXIX. Portions of this product use FindBugs Jsr305. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
XC. Portions of this product use Google Gson 2.3.1. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use Hockey SDK 3.0.2. You may obtain a copy of the license at
XCI.
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
Portions of this product use Picasso 2.5.2. You may obtain a copy of the license at
XCII.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use Circular Floating Action Menu Library 1.0.2. You may obtain a copy of
XCIII.
the license at http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
Portions of this product use Apache Commons Codec 1.8. You may obtain a copy of the license at
XCIV.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use Apache Commons Compress 1.1. You may obtain a copy of the license
XCV.
at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use One Password App Extension 1.8. You may obtain a copy of the license
XCVI.
at http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
XCVII. Portions of this product use Azure Active Directory Authentication Library 1.2.9. You may obtain a
copy of the license at http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
XCVIII. Portions of this product use AF Networking 2.6.3. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.

Welcome
XCIX.
Portions of this product use Box iOS SDK 1.0.11. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
C. Portions of this product use CT Assets Picker Controller 2.9.5. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
CI. Portions of this product use Google API Objective C Client 1.0.422. You may obtain a copy of the license
at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
CII. Portions of this product use Google GTM HTTP Fetcher 1.0.141. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use Google GTM OAuth 2 1.0.126. You may obtain a copy of the license at
CIII.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use Hockey SDK iOS 3.8.6. You may obtain a copy of the license at
CIV.
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
CV. Portions of this product use libextobjc 0.4.1. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
Portions of this product use libPhoneNumber iOS 0.8.11. You may obtain a copy of the license at
CVI.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use MBProgressHUD 0.9.2. You may obtain a copy of the license at
CVII.
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
Portions of this product use NSData Base64 1.0.0. You may obtain a copy of the license at
CVIII.
http://opensource.org/licenses/Zlib.
Portions of this product use OneDrive SDK iOS 1.1.2. You may obtain a copy of the license at
CIX.
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
CX. Portions of this product use RNCryptor 3.0.1. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
Portions of this product use SSZipArchive 1.1. You may obtain a copy of the license at
CXI.
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
Portions of this product use SVProgressHUD 2.0.2. You may obtain a copy of the license at
CXII.
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
Portions of this product use WEPopover 1.0.0. You may obtain a copy of the license at
CXIII.
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
Portions of this product use XMLDictionary. You may obtain a copy of the license at
CXIV.
http://opensource.org/licenses/Zlib.
Portions of this product use NHNetworkTime 1.7. You may obtain a copy of the license at
CXV.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Portions of this product use the Dropbox iOS SDK. You may obtain a copy of the license at
CXVI.
http://opensource.org/licenses/MIT.
CXVII. Portions of this product use Flurry iOS SDK 5.3.0. You may obtain a copy of the license at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.
Trademarks
iPad®, iPhone®, iPod®, iPod touch®, iPod shuffle®, and iPod nano® are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Android and the Android Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google, Inc. in the United States
and other countries.
10

Get Started
Get Started with Dell Data Security
•

Once your environment has been configured in the Server Configuration Tool, ensure that Dell
Services are started.

•

Add Client Access Licenses, as needed.

•

Add Domains from your directory server.

•

If you require that users receive non-default policies upon activation, modify policies at the
appropriate level.

•

Add Groups and Users, as necessary.

•

Assign Administrators, as necessary.

•

Deploy clients.

Log In
To perform a given administrative procedure, an Administrator must first log in to the Remote Management
Console using an appropriate Dell Administrator account.
The Security Management Server installs with a default Super Administrator user name (superadmin) and
password (changeit) that you can use to add additional Dell Administrator accounts.
1.

Open Internet Explorer and type http://server.domain.com:8443/webui/login.

If you are logging in for the first time, in the Username: field, enter superadmin. In the Password:
field, enter changeit.
If you are not logging in for the first time, in the Username: field, enter your Username in one of
the formats listed below. In the Password: field, enter .
user@domain.com (preferred format)
sAMAccountName, such as jsmith
\ - You must specify your domain name as an alias to use this format. For
more information, refer to Add Domains.
If you are not logging in for the first time, in the Username: field, enter your Username in one
of the formats listed below. In the Password: field, enter .

Click Sign in.

To log out, see Log Out.

Log Out
Note: If you are an Account Administrator and make changes to your own account, you must log out and log
back in to see the results.

Get Started

•

Click the gear icon in the top right corner of the Remote Management Console and select Log out
from the drop-down menu.

Dashboard
The Dashboard displays an overview of status information for your enterprise. You can access more detailed
information directly from the Dashboard by clicking its statistics, graphs, and chart legends.
In the top right, select the Widgets menu to add or remove the following options:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Notifications
Protection Status
Threat
Protection History
Inventory History
Summary Statistics

The images below reflect what you may see in the Dashboard. Content may vary based on the features
installed and enabled on your Dell Security Management Server and endpoints.
Click an area below to view a description of the detail you can access by clicking the same area in your
Dashboard.

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

Note: An Advanced Threat Prevention event is not necessarily a threat. An event is generated when a
recognized file or program is quarantined, safe listed, or waived. Threats are a category of events that are
newly detected as potentially unsafe files or programs and require guided remediation.

Get Started

Start Services
Start the following Services:

•

Dell Compatibility Server

•

Dell Compliance Reporter

•

Dell Console Web Services

•

Dell Core Server

•

Dell Device Server

•

Dell Key Server

•

Dell Message Broker

•

Dell Policy Proxy
14

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

•

Dell Security Server

From the Service Panel:
1.

Click Start > Run. Type services.msc and click OK.

In the Services (Local) window, highlight Dell Compatibility Server. Right-click the entry and select
Start.

Continue in the manner above until all Dell Services are started.

Close the Services window.

To stop Services, see Stop Services.

Stop Services
You may find it necessary to shut down the Services to run backups or perform other system maintenance.
While the Server is down, the Policy Proxy cannot poll the Server, which means that it cannot pick up
updated security policies, or activate/reactivate endpoints.
Stop the following Services:

•

Dell Compatibility Server

•

Dell Compliance Reporter

•

Dell Console Web Services

•

Dell Core Server

•

Dell Device Server

•

Dell Key Server

•

Dell Message Broker

•

Dell Policy Proxy

•

Dell Security Server

From the Service Panel:
1.

Click Start > Run. Type services.msc and click OK.

In the Services (Local) window, highlight Dell Compatibility Server. Right-click the entry and select
Stop.

Continue in the manner above until all Dell Services are stopped.

Close the Services window.

To start Services, see Start Services.

Get Started

Change the Superadmin Password
1.

In the masthead at the top of the screen, click the gear icon and select Change superadmin
password.

Enter the Current Password.

Enter the New Password.
The new password must be at least 6 characters, contain at least one capital letter and one of these
characters: ~@#$%^*()|?!{}[].

Confirm the New Password.

Click Update.

NOTE: After three failed login attempts, the superadmin account is locked for five minutes. To change these
settings, see Set or Change Account Lockout Settings.

Components
Remote Management Console
The Remote Management Console allows administrators to monitor the state of endpoints, policy
enforcement, and protection across the enterprise.
For increased security, the Remote Management Console separates administrator duties into administrator
roles. For example, the Security Administrator can change and commit security policies for the entire
enterprise, groups of users, or individual users.
The Remote Management Console has the following features.

•

Centralized management of diverse mobile devices

•

"No change", read-only integration with existing enterprise directory servers

•

Role-based mobile security policy creation and management

•

Administrator-assisted device recovery

•

Separation of administrative duties

•

Automatic distribution of mobile security policies

•

Mobile device inventory

•

Searchable, ODBC-compliant system logs

•

Trusted paths for communication between components

•

Unique encryption key generation and automatic secure key escrow

•

Centralized compliance auditing and reporting

Architecture Drawings

Architecture with Manager

Components
Architecture with Encryption Enterprise for Windows/Manager

Default Port Values
Internal:
Active Directory communication: TCP/389
Email communication (optional): 25
To Front End (if needed):
Communication from external Dell Policy Proxy to Dell Message Broker: TCP/61616 and STOMP/61613
Communication to Back End Dell Security Server: HTTPS/8443
Communication to Back End Dell Core Server: HTTPS/8888 and 9000
Communication to RMI ports - 1099
Communication to Back End Dell Device Server: HTTP(S)/8443 - If your Dell Server is v7.7 or later. If your
Dell Server is pre-v7.7, HTTP(S)/8081.
Dell Message Broker: TCP/61616 and STOMP/61613 (closed or, if configured for DMZ, 61613 is open)
External (if needed):
SQL Database: TCP/1433
LDAP: TCP/389/636 (local domain controller), TCP/3268/3269 (global catalog), TCP/135/49125+ (RPC)

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Dell Compatibility Server: TCP/1099
Dell Compliance Reporter: HTTP(S)/8084 (automatically configured at installation)
Dell Core Server: HTTPS/8888 and 9000 (8888 is automatically configured at installation)
Dell Device Server: HTTP(S)/8081 - If your Dell Server is pre-v7.7/8443 - If your Dell Server is v7.7 or later
Dell Key Server: TCP/8050
Dell Policy Proxy: TCP/8000
Dell Security Server: HTTPS/8443
Client Authentication: HTTPS/8449 (If using Dell Encryption on a Server operating system)
Remote Management Console: HTTPS/8443
Client Communication if using Advanced Threat Prevention: HTTPS/TCP/443
Beacon server if using Data Guardian: HTTP/8446

Proxy Servers
Beginning with v8.1, the Proxy Server implementation, deployment and installation have been simplified.
The new Proxy Server is a simplified web server with a single web application.
Types of Proxy Servers

•

Security Server Proxy (defaults to 8443)

•

Core Server Proxy (defaults to 8888)

•

Device Server Proxy (defaults to 8081) see Note

Note: The purpose of Device Server Proxy is to support legacy Encryption clients (pre-v8.0) that
communicate with port 8081. Newer Encryption clients (v8.0 and later) are configured by the client installer
19

Components
to communicate with the Security Server (or Security Server Proxy) on port 8443. The full Device Server is
not installed in v8.1. The Device Server Proxy forwards all communications to the Security Server behind the
firewall.

Policy Proxy
Policy Proxy serves as intermediary between the Security Management Server and the Encryption client,
delivering information from each to the other.
Time Slotting
In order to prevent Security Management Server traffic jams, Policy Proxies use a configurable time slotting
mechanism that allows them to independently choose well-distributed time slots for communicating with the
Security Management Server.
Polling
On every poll, the endpoint authenticates, checks for policy updates, and uploads inventory. A successful
authentication is required for the process to begin.
Poll Triggers
To poll, a user must be logged in. On the next user login, another poll will occur. The poll information
needed is only available per user, and when that user is logged in.
Other times a poll occurs are as follows:

•

Immediately upon login, after keys are unlocked.

•

When a network status update is signaled by the operating system (cable plugged in, wireless
network connected, VPN goes live).

•

When the polling period elapses, as specified by policy.

Failed Poll Attempts
Policy Proxy poll attempts are based on a timer. When a poll attempt fails, the timer is reset. The length of
time set for the next attempt is based on when the attempt failed. If the device misses a poll when the
device is powered off, the timer will be triggered when the device is next powered on.
If the poll attempt failed while making the attempt, the time is set to one tenth the policy value for the
polling interval. For example - If the polling interval is 100 minutes, then the next interval after a failed
attempt will be 10 minutes. If it fails again, the next interval will still be 10 minutes. The interval will
remain 10 minutes until a successful poll, after which it will return to 100 minute intervals.
General Information

•

Policy Proxy is generally installed on only a few machines.

•

Creates inventory information for the Security Management Server.

•

Passes on to the Security Management Server device inventory it receives when the Encryption client
successfully retrieves policies.

•

Securely distributes security policies and encryption keys to devices via the network when
contacted.

•

May be in your DMZ.

•

Always belongs to a group. By default, all Policy Proxies belong to the same group.

Navigate the Dell Server
Navigation
The Remote Management Console is a central control center that the administrator can use to deploy and
monitor Dell Security for the enterprise. It consists of security and configuration settings that are applied
through policy to groups called Populations.
The menu pane allows you to access the following:
Dashboard
The Remote Management Console opens to the Dashboard. The Dashboard provides graphs and statistics on
endpoint and threat protection as well as summary statistics on populations and operating systems.
Populations
A population is a grouping for which security policies, settings, and actions can be configured. For example,
you can apply security policies at the Enterprise, Domain, User Group, User, Endpoint Group, and Endpoint
levels. For more information about Populations, see Populations. For more information about security
policies, see Manage Security Policies.
Reporting
Reporting menu items provide reports on the protection state of your environment and endpoints,
deployment issues that require action, and devices within the network. You can create and manage reports
with the Manage Reports tool or by launching Compliance Reporter. This menu also allows you to collect,
view, and export audit events to a SIEM server.
Management
Allows you to commit policies, perform recovery, and manage licenses, services, alerts, and Data Guardian
external users.

Masthead icons
The following icons display on the masthead:

(1) Logged in user - The user icon and name of the user that is currently logged on.
(2) Gear icon - From the gear icon, you can Change the Superadmin Password, view information about the
Security Management Server or Security Management Server Virtual, get Dell ProSupport contact
information, and log out.
(3) Question mark icon - From the question mark icon, you can open a help topic that explains the current
screen in the Remote Management Console.

Disconnected Mode
Disconnected mode allows a Security Management Server to manage Advanced Threat Prevention endpoints
without client connection to the Internet or external network. Disconnected mode also allows the Dell

Navigate the Dell Server
Server to manage clients without Internet connection or a provisioned and hosted Advanced Threat
Prevention service. The Dell Server captures all event and threat data in Disconnected mode.
To determine if a Dell Server is running in Disconnected mode, click the gear icon at the top right of the
Remote Management Console and select About. The About screen indicates that a Dell Server is in
Disconnected mode, below the Dell Server version.
Disconnected mode is different than a standard connected installation of Dell Server in the following ways.
Client Activation
An install token is generated when the administrator uploads an Advanced Threat Prevention license, which
allows the Advanced Threat Prevention client to activate.
Remote Management Console
The following items are not available in the Remote Management Console when Dell Server is running in
Disconnected mode:
The following areas specific to Advanced Threat Prevention: Advanced Threats by Priority, (Advanced
Threat) Events by Classification, Advanced Threats Top Ten, and Advanced Threat Prevention Events.
Enterprise > Advanced Threats tab, which provides a dynamic display of detailed events information
for the entire enterprise, including a list of the devices on which events occurred and any actions taken
on those devices for those events.
(Left navigation pane) Services Management, which allows enabling of the Advanced Threat Prevention
service and Product Notifications enrollment.
The following item has been added to the Remote Management Console to support Disconnected Mode:
Enterprise > Advanced Threat Events tab, which lists events information for the entire enterprise
based on information available in the Dell Server, even when running in Disconnected Mode.
Functionality
The following functionality is not available in the Remote Management Console when Dell Server is running
in Disconnected mode:
Security Management Server upgrade, update, and migration
Security Management Server Virtual auto update - update must be done manually
Cloud profile update
Advanced Threat Prevention auto update
Upload of Unsafe or Abnormal Executable files for Advanced Threat Prevention analysis
Advanced Threat Prevention File upload and Log File upload
The following functionality differs:
The Dell Server sends the Global Safe List, Quarantine List, and Safe List to client computers.
The Global Safe List is imported to the Dell Server through the Global Allow policy. For more
information, see the Global Allow policy.
The Quarantine List is imported through Quarantine List policy. For more information, see the
Quarantine List policy.
The Safe List is imported through Safe List policy. For more information, see the Safe List policy.

Dashboard

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

•
•
•
•
•
•

Notifications
Protection Status
Threat
Protection History
Inventory History
Summary Statistics

Navigate the Dell Server

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

Notifications List
The Notifications list provides a configurable summary of news, alerts, and events to display on the
Dashboard or to be sent as email notifications. For more information, see Dashboard Field Descriptions and
Notification Management.
Notification Types
You can select the notification types to include in the list. Notifications of the remaining types are hidden.
Types include:
Update - News of upcoming product updates. To view and receive product updates, you must enroll to
receive them. Select Services Management > Product Notifications, click On, then click Save
Preferences.
Config - News about configuration changes.

Navigate the Dell Server
Knowledge Base - Summaries and links to knowledge base articles with in-depth technical information
such as work-arounds and configuration methods.
Announcement - News of upcoming releases and new products.
License - Alerts when your volume license availability is low, or when your client access license count has
been exceeded.
Threat Protection - A threat alert from Advanced Threat Prevention.
Advanced Threat Event - An event detected by Advanced Threat Prevention. The summary contains a
listing of Critical, Major, Minor, Warning, and Information events, with links to more detailed information.
Threat Event - An event detected by Threat Protection.
Certificate - Certificate expiration notification.
DDP Server Exceptions - A Dell Server communication issue is impacting deliveries of the following
notifications: Threat Protection, Update, Config, Knowledge Base, and Announcement.
After selecting one or more types, click in the neutral space above the list to apply the selections.
Select Clear selected items to reset the selections in this drop-down list.
Priority Levels
Note: Notification priority levels are not related to priority levels displayed on the Dashboard other than in
the Notifications area.
Priorities are Critical, High, Medium, and Low. These priority levels are only relative to one another within a
type of notification.
You can select the priority levels of notifications to include in the Dashboard Notifications area or email
notifications lists. Notifications of the remaining priority levels are not included in the Dashboard or email
notifications lists.
In the Dashboard, after selecting one or more priority levels, click in the neutral space above the drop-down
list to apply your selections.
Select Clear selected items to reset the selections in this drop down list. All notifications will display (unless
filtered elsewhere).

Endpoint Protection Status
In the Endpoint Protection Status section of the Dashboard, you can view endpoint status by platform:
Windows, Mac, Mobile Devices, and All Platforms with a numeric value and bar chart that shows the numbers
of protected and unprotected endpoints. A pie chart representing total protected and unprotected endpoints
displays on the left.
Click a value to display a list of the endpoints represented in the value.

Protection Status
To access this page, click a link in the Dashboard's Endpoint Protection Status graph. You can click a specific
platform type or All. The page provides protection details on the endpoints within that platform.
Platform - Windows, Mac, Mobile Devices, All, Protected, or Not Protected
Endpoint ID - Value that uniquely identifies the endpoint.
26

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Protected - A green check mark indicates the endpoint is protected. The protection status of a Windows
workstation is derived from the current encryption policies and encryption states of the Encryption client
users, as well as the current device encryption policy and state of the endpoint. On the dashboard's Endpoint
Protection Status graph, you can select endpoints by platform, protected endpoints, non-protected
endpoints, or all endpoints. See Protected.
Shield Inventory Received - The date and time that the inventory was received by the Security Management
Server and placed in the queue.
Shield Inventory Processed - The date and time that the inventory was picked up from the queue and
processed. (Note: If the Server is under load, the Processed and Received times may be different, but
usually they will be the same.)
Agent Inventory Received - The date and time that the inventory was received by the Security Management
Server and placed in the queue.
Agent Inventory Processed - The date and time that the inventory was picked up from the queue and
processed (Note: If the Server is under load, the Processed and Received times may be different, but usually
they will be the same.)
Shield - If encryption is installed on the endpoint, an icon displays.
Manager (Windows only) - If installed on the endpoint, an icon displays. This includes endpoints with
activated PBA, HCA, SED, or BitLocker Manager.

Threat Protection Status
Threat Protection monitors the network for viruses, spyware, unwanted programs, suspicious
communications through the firewall, and unsafe websites and downloads.
The Threat Protection Status pane shows threats by category: Critical, Major, Minor, and Warning. Each
category is listed in a colored bar chart with a numerical value for the corresponding number of threats
found during the time frame.
The time frame is selectable, in days: 1, 7, 14, 30, 60, and 90 days.
Click a Threat Category value to display a detailed list of threats included in the category.

Threat Protection Status for Severity Level
To access this page, click a value on the Dashboard's Threat Protection Status graph.
This page provides a detailed view of threats based on individual severity levels and devices that have a
threat within that severity level. The columns list the specific counts for each type of threat event on a
device.
Dropdown list of severity levels - Select a different option from the list (Critical, Major, Minor, Warning,
Information). Critical is the most dangerous threat to the endpoint, and Information is just a notification of
an event that is unlikely to harm the endpoint.
Dropdown list of days - Select a time frame option: 1, 7, 14, 30, 60, and 90 days.
Platform - The platform type
Device ID - Value that uniquely identifies the target device. Click a link to view information about that
endpoint.
Event Count columns - For each device, lists the number for each of the following threat events:

Navigate the Dell Server
Malware/Exploit - Includes counts for viruses, spyware, and unwanted programs. This could be
exploited buffer overflows that seek to execute arbitrary code on a device or attempts to exploit
browser vulnerabilities. Counts may include malware that executes from within memory space.
Web Filter - Includes threats related to web browsing and downloads.
Web Protection - Includes threats related to web browsing and downloads.
Firewall - Includes suspicious communications related to incoming or outgoing traffic and any attacks.
Uncategorized - Lists the number of threats that do not belong in other event counts.

Advanced Threat Prevention Events
The Advanced Threat Prevention Events pane displays a time line of Advanced Threat events over the course
of a month, by file type as assigned by Advanced Threat Prevention.
Click a file type for details of the events of that type.
File types include:
Unsafe - A suspicious file with a high score (-60 to –100) likely to be malware
Abnormal - A suspicious file with a lower score (-1 to –59) less likely to be malware
Quarantined - A file that is moved from its original location, stored in the Quarantine folder, and prevented
from executing on a specific device.
Waived - A file allowed to execute on a specific device.
Cleared - A file that has been cleared within the organization. Cleared files include files that are Waived,
added to the Safe list, and deleted from the Quarantine folder on a device.
For more detail about events, see Advanced Threat Prevention Classifications and Advanced Threats Top Ten

Advanced Threats by Priority
Advanced Threats by Priority classifies suspicious files by priority levels of High, Medium, and Low. This
prioritization helps administrators determine which threats and devices to address first. To view a list of
threats with the corresponding priority level, click a value in the Advanced Threats by Priority field on the
Dashboard.
Files are analyzed for the following attributes:



The file has a Cylance score greater than 80.
A score is assigned to each file that is deemed Abnormal or Unsafe. The score represents the
confidence level that the file is malware. The higher the number, the greater the confidence.



The file is currently running.



The file has been run previously.



The file is set to auto run.



The file is detected by Execution Control.

Files are prioritized based on the number of the above attributes it has:
Low = 0-1 attributes
Medium = 2-3 attributes
28

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
High = 4-5 attributes
As an example, following is the analysis of three threats:
Threat 1
Attribute

Attribute Value

Score
90

Currently running on any
device

True

Ever run on any device

True

Set to auto run on any device

True

Detected by Execution Control

False

Cylance score

Total score

5: High Priority

Threat 2
Attribute

Attribute Value

Score
20

Currently running on any
device

True

Ever run on any device

False

Set to auto run on any device

True

Detected by Execution Control

False

Cylance score

Total score

2: Medium Priority

Threat 3
Attribute

Cylance score
Currently running on any
device
29

Attribute Value

Score
20

False

Navigate the Dell Server

Ever run on any device

False

Set to auto run on any device

False

Detected by Execution Control

True

+5
Total score

5: High Priority

Advanced Threat Prevention Classifications
Advanced Threat Prevention can provide details on the static and dynamic characteristics of files. This
allows administrators to not only block threats, but also to understand threat behavior in order to further
mitigate or respond to threats.
Type of Threat
Threats are classified by the type of threat - Malware, Dual Use, and Potentially Unwanted Program.

Malware
If the file is identified as a piece of malware, the file should be removed or quarantined as soon as possible.
Verified malware can be further subclassified as one of the following:
Subclass

Definition

Examples

Backdoor

Malware that provides unauthorized access to a system, bypassing security
measures.

Back Orifice,
Eleanor

Bot

Malware that connects to a central Command and Control (C&C) botnet
server.

QBot, Koobface

Downloader Malware that downloads data to the host system.
Dropper

Malware that installs other malware on a system.

Exploit

Malware that attacks a specific vulnerability on the system.

FakeAlert

Malware that masquerades as legitimate security software to trick the user
into fixing fake security problems at a price.

Generic

Any malware that does not fit into an existing category.

InfoStealer Malware that records login credentials and/or other sensitive information.
Ransom

Malware that restricts access to system or files and demands payment for
removal of restriction, thereby holding the system for ransom.

Remnant

Any file that has malware remnants post removal attempts.

Rootkit

Malware that enables access to a computer while shielding itself or other
files to avoid detection and/or removal by administrators or security
technologies.

StagedDownloader

Fake AV White
Paper

Snifula
CryptoLocker,
CryptoWall

TDL, Zero Access
Rootkit

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

Trojan

Malware that disguises itself as a legitimate program or file.

Zeus

Virus

Malware that propagates by inserting or appending itself to other files.

Sality, Virut

Worm

Malware that propagates by copying itself to another device.

Code Red, Stuxnet

Dual Use
Dual Use indicates the file can be used for malicious and non-malicious purposes. Caution should be used
when allowing the use of these files in your organization. For example, while PsExec can be a useful tool for
executing processes on another system, that same benefit can be used to execute malicious files on another
system.
Subclass

Definition

Crack

Technologies that can alter (or crack) another application in order to
bypass licensing limitations or Digital Rights Management protection (DRM).

Generic

Any Dual Use tool that does not fit into an existing category.

KeyGen

MonitoringTool

Technologies which can generate or recover/reveal product keys that can
be used to bypass Digital Rights Management (DRM) or licensing protection
of software and other digital media.
Technologies that track a user's online activities without awareness of the
user by logging and possibly transmitting logs of one or more of the
following:

•
•
•
•
•
•

user keystrokes
email messages
chat and instant messaging
web browsing activity
screenshot captures
application usage

Technologies that can reveal a password or other sensitive user credentials
either by cryptographically reversing passwords or by revealing stored
passwords.
Technologies that can access another system remotely and administer
RemoteAccess commands on the remote system, or monitor user activities without user
notification or consent.
Pass Crack

Tool

Examples

Programs that offer administrative features but can be used to facilitate
attacks or intrusions.

Veriato 360,
Refog Keylogger

l0phtcrack, Cain
& Abel
Putty, PsExec,
TeamViewer
Nmap, Nessus,
P0f

Potentially Unwanted Programs
The file has been identified as a Potentially Unwanted Program. This indicates that the program may be
unwanted, despite the possibility that users consented to download it. Some PUPs may be permitted to run
on a limited set of systems in your organization (EX. A VNC application allowed to run on Domain Admin
devcies). A Dell Server administrator can choose to waive or block PUPs on a per device basis or globally
quarantine or safelist based on company policies. Depending on how much analysis can be performed against
a PUP, further subclassification may be possible. Those subclasses are shown below and will aid an Admin in
determining whether a particular PUP should be blocked or allowed to run:

Navigate the Dell Server

Subclass

Definition

Examples

Adware

Technologies that provide annoying advertisements (example: pop-ups) or
provide bundled third-party add-ons when installing an application. This usually
Gator, Adware
occurs without adequate notification to the user about the nature or presence
Info
of the add-on, control over installation, control over use, or the ability to fully
uninstall the add-on.

Corrupt

Any executable that is malformed and unable to run.

Game

Technologies that create an interactive environment with which a player can
play.

Generic

Any PUP that does not fit into an existing category.

Steam Games,
League of
Legends

HackingTool Technologies that are designed to assist hacking attempts.

Cobalt Strike,
MetaSp0it

Portable
Application

Turbo

Program designed to run on a computer independently, without needing
installation.

Scripting Tool Any script that is able to run as if it were an executable.
Technologies that place additional buttons or input boxes on-screen within a
UI.

Toolbar

AutoIT,
py2exe
Nasdaq
Toolbar, Bring
Me Sports

Score
A Score is assigned to each file. Negative scores, from -1 to -100 denote files that are deemed Abnormal or
Unsafe. The score represents the confidence level that the file is malware. The higher the negative number,
the greater the confidence.
File Type
The file is assigned a type, based on the score.
File Types:



Unsafe: A file with a score ranging from -60 to -100. An Unsafe file is one in which the Advanced
Threat Prevention agent finds attributes that greatly resemble malware.



Abnormal: A file with a score ranging from -1 to -59. An Abnormal file has a few malware attributes
but fewer than an unsafe file, thus is less likely to be malware.

Note: Occasionally, a file may be classified as Unsafe or Abnormal even though the score displayed doesn’t
match the range for the classification. This could result from updated findings or additional file analysis
after the initial detection. For the most up-to-date analysis, enable Auto Upload in the Device Policy.
Priority Level
The file is given a Priority Level. The priority level helps administrators determine which threats and
devices to address first. For more information, see Advanced Threats by Priority.

Advanced Threats Top Ten

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Click Threats to view the threats found on the largest number of devices.
Click a threat to display additional information about the threat. Details display on a new page.
Click Devices to view a list of devices that have the largest number of threats.
Click a device to display additional information about the device. Details display on a new page.

Endpoint Protection History
This graph gives a time line snapshot of the past 90 days of the total number of endpoints that are protected
and total number that are not protected. This graph is especially useful during initial deployment, when
moving toward complete protection.
The green bars represent the total number of protected endpoints. The red bars represent the total number
of endpoints that are not protected.

Endpoint Inventory History
This graph gives a time line snapshot of the past 90 days of the total number of endpoints that have
communicated with and sent inventory to the Security Management Server and the total number that have
not sent inventory.

Summary Statistics
Summary Statistics provides a breakdown of the following:



Domains



User groups



Endpoint groups



AD users



Local users



Endpoints



Protected



Not protected



Shields



Managers



Modified policies

Summary Statistics provides a breakdown of endpoints by platform, with a link to a detailed report for the
selected platform:



Windows



Mac



Mobile device



All

Navigate the Dell Server

Endpoint OS Report
To access this page, click a platform link on the Dashboard's Summary Statistics. If you click All and the
Platform Report page opens, click view in the OS Report column.
OS/Version - Operating system name and version as reported in the endpoint's inventory
Count - Number of endpoints or devices
Shielded - Number of encrypted endpoints for that OS and version
Unshielded - Number of endpoints for that OS and version that are not encrypted
Platform Report - Click view for a report on all the platforms
Endpoint List - Click the icon to navigate to the Endpoints page and the list of endpoints for that OS and
version

Platform Report
To access this page, click All on the Dashboard's Summary Statistics. If you click a specific platform link and
access the Endpoint OS Report page, click view in the Platform Report column.
Platform - Windows, Mac, and MDM (Mobile Device Management)
Count - Number of endpoints or devices Platform Reportfor that platform
Shielded - Number of encrypted endpoints for that platform
Unshielded - Number of endpoints for that platform that are not encrypted
OS Report - Click view for a report based on each operating system/version for that platform
Endpoint List - Click the icon to navigate to the Endpoints page and the list of endpoints for that platform

Populations

Populations
A population is a grouping for which policies, settings, and actions can be configured.
To access a Populations page, click Populations in the left pane of the Remote Management Console and
select a Population, for example, Populations > Enterprise.
Tabs available on each Populations page provide information, allow you to edit detail of the Population, and
provide configuration options for that Population. The table lists the tabs available for each Population.

Populations

Details
Security
Key
Endpoint
&
Members Settings
Policies
Server Groups
Actions

Enterprise

●

Domains

●

User Groups

●

Users

●

Endpoints

User
Users
Groups

Admin

Advanced
Threat
Threat
Events
Events
●

●

●
●
●

●

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Endpoint
Groups

●

Endpoints

●

Administrators

●
●

●

To access the tabs for each Population:



Enterprise - Click Populations > Enterprise.



Populations other than Enterprise - Click a Population link, then search for or click a Domain, User
Group, User, Endpoint Group, Endpoint, or Administrator link.
Note: The tabs available for an Administrator may vary, depending on the role.

Enterprise

View or Modify Enterprise-Level Policies
To view or modify Enterprise-level policies, follow these steps:
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Enterprise.

Click the Security Policies tab.

Select the technology group, such as Windows Encryption, or policy group, such as Policy-Based
Encryption, to view or modify.

View Threat Events
Threats are categorized as Malware/Exploit, Web Filter, Firewall, or Uncategorized events. The list of threat
events can be sorted by any of the column headers. You can view threat events for the entire enterprise or
for a specific endpoint. To view threat events of a specific endpoint, from the Enterprise Threat Events tab,
select the endpoint's device in the Device ID column.
To view threat events in the enterprise, follow these steps:
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Enterprise.

Click the Threat Events tab.

Select the desired severity level and time period for which to display events.

To view threat events on a specific endpoint, follow these steps:
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Endpoints.

Search or select a Hostname, then the Threat Events tab.

Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats
Advanced Threats tab
If the Advanced Threat Prevention service is provisioned and licenses are available, the Advanced Threats
tab provides a dynamic display of detailed events information for the entire enterprise, including a list of
the devices on which events occurred and any actions taken on those devices for those events. For
information about provisioning the service, see Provision Advanced Threat Prevention Service.
To access the Enterprise Advanced Threats tab, follow these steps:
35

Navigate the Dell Server
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Enterprise.

Select the Advanced Threats tab.

Information about events, devices, and actions are organized on the following tabs:
Protection - Lists potentially harmful files and scripts and details about them, including the devices on
which the files and scripts are found.
Agents - Provides information about devices running the Advanced Threat Prevention client as well as
the option to export the information or remove devices from the list.
Global List - Lists files in the Global Quarantine and Safe list and provides the option to move files to
these lists.
Options - Provides a way to integrate with Security Information Event Management (SIEM) software using
the Syslog feature as well as export Advanced Threat data.
Certificate - Allows certificate upload. After upload, certificates display on the Global List tab and can
be Safe listed.
Tables on the tabs can be organized in these ways:
Add or remove columns from the table - Click the arrow next to any column header, select Columns,
then select the columns you want to see. Clear the check box of columns you want to hide.
Sort the data - Click a column header.
Group by a column - Drag the column header up, until it turns green.
Filter based on data of one column - click the down-arrow on any column to display the context menu,
and select Filter.
Advanced Threat Events tab
The Advanced Threat Events tab displays information about events for the entire enterprise based on
information available in the Security Management Server.
The tab displays if the Advanced Threat Prevention service is provisioned and licenses are available.
To export data from the Advanced Threat Events tab, click the Export button and select Excel or CSV file
format.
Note: Excel files are limited to 65,000 rows. CSV files have no size limit.
For a list of fields and filters on the tab, see Advanced Threat Events tab fields and filters.
Domains

Domains
On the Domains page, you can add a domain or search and select a domain to View or Modify Domain
Information.
Add a Domain
To add a Domain, follow these steps:
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Domains.

On the Domains page, click Add.

Complete the fields on the Add Domains page.

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Host Name - Enter the fully qualified host name or the computer name and domain portion of the
hostname (for example, ..com) for the enterprise directory server.
Port - Enter a port for the directory server. If you do not specify a port, the default port of 389 is
used. The secure port, 636, uses an SSL connection instead of clear text. Global catalog ports are
3268 (clear-text) and 3269 (secure).
Distinguished Name - This field is populated when you tab from the completed Host Name field or
refresh the URL. If necessary, correct the entry to reflect the domain (for example,
DC=domainname, DC=com).
Secure LDAP - Select this check box for LDAPS.
User Name - Enter a User Name with rights for the domain to read and run queries on the enterprise
directory server. The format must be UPN, such as user@domain.com.
Password - Enter a Password with rights for the domain to read and run queries on the enterprise
directory server.
4.

In the Domain Alias area, enter the domain name or other alias and click Add. It is recommended
that you add a pre-Windows 2000 domain name as an alias. You may enter any UPN suffixes that are
allowed for the domain and are configured in the enterprise directory server.
A Domain Alias is a mapping the Dell Server uses to select which domains to search to locate users
that might match the suffix in the UPN.

Click Add Domain.

Users
Users are added through reconciliation. Reconciliation is the automated process the Dell Server uses to
compare user data in the Dell Server database with user data in the enterprise directory server and update
the Dell Server database when necessary.
In the left pane, click Populations > Users and then click a User Name, to view details about the user. Click
the arrow next to a User Name to view the Common Name, sAM Account Name, and User Principal Name.
Add a User by Domain
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Users.

On the Users page, click Add Users by Domain.

In the Add Users by Domain dialog, select a domain from the pull-down list.

In the Full name field, enter the exact text for the user name or use the wildcard character (*). For
best results, use non-wild card characters at the beginning of the filter (e.g., User* instead of *ser).

Select Common Name, Universal Principal Name, or sAMAccountName from the pull-down list.
A Common Name, Universal Principal Name, and sAMAccountName must be defined in the enterprise
directory server for every user. If a user is a member of a Domain or Group but does not appear in
the Domain or Group Members list in the Remote Management Console, ensure that all three names
are properly defined for the user in the enterprise directory server.

Click Search. Depending on the size, this may take a few minutes to populate.
If the query is too large, a dialog prompts you to revise the query.

Select users from the directory user list to add to the Domain. The user names are added to the
field below the list.

Navigate the Dell Server
8.

Click X to remove the user name from the field or click Add.

User Groups
On the User Groups page, you can add a user group, edit User Group priority or search and select a user
group to View or Modify User Group Policies and Information.
Add a User Group
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > User Groups.

On the User Groups page, click Add.

Select the type of User Group from the pull-down list: Active Directory User Group or ADMINDEFINED User Group

Select a domain from the pull-down list.

For Active Directory User Groups, follow these steps:
a.

Enter the exact text for the Group Name or use the wildcard character (*).

b. Click Search. Depending on the size, this may take a few minutes to populate.
c.

Select a group from the list to add to the Domain. The group name is added to the field
below the list.
Click the X in the group name to remove the group name from the field.

d.
6.

Click Add.

For ADMIN-DEFINED User Groups, follow these steps:
a.

Enter the exact text for the Group Name or use the wildcard character (*).

b. Enter a Description for the group.
c.

Click Add Group.

Notes:
Universal security groups are not supported.
Nested Groups are not supported.
Only User Groups with a Group Scope of Universal are supported for domains that connect through
the Global Catalog Port.

Add Non-Domain Users
To add non-domain users, the non-domain activation feature can be enabled by contacting Dell ProSupport
and requesting instructions.

View or Modify Domain Policies and Information
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Domains.

Search or select the appropriate Domain Name to display Domain Detail.
When you click a Domain, the Domain Detail page displays.

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
3.

Click the tab that corresponds with the action you want to perform:
Security Policies - To view or modify policies of the Domain, click Security Policies.
Details & Actions - To view properties of the Domain, click Details & Actions
Members - To view, add, or modify information for Groups and Users within the Domain. For
instructions on how to perform these tasks, refer to the appropriate topic:
Add Users to Domain
Add User Groups
View or Modify User Information
View or Modify User Group Information
Settings - To configure LDAP settings for the Domain, click Settings. Refer to Add Domains for
instructions.
Key Server - To configure components for use with Kerberos Authentication/Authorization, click Key
Server. See Domain Key Server for instructions.

Domain Details & Actions
The Domain Details & Actions tab lists the properties of a domain.
To access the Domain Details & Actions tab, follow these steps:
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Domains.

Search or select a Domain Name, then the Details & Actions tab.

Details displayed on the Domain Details & Actions tab:
Domain Name - Name of the domain server. This should match the domain name in the title of the page.
Location - The location (path) of the domain within the enterprise structure. This information is derived
from the fully qualified host name or the computer name and domain portion of the hostname entered when
the domain was added. Example: /com/enterpriseserver
LDAP Url - URL to the active directory. This field is populated after adding the domain. The information is
derived from the completed Host Name field.
Example - LDAP://domainname.com:portnumber/DC=domainname,DC=com
To configure LDAP settings for the domain, click the Settings tab.
Status - Describes the health of the domain server (Good, Fair, Poor).

Domain Members
This page allows you to view, add, or modify information for Groups and Users within the Domain.
To access the Domain Members tab, follow these steps:
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Domains.

Search or select a Domain Name, then the Members tab.

From this tab, you can perform these actions:

Navigate the Dell Server
Add Users to Domain - Allows you to add users by domain
Add Group - Allows you to add a user group by domain
Select to view the following information about Groups & Users, Users only, or Groups only:
User/Group - Each user or user group in the Domain. Click an entry to view details.
Distinguished Name
CN is the common name, either a user or group name.
OU is the organizational unit name, for example, Dallas.
DC are domain components, for example, DC=Organization, DC=com
Common Name - For a user, the user name; for a group, the group name
User - Column displays a green checkmark
Group - Column displays a green checkmark

Domain Settings
This page allows you to configure or modify LDAP settings for the Domain.
To access the Domain Settings tab, follow these steps:
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Domains.

Search or select a Domain Name, then the Settings tab.

On the Domain Settings tab, you can view this information:
Directory URL - Lists the current URL for the enterprise directory server. If you modify the settings, click
Refresh URL.
Host Name - The fully qualified host name or the computer name and domain portion of the hostname (for
example, ..com) for the enterprise directory server.
Port - The port for the directory server. If you do not specify a port, the default port of 389 is used. The
secure port, 636, uses an SSL connection instead of clear text. Global catalog ports are 3268 (clear-text) and
3269 (secure).
Distinguished Name - This field is populated when you tab from the completed Host Name field or refresh
the URL. If necessary, correct the entry to reflect the domain (for example, DC=domainname, DC=com).
Secure LDAP - Select this check box for LDAPS.
User Name - The User Name with rights to read and run queries on the enterprise directory server. The
format must be UPN, such as user@domain.com.
Password - Enter a Password with rights to read and run queries on the enterprise directory server.
Alias - A mapping that the Security Management Server uses to select which domains to search to locate
users that might match the suffix in the UPN. The domain name or other alias. It is recommended that you
add a pre-Windows 2000 domain name as an alias. You may enter any UPN suffixes that are allowed for the
domain and are configured in the enterprise directory server.
Click Add, and the entry populates the field below.
Select an alias in the list, and click Remove Selected.

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Update Domain - Click to update changes.

Domain Key Server
This page allows you to view or modify components for use with Kerberos Authentication/Authorization.
Account - Enter an account name.
Click Add Account, and the entry populates the field below.
Select an account in the list, and click Remove Selected.
To access the Domain Key Server tab, follow these steps:
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Domains.

Search or select a Domain Name, then the Key Server tab.

User Groups

User Groups
On the User Groups page, you can add a user group, edit User Group priority or search and select a user
group to View or Modify User Group Policies and Information.
Add a User Group
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > User Groups.

On the User Groups page, click Add.

Select the type of User Group from the pull-down list: Active Directory User Group or ADMINDEFINED User Group

Select a domain from the pull-down list.

For Active Directory User Groups, follow these steps:
a.

Enter the exact text for the Group Name or use the wildcard character (*).

b. Click Search. Depending on the size, this may take a few minutes to populate.
c.

Select a group from the list to add to the Domain. The group name is added to the field
below the list.
Click the X in the group name to remove the group name from the field.

d.
6.

Click Add.

For ADMIN-DEFINED User Groups, follow these steps:
a.

Enter the exact text for the Group Name or use the wildcard character (*).

b. Enter a Description for the group.
c.

Click Add Group.

Notes:
Universal security groups are not supported.
Nested Groups are not supported.

Navigate the Dell Server
Only User Groups with a Group Scope of Universal are supported for domains that connect through
the Global Catalog Port.

Remove User Groups
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > User Groups.

Click a Group Name link or enter a filter to search for available Groups.
Note: The wildcard character (*) may be used but is not required at the beginning or end of the text.

Select a row to highlight it.

At the top, click Delete.
Note: As another option, click a Group Name link and select the Details & Actions tab. Click Remove
Group.

If you remove a User Group that has Administrative privileges and later re-add the Group, it remains an
Administrator Group.

Find User Groups
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > User Groups.

Enter a filter to search for available Groups.
Note: The wildcard character (*) may be used but is not required at the beginning or end of the text.

Click Search.
A Group or list of Groups displays, based on your search filter.

View or Modify User Group Policies and Information
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > User Groups.

Search or select the appropriate Group Name to display User Group Detail.
Note: The wildcard character (*) may be used but is not required at the beginning or end of the text.
When you click a Group Name, the User Group Detail page displays.

Click the tab that corresponds with the action you want to perform:
Security Policies - To view or modify policies of the Group, click Security Policies.
Details & Actions - To view properties of the Group, click Details & Actions. Viewable information
includes:
Group Name: Group1 (Domain\Group1)
Distinguished Name: CN=Group1, OU=Dallas, DC=Organization, DC=com
Common Name: Group1
Last Modified in Directory - date and timestamp
Last Reconciled - date and timestamp
Members - To view or modify the information of a User in the Group, click Members. The list of
Users in the Group displays. Click a User to view the User's Security Policies, Details & Actions,
Endpoints, User Groups, and Admin. For instructions on how to view or modify User information,

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
refer to View or Modify User Information.
Admin - To view, assign, or modify Administrator Roles assigned to the Group, click Admin. Select
or deselect Administrator Roles to modify Administrator Roles assigned to the Group. For more
information about privileges available to each Administrator Role, refer to Administrator Roles.
4.

If modified, click Save.

VDI User Policies
To manage policy for users in a VDI environment, create a Windows Domain group, associate domain users
with that group, and then import the group into Security Management Server. This allows Dell Server to
manage the users and their policies.
Policy settings differ, based on whether persistent or non-persistent VDI is deployed in the environment. For
an explanation of the differences between persistent and non-persistent VDI, see Persistent vs. NonPersistent VDI.
Policy and Configuration Requirements for VDI Users
The policy requirements below are for VDI Users running Advanced Threat Prevention. The list includes only
policies that are significant for VDI Users. VDI Endpoint Group policy settings must also meet certain
requirements. See Policy and Configuration Requirements for VDI Endpoint Groups.
Note: Ensure that you turn off Advanced Threat Prevention Agent Auto Update. In the left pane of the
Remote Management Console, select Management > Services Management > Advanced Threats - Agent
Auto Update, then select Off.
Note: With Persistent VDI Groups, ensure that roaming user profiles are configured.
These policy and configuration settings for VDI Users must be configured before VDI client activation:
Persistent VDI Group Non-Persistent VDI
setting
Group setting

Technology

Related topics:

114

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
CAL Information
License Management
Services Management

Services Management
Access Services Management from the left pane of the Remote Management Console, Management >
Services Management. The following options are available:
Provision or Recover the Advanced Threat Prevention service - After the service is provisioned, clients are
automatically provisioned with Advanced Threat Prevention. For more information, see Provision or Recover
Advanced Threat Prevention Service.
Enroll to receive Advanced Threat Prevention agent auto updates - After enrollment, clients can
automatically download and apply updates from the Advanced Threat Prevention server. For more
information, see Enroll for Agent Auto Update.
Export audit events - Audit events can be exported to a syslog server or to a local file. For more
information, see Export Events to SIEM Server.

Provision or Recover Advanced Threat Prevention Service
The Advanced Threat Prevention service is provisioned and recovered, if necessary, through the Services
Management Advanced Threats tab. Only the System Administrator can provision and recover the service.
After provisioning is complete, the Services Management page displays the contact information of the
administrator who provisioned the service and a button, Back Up Certificate. To back up the certificate,
click Back Up Certificate then select Download Existing Certificate. Save the certificate to a secure
location separate from the server running Security Management Server or Security Management Server
Virtual.
Provision service
To provision the Advanced Threat Prevention service:
1.

In the left pane of the Remote Management Console, click Management > Services Management.

Select the Advanced Threats tab.

Click Setup Advanced Threat Prevention Service.

Follow the guided setup and complete necessary fields in the Service Setup dialogs.
Regional provisioning to support geographical data centers is available for these regions: NA (North
America), EU (EMEA), and AU (APAC).
Dell recommends that you download and back up the Advanced Threat Prevention certificate in a safe
location. The certificate will be required if at a future time service recovery is necessary. The guided
setup prompts you to download and back up the certificate.

Clients are automatically provisioned with Advanced Threat Prevention.
After provisioning is complete, the Setup link no longer displays.
Recover service
You will need your backed up certificate to recover the Advanced Threat Prevention service.
1.
115

In the left pane of the Remote Management Console, click Management > Services Management.

Navigate the Dell Server
2.

Click Recover Advanced Threat Prevention Service.

Follow the guided service recovery dialogs and upload the Advanced Threat Prevention certificate
when prompted.

Enroll for Advanced Threat Prevention Agent Auto Updates
You can enroll to receive Advanced Threat Prevention agent auto updates. Enrolling to receive agent auto
updates allows clients to automatically download and apply updates from the Advanced Threat Prevention
server. Updates are released monthly.
Receive agent auto updates
To enroll to receive agent auto updates:
1.

In the left pane of the Remote Management Console, click Management > Services Management.

On the Advanced Threats tab, under Agent Auto Update, click the On button then click the Save
Preferences button.

Stop receiving agent auto updates
To stop receiving agent auto updates:
1.

In the left pane of the Remote Management Console, click Management > Services Management.

On the Advanced Threats tab, under Agent Auto Update, click the Off button, then click the Save
Preferences button.

Events Management - Export Audit Events to a SIEM Server
To export audit events to a syslog server or to a local file:
1.

In the left pane of the Remote Management Console, click Management > Services
Management.

Select the Events Management tab.

Click the Save Preferences button.

Product Notifications
You can enroll to receive notifications of product updates, recommended configuration changes, and
relevant Knowledge Base articles.
Receive product notifications
To enroll to receive product notifications:
1.

In the left pane of the Remote Management Console, click Management > Services Management.

Select the Product Notifications tab.
116

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
3.

Click the On button, then click the Save Preferences button.

Stop receiving product notifications
To stop receiving product notifications:
1.

In the left pane of the Remote Management Console, click Management > Services Management.

Select the Product Notifications tab.

Click the Off button, then click the Save Preferences button.

Notification Management

Notification Management
The Notification Management page lets you manage email notifications.
To add an email notification:
1.

In the left pane of the Remote Management Console, click Management > Notification
Management.

Click the Add button and fill in the dialog:
Email: Enter or select your email address.
Notification Type: Select the type of alert you want to add.
Priority Level: Select the priority levels of notifications.
Email Frequency: Select how often you want to receive alerts of this type. (Default frequency is 24
hours.)

Press Enter when complete.

To edit an alert:

•

Select the alert you want to change, click Edit, make the changes, and press Enter.

To delete an alert:

•

Select the alert you want to delete, and click Delete.

Related topics:
License Management
Enable SMTP Server for Email Notifications

Enable SMTP Server for Email Notifications
If using Data Guardian, these settings are automated by using the Server Configuration Tool.
Use this procedure if you need to enable the SMTP Server for email notifications for purposes outside of Data
Guardian.
When configuration changes are complete, restart the Security Server service. The Security Server service
must be restarted in order for the settings to be updated.
NotificationObjects.config

117

Navigate the Dell Server
To configure your SMTP server for email notifications, modify the NotificationObjects.config file located at
.
Modify the following:

Notification.config
If your email server requires authentication, modify the Notification.config file located at .
Modify the following:

External User Management

Allow or Block Access
To allow or block Data Guardian access for users who are not in the organization's domain:
1.

In the left pane of the Remote Management Console, click Management > External User
Management.

Select the Registration Access tab.

Click Add.

Select Registration Access Type:
Blacklist - Blocks registration and file access for a user or a domain.
Full Access List - Grants registration and file access for a user or domain. If the user or domain is
also on the blacklist, no access is granted.

Enter either a domain to set access for the entire domain, or email address to set access only for a
single user.

Click Add.

External users can also be added to the blacklist from the Audit Events page, if the user is associated with an
audit event:
1.

In the left pane of the Remote Management Console, click Reporting > Audit Events.

118

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

In the User column, click the

icon to the right of the user name to add to the blacklist.

Key Request
Dell Data Guardian external users can request a key from an internal user in order to access a protected
Office document. Key requests display on the Key Request Management page until the internal user approves
or denies the request. After 48 hours, key requests are removed from the list. At that time, external users
can again request access.
If the internal user is not available or has left the enterprise, an administrator can use this page to approve
or deny requests.
Columns include:

•
•
•
•
•
•

User - external user making the request
File Name
Request Date
Request Expiration
File Owner - internal user
Approve/Deny

To approve or deny a request:
1.

In the left pane of the Remote Management Console, click Management > Key Request
Management.

Select the Key Request tab.

Search for specific requests or select requests in the list that displays.
To select multiple requests to approve or deny, press Ctrl and then select the requests.
To select multiple sequential requests, select the first request and then press Shift and select the
last request in the sequential list.

Click Approve or Deny.

Note: To approve or deny a single request, click the approve
request.

or deny

icon at the right end of the

Key Revocation
The administrator can revoke access to files, at both the user level and the file level.
To revoke access:
1.

In the left pane of the Remote Management Console, click Management > External User
Management.

Select the Key Revocation tab.

Select the user or file from which to revoke files.

Click Revoke Keys.

Change the Superadmin Password

119

Navigate the Dell Server
1.

In the masthead at the top of the screen, click the gear icon and select Change superadmin
password.

Enter the Current Password.

Enter the New Password.
The new password must be at least 6 characters, contain at least one capital letter and one of these
characters: ~@#$%^*()|?!{}[].

Confirm the New Password.

Click Update.

NOTE: After three failed login attempts, the superadmin account is locked for five minutes. To change these
settings, see Set or Change Account Lockout Settings.

Change Account Lockout Settings
After three failed login attempts, the superadmin account is locked for five minutes. To change these
settings:
1.

Open \conf\application.properties.

Edit the following property to change the maximum allowed number of failed login attempts.
login.cooldown.max.failed.attempts=3

Edit the following property to change the length of lockout time after the maximum allowed number
of failed login attempts is reached.
login.cooldown.minutes=5

Save the file, and restart the Security Server.

120

Manage Policies
Manage Security Policies
You can apply security policies at the Enterprise, Domain, User Group, User, Endpoint Group, and Endpoint
levels. The initial deployment of your Security Management Server or Security Management Server Virtual
has default policy settings that allow your enterprise to get started with Dell Security, but you can
customize the security and configuration settings. If you've migrated from an earlier version of Security
Management Server or Security Management Server Virtual, your policy settings have been migrated for you.
Security policies are grouped by technology. Click a Technology Group to view its policies and policy
descriptions.
Windows Encryption

Threat Prevention

Mac Encryption

Full Disk Encryption

Advanced Threat Prevention

Dell Volume Encryption

Self-Encrypting Drive (SED)

Threat Protection

Mac Global Settings

Policy-Based Encryption

Web Protection

Bitlocker Encryption

Client Firewall

Server Encryption

Protection Settings

Authentication

Removable Media Encryption

Port Control

Pre-Boot Authentication

Windows Media Encryption

Windows Port Control

Windows Authentication

Mac Media Encryption

Windows Device Control

Microsoft Passport

Media Encryption Settings

Data Guardian
Cloud Encryption

Global Settings
Settings

Protected Office Documents
Mobile Client
Web Portal
Settings

The following override information displays at the top of the Security Policies page:
Override count - the number of policy settings that are changed from their default settings.
Uncommitted overrides - the number of changes from default settings that are not yet committed.
NOTE: The Security Policies page for a population displays overrides to localizable policies in the browser
language only.

Icons and their meanings:
The master switch for policies in the subgroup is On, which means the policy group is enabled.
Policies in the group are sent to clients when policies are committed.
Policies in the subgroup are not enabled.

121

Manage Policies
At least one default setting in the policy group has been overridden.
Group of policy settings that has no master switch.
The policy change is not yet committed.
The policy value can be localized, in order for policies to display on the endpoint computer in a
selected language. For more information, see Localize Policies Displayed on the Endpoint Computer
and Localizable_policies.
The default setting of a localizable policy is overridden.
A localizable policy change is not yet committed.
To remove a policy override, hover over the red flag next to the policy name. The red flag becomes a red X.
Click the red X to revert to the default value.

Group precedence
You can Modify Group Precedence. Group precedence creates a weight associated with the specific group it
is assigned to, and that weight is used in policy arbitration for all policy overrides.

Related topics:
View or Modify Enterprise-Level Policies
View or Modify Domain Policies and Information
View or Modify User Group Policies and Information
View or Modify User Policies and Information
View or Modify Endpoint Group Policies and Information
View or Modify Endpoint Policies and Information

Localize Policies Displayed on the Endpoint Computer
Localizable policies are indicated with this icon:
To localize policies that are displayed on the endpoint computer, follow these steps:
1.

In the left pane, expand Populations and select a population.

Click the Security Policies tab.

Select the technology group, such as Windows Encryption, or policy group, such as Policy-Based
Encryption, to modify.

122

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
4.

Select a language for localizable policies from the drop-down list at the top right of the screen.

Enter text that is in the language you selected for localizable policies. Navigate the populations and
technology groups as necessary to localize all desired policies for that language.

Click Save.

To update policies in a different language, select the language from the drop-down list, enter
localized text for all desired policies, and click Save.
Save policy changes before selecting another language in the drop-down list. A different language
cannot be selected until policy changes are saved.

When finished, select the desired language. Any changes made to localizable policies will be made
in the language that displays.

NOTE: The Security Policies page for a population displays overrides to localizable policies in the browser
language only.

Localizable Policies
Localizable policies are indicated with this icon:
Available languages:
English

Korean

French

Brazilian Portuguese

German

Portuguese

Italian

Spanish

Japanese
For instructions about localizing policies, see Localize_policies.
The following policies can be displayed in a selected language on the endpoint computer:
Enterprise Level

123

Manage Policies
Technology Group

Policy

Windows Encryption > Self-Encrypting Drive (SED) Support Information Text
PBA Title Text
Legal Notice Text
Self Help Questions (Pre-8.0 clients)
Windows Encryption > Policy-Based Encryption

Common Encrypted Folders
User Encrypted Folders
OS Update Encryption Rules
Application Data Encryption List
Managed Services

Windows Encryption > BitLocker Encryption

Default Folder Location to Save Recovery Password

Authentication > Windows Authentication

Recovery Questions for Windows Authentication
(Checkbox selections)

Removable Media Encryption > Windows Media
Encryption

EMS Device Whitelist
EMS Access Code Required Message
EMS Access Code Failed Message

Data Guardian > Cloud Encryption

Help File Name
Help File Contents
Excluded Folders
Excluded Files

Data Guardian > Protected Office Documents

Office Protected Clip Board Unauthorized Text
Office Protected Document Tamper Prompt
Offline Key Generation Escrow Reminder Text
Office Protected Files Cover Page Notice

Data Guardian > Mobile Client > Cover Page

Office Protected Files Cover Page Acceptance Text
Office Protected Document Tamper Prompt

Data Guardian > Web Portal

Office Protected Files Cover Page EULA

Users Level
Technology Group

Policy

Windows Encryption > Policy-Based Encryption

User Encrypted Folders

124

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Application Data Encryption List
Managed Services
Removable Media Encryption > Windows Media
Encryption

EMS Device Whitelist
EMS Access Code Required Message
EMS Access Code Failed Message

Endpoints Level
Technology Group

Policy

Windows Encryption > Self-Encrypting Drive (SED) Support Information Text
PBA Title Text
Legal Notice Text
Self Help Questions (Pre-8.0 clients)
Windows Encryption > Policy-Based Encryption

Common Encrypted Folders
OS Update Encryption Rules

Windows Encryption > BitLocker Encryption

Default Folder Location to Save Recovery Password

Data Guardian > Cloud Encryption

Help File Name
Help File Contents
Excluded Folders
Excluded Files

Data Guardian > Protected Office Documents

Office Protected Clip Board Unauthorized Text
Office Protected Document Tamper Prompt
Offline Key Generation Escrow Reminder Text
Office Protected Files Cover Page Notice

Windows Encryption

Windows Encryption
A word about types of encryption: SDE is designed to encrypt the operating system and program files. In
order to accomplish this purpose, SDE must be able to open its key while the operating system is booting
without intervention of a password by the user. Its intent is to prevent alteration or offline attacks on the
operating system by an attacker. SDE is not intended for user data. Common and User key encryption are
intended for sensitive user data because they require a user password in order to unlock encryption keys.
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console. In this table, master policies
are in bold font.

125

Manage Policies

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Full Disk Encryption (FDE)
This technology manages drives using software-based Full Disk Encryption. Authentication by users through a
Pre-Boot Authentication environment (before the operating system has booted) is required to unlock the
drive.
On
Off

Full Disk Encryption (FDE)

Off

Toggle to ON to enable all full
disk encryption policies. If this
policy is toggled to OFF, no full
disk encryption takes place,
regardless of other policy values.
On means that all Full Disk
Encryption policies are enabled.
Changing the value of this policy
triggers a new sweep to
encrypt/decrypt files.

Encryption Algorithm

AES 256

AES 256, AES 128, FIPS AES 256,
FIPS AES 128
Encryption algorithm used for
Full Disk Encryption.
CBC, XTS

Encryption Mode

CBC

Enable FDE Plugin

Selected

Encryption mode used for Full
Disk Encryption.
The plugin must remain selected.
To deactivate the PBA and
disable full disk encryption,
toggle the Full Disk Encryption
policy to OFF.

Self-Encrypting Drive (SED)
This technology manages self-encrypting drives (SEDs). Authentication by users through a Pre-Boot
Authentication environment (before the operating system has booted) is required to unlock the drive.
On
Off
Self-Encrypting Drive (SED)

Off

Toggle On to provision the PBA. If
toggled Off after the PBA is
provisioned, the PBA is deprovisioned and the PBA database
is deleted. Re-toggling to On reprovisions the PBA and re-creates
the PBA database.

See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Policy-Based Encryption
This technology uses Dell's proprietary data centric encryption to allow user data and computer encryption.
This allows greater protection over individual data than traditional full disk encryption, by limiting access on
a computer to only what a user is authorized to view.

Policy-Based Encryption

Off

On
Off
Toggle to ON to enable all policybased encryption policies. If this

126

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
policy is toggled to OFF, no
policy-based encryption takes
place, regardless of other policy
values.
On means that all Policy-Based
Encryption policies are enabled.
Changing the value of this policy
triggers a new sweep to
encrypt/decrypt files.
Common, User, User Roaming
Choose a key to indicate who
should be able to access files
encrypted by Application Data
Encryption List, and where.
More...
Common if you want these files
to be accessible to all managed
users on the computer where
they were created (the same
level of access as Common
Encrypted Folders), and
encrypted with the Common
Encryption Algorithm.
Application Data Encryption Key

Common

User if you want these files to be
accessible only to the user who
created them, only on the
computer where they were
created (the same level of access
as User Encrypted Folders), and
encrypted with the User
Encryption Algorithm.
User Roaming if you want these
files to be accessible only to the
user who created them, on any
encrypted Windows computer,
and encrypted with the User
Encryption Algorithm.
Changes to this policy do not
affect files already encrypted
because of this policy.

SDE Encryption Enabled

Not Selected

String
F#:\
-^%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\System Volume Information
-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\;dll.exe.sys.ocx.man.cat.manifest.policy
SDE Encryption Rules

-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\System32
-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SysWow64
-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\WinSxS
-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\Fonts
^3@%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SYSTEM32\;exe

127

If this policy is not selected, SDE
encryption is disabled, regardless
of other policy values. Selected
means that all data not
encrypted by other Intelligent
Encryption policies will be
encrypted per the SDE Encryption
Rules policy. Changing the value
of this policy requires a reboot.
Encryption rules to be used to
encrypt/not encrypt certain
drives, directories, and folders.
See Encryption Rules for
information.
SDE Encryption Rules may be
changed as appropriate for your
environment. However, these
defaults have been tested
extensively. Removing these
exclusions may result in Windows
issues, particularly after applying
patch updates.
Contact ProSupport for guidance
if you are unsure about changing
the values.

Manage Policies
-^3@%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SYSTEM32\cmd.exe;exe
-^3@%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SYSTEM32\autochk.exe;exe
-^3@%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SYSTEM32\winresume.exe;exe
-^F#:\bootmgr
-^F#:\boot
-^@%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\;vol
-^%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files\PGP Corporation
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\PGPWDE00
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\PGPWDE01
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\PGPWDE02
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\PGPWDE03
-^%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files\Symantec
-^%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files (x86)\Symantec
-^%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files\Common Files\Symantec Shared
-^%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Symantec
Shared
-^%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\ProgramData\Symantec
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\SafeBoot.fs
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\SafeBoot.rsv
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\SafeBoot.csv
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files\McAfee
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files\Common Files\McAfee
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files\McAfee
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\McAfee
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\\Program Files (x86)\Mcafee
-^%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files\Trend Micro\
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\ProgramData\Dell\Kace
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files\Dell\Kace
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files (x86)\Dell\Kace
String - maximum of 100 entries
of 500 characters each (up to a
maximum of 2048 characters)

Common Encrypted Folders

A list of folders on computer
drives to be encrypted or
String
excluded from encryption, which
%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\;accdb.doc.docm.docx.mdb.pdf.ppam.pps.ppsm.ppsx can then be accessed by all
managed users who have access
.ppt.pptm.pptx.pub.puz.sldm.sldx.tif.tiff.vdx.vsd.vss.vst.vsx.vtx.xlam
to the computer. See Encryption
.xlm.xls.xlsb.xlsm.xlsx.xsf.zip.rar
Rules for information. The text in
%ENV:USERPROFILE%\Desktop
this policy is translatable.
%ENV:USERPROFILE%\Download
-^%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\;dat.ini.xml.txt.log.db.lnk

Important: Overriding directory
protection can result in an
unbootable computer and/or
require reformatting drives.
More...

128

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
The available drive letters are:
#: Refers to all drives
f#: Refers to all fixed (nonremovable) drives
r#: Refers to all removable drives
If the same folder is specified in
both this policy and the User
Encrypted Folders policy, this
policy prevails.
Policy-Based Encryption-User Experience

Selected
Not Selected

Enable Software Auto Updates

Selected

Selected enables the client
update agent to automatically
check for updates.
If this policy is Selected, the On
Premise Update Staging Location
policy must include the staging
location.

On Premise Update Staging
Location

String

The network location (UNC)
where the Security Management
Server stages update packages.
This policy must have a value if
the Enable Software Auto
Updates policy is Selected.

See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Bitlocker Encryption
This technology manages Microsoft BitLocker policies for full disk and removable media encryption.
Managed
Not Managed
BitLocker Encryption

Not Managed

Toggle to Managed to enable
BitLocker Manager policy
settings. Toggling to Not
Managed disables all BitLocker
Manager policies, regardless of
other policy values.
Selected
Not Selected

TPM Manager Enabled

Not Selected

Selected enables TPM
management with BitLocker
management. Not Selected
disables all TPM management
policies, including policies in the
Operating System Volume
Settings category.
Selected
Not Selected

Disable Sleep Mode

Not Selected

Selected disables sleep mode on
the local computer.
Changing this policy requires a
reboot for the new value to take
effect.

Encrypt System Drive

129

Do Not Manage

Do Not Manage
Turn On Encryption

Manage Policies
Turn Off Encryption
Do Not Manage ignores the
System Drive (typically the drive
that the operating system is
installed on). Turn On Encryption
allows BitLocker to encrypt the
System Drive only. Turn Off
Encryption disables BitLocker
from encrypting the system drive
or decrypts any BitLockerencrypted system drives.
Do Not Manage
Turn On Encryption
Turn Off Encryption

Encrypt Fixed Drives

Do Not Manage

This policy does not encrypt the
system drive. To also encrypt the
system drive, make sure that
Encrypt System Drive Only is also
Turn On Encryption.
Do Not Manage ignores Fixed
Drives. Turn On Encryption allows
BitLocker to encrypt Fixed
Drives. Turn Off Encryption
causes Manager to decrypt any
BitLocker encrypted fixed drives.
Do Not Manage
Turn On Encryption
Turn Off Encryption

Encrypt Removable Drives

Do Not Manage

Do Not Manage ignores
Removable Drives. Turn On
Encryption allows BitLocker to
encrypt Removable Drives. Turn
Off Encryption causes Manager to
decrypt any BitLocker encrypted
removable drives.
Selected
Not Selected
This policy allows for the
configuration of BitLocker to
require additional authentication
each time the computer starts up
[with or without a Trusted
Platform module (TPM)].

Require Additional
Authentication at System Startup

More...
Not Selected

This policy is the parent policy
to:
Allow BitLocker Encryption
Without a Compatible TPM
Configure TPM Startup
Configure TPM Startup PIN
Configure TPM Startup Key
Configure TPM Startup Key and
PIN

130

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Selected
Not Selected

Allow BitLocker Encryption
Without a Compatible TPM

Selected

Selected allows a computer
without a compatible TPM to use
BitLocker encryption. In this
mode, a USB drive is required for
startup. When the key is
inserted, access to the drive is
authenticated and the drive is
accessible. If the USB key is lost
or unavailable, the computer will
require BitLocker recovery for
access.
To use this policy, Require
Additional Authentication at
System Startup must be set to
Selected.
Do Not Allow
Require
Allow
On computers with a compatible
TPM, three types of
authentication are supported.
Only one of the following can be
required or allowed:

Configure TPM Startup

Allow

Configure TPM Startup PIN
Configure TPM Startup Key
Configure TPM Startup Key and
PIN
To use this policy, Require
Additional Authentication at
System Startup must be set to
Selected.
Do Not Allow
Require
Allow

Configure TPM Startup PIN

Allow

To use this policy, Require
Additional Authentication at
System Startup must be set to
Selected.
This type of authentication
involves the entry of a 4-digit
to 20-digit personal identification
number (PIN).
Do Not Allow
Require
Allow

Configure TPM Startup Key

Do Not Allow

To use this policy, Require
Additional Authentication at
System Startup must be set to
Selected.
This type of authentication
involves insertion of a USB drive
containing the startup key.
Do Not Allow
Require
Allow

Configure TPM Startup Key and
PIN

Do Not Allow

To use this policy, Require
Additional Authentication at
System Startup must be set to
Selected.
This type of authentication
involves a 4-digit to 20-digit
personal identification number

131

Manage Policies
(PIN) and a USB drive containing
the startup key.

Encryption Method and Cipher
Strength (OS Volumes)

XTS-AES-128

AES-128
AES-256
XTS-AES-128 (for use with
Windows 10 Anniversary Edition
and later)
XTS-AES-256 (for use with
Windows 10 Anniversary Edition
and later)
Algorithm and cipher strength
used by BitLocker Drive
Encryption for OS Volumes.
AES-128
AES-256
XTS-AES-128 (for use with
Windows 10 Anniversary Edition
and later)
XTS-AES-256 (for use with
Windows 10 Anniversary Edition
and later)

Encryption Method and Cipher
Strength (Removable Volumes)

AES-128

Algorithm and cipher strength
used by BitLocker Drive
Encryption for Removable
Volumes.
To encrypt removable drives that
will be used with older versions
of Windows as well as with
Windows 10 Anniversary Edition
and later, use AES-128 or AES256.

Encryption Method and Cipher
Strength (Fixed Volumes)

XTS-AES-128

See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Server Encryption
This technology manages Dell's data centric encryption using certificate-based authentication instead of the
typical user-based authentication instead of the typical user-based authentication. This technology allows
for protection of devices such as Windows Servers that do not commonly have users logged in.
On
Off
Server Encryption

Off

This policy enables or disables
System Data Encryption (SDE) and
Common Encryption on the client
server.
Changing the value of this policy
triggers a new sweep to

132

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
encrypt/decrypt files.
Selected
Not Selected

Allow Software Server Encryption

Selected

If this policy is Selected, client
servers will be activated at the
Enterprise level.
This policy may be set to Not
Selected to block activations
during initial Dell Server setup
and maintenance interruptions.

Not Selected

Server Maintenance Schedule

This policy must be selected to
use all other Server Maintenance
policies. If this policy is Not
Selected, no Server Maintenance
policies are enforced, regardless
of other policy values.
Selected allows a maintenance
schedule to control application of
policy that requires a reboot.
Daily, Weekly, Monthly,
Quarterly, Annually
The schedule configuration
defines when the task should run.
Daily: Runs the task every day at
the specified Server Maintenance
Schedule Start Time.

Server Maintenance Schedule
Repeats

Weekly

Weekly: Runs the task weekly on
the days specified in Server
Maintenance Day of the Week.
Monthly: Runs the task monthly
on the specified Server
Maintenance Day of the Month.
Quarterly: Runs the task
quarterly on the specified Server
Maintenance Day of the Month.
Annually: Runs the task annually
on the specified Server
Maintenance Day of the Month.

Disabled

Port Control System

Enable or Disable all Port Control
System policies. If this policy is
set to Disable, no Port Control
System policies are applied,
regardless of other Port Control
System policies.
All PCS policies require a reboot
before the policy takes effect.

SDE Encryption Enabled

Selected

String
F#:\
SDE Encryption Rules

-^%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\System Volume Information
-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\;dll.exe.sys.ocx.man.cat.manifest.policy
-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\System32
-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SysWow64

133

If this policy is Not Selected, SDE
encryption is disabled, regardless
of other policy values. Selected
means that all data not
encrypted by other Intelligent
Encryption policies will be
encrypted per the SDE Encryption
Rules policy. Changing the value
of this policy requires a reboot
Encryption rules to be used to
encrypt/not encrypt certain
drives, directories, and folders.
See Encryption Rules for
information.
SDE Encryption Rules may be
changed as appropriate for your
environment. However, these
defaults have been tested

Manage Policies
-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\WinSxS
-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\Fonts
^3@%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SYSTEM32\;exe
-^3@%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SYSTEM32\cmd.exe;exe
-^3@%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SYSTEM32\autochk.exe;exe
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\ProgramData\Dell\Kace

extensively. Removing these
exclusions may result in Windows
issues, particularly after applying
patch updates.
Contact ProSupport for guidance
if you are unsure about changing
the values.

-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files\Dell\Kace
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files (x86)\Dell\Kace

Encryption Enabled

Selected

This policy must be selected to
use all Common Encryption
policies. Not Selected means that
no Common Encryption takes
place, regardless of other policy
values.
Changing the value of this policy
triggers a new sweep to
encrypt/decrypt files.

See advanced settings

Variables
Some Windows policies support the following variables. A pathname can consist entirely of one or more of
these variables, or can include one or more of these variables at any point.
To get directory locations that these CSIDL values resolve to, go to http://msdn.microsoft.com/enus/library/bb762494.aspx. All names listed on the MSDN page are CSIDL_.
%CSIDL:name%

•

Includes any of the following Windows CSIDL constants:
DESKTOP
INTERNET
PROGRAMS
CONTROLS
PRINTERS
PERSONAL
FAVORITES
STARTUP
RECENT
SENDTO
STARTMENU
STARTMENU
MYDOCUMENTS
MYMUSIC
MYVIDEO
DESKTOPDIRECTORY

134

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
DRIVES
NETWORK
NETHOOD
FONTS
TEMPLATES
COMMON_STARTMENU
COMMON_PROGRAMS
COMMON_STARTUP
COMMON_DESKTOPDIRECTORY
APPDATA
PRINTHOOD
LOCAL_APPDATA
ALTSTARTUP
COMMON_ALTSTARTUP
COMMON_FAVORITES
INTERNET_CACHE
COOKIES
HISTORY
COMMON_APPDATA
WINDOWS
SYSTEM
PROGRAM_FILES
PROGRAMFILES
MYPICTURES
PROFILE
SYSTEMX86
PROGRAM_FILESX86
PROGRAMFILESX86
PROGRAM_FILES_COMMON
PROGRAM_FILES_COMMONX86
COMMON_TEMPLATES
COMMON_DOCUMENTS
COMMON_ADMINTOOLS
ADMINTOOLS

135

Manage Policies
CONNECTIONS
COMMON_MUSIC
COMMON_PICTURES
COMMON_VIDEO
RESOURCES
PROFILES
%HKCU:regpath%

•

Includes a numeric or text value stored in the registry for the Current User. If you specify a path but
not an item, the client uses the default value

%HKLM:regpath%

•

Includes a numeric or text value stored in the registry for the local computer. If you specify a path
but not an item, the client uses the default value

%ENV:envname%

•

Includes the value of a Windows local environment variable

•

Includes the % character

Windows Policies that Require Reboot

•

SDE Encryption Enabled

•

All PCS policies

Windows Policies that Require Logoff

•

SDE Encryption Enabled

Advanced Windows Encryption
A word about types of encryption: SDE is designed to encrypt the operating system and program files. In
order to accomplish this purpose, SDE must be able to open its key while the operating system is booting
without intervention of a password by the user. Its intent is to prevent alteration or offline attacks on the
operating system by an attacker. SDE is not intended for user data. Common and User key encryption are
intended for sensitive user data because they require a user password in order to unlock encryption keys.
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console. In this table, master policies
are in bold font.
Policy

Default Setting

Description

Self-Encrypting Drive (SED)
This technology manages self-encrypting drives (SEDs). Authentication by users through a Pre-Boot Authentication
environment (before the operating system has booted) is required to unlock the drive.
Enable SED
Plugin

Selected

The plugin must remain selected. To deactivate the PBA and disable SED
Management, toggle the Self-encrypting Drive policy to OFF.

See basic

136

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Policy-Based Encryption
This technology uses Dell's proprietary data centric encryption to allow user data and computer encryption. This allows
greater protection over individual data than traditional full disk encryption, by limiting access on a computer to only
what a user is authorized to view.
Encrypt with
SDE when SED
is detected

Not Selected

When Selected, this policy applies SDE encryption to self-encrypting drives. Use
this policy when SDE encryption is preferred instead of native SED encryption.
String - maximum of 100 entries of 500 characters each (up to a maximum of 2048
characters)
A list of folders on the computer hard drive to be encrypted with the User Data
Encryption Key or excluded from encryption.

User
Encrypted
Folders

String

If the same folder is specified in this policy for multiple users of the same Windows
computer, each file in that folder is encrypted for the first owner of the file after
the policy takes effect, and can be decrypted only by that owner.
The text in this policy is translatable.
More...
Specify as for Common Encrypted Folders.
This policy applies to all drives classified by Windows as Hard Disk Drives (see My
Computer). You cannot use this policy to encrypt drives or external media whose
type displays as Removable Disk, use EMS Encrypt External Media instead.
String - maximum of 100 entries of 500 characters each
We do not recommend adding explorer.exe or iexplorer.exe to the ADE list, as
unexpected or unintended results may occur.
However, explorer.exe is the process used to create a new notepad file on the
desktop using the right-click menu. Setting encryption by file extension, instead of
the ADE list, provides more comprehensive coverage.
Changes to this policy do not affect files already encrypted because of this policy.
List process names of applications (without paths) whose new files you want
encrypted, separated by carriage returns. Do not use wildcards.

Exe List

Application
Data
Encryption
List

winword.exe
excel.exe
powerpnt.exe
msaccess.exe
winproj.exe
outlook.exe
acrobat.exe
visio.exe
mspub.exe
winzip.exe
winrar.exe
onenote.exe
onenotem.exe

The text in this policy is translatable.
More...
You can also specify these process names (separated by commas) via the registry
value HKLM\Software\Dell\CMGShield\ApplicationDataEncryptionList.
The Encryption client encrypts all new files (not already being encrypted by
Common Encrypted Folders and User Encrypted Folders) on the current computer
hard drives created by these application processes whenever they are owned by a
currently-logged-on managed user. This may include files excluded from
encryption by Common Encrypted Folders and/or User Encrypted Folders.
The following folders and their subfolders are always excluded from encryption by
this policy:
C:\Windows\system32
C:\Windows\Software Distribution
C:\Windows\Security
C:\System Volume Information\Program
Files\Dell\(.dll.exe.sys.mac.ddp.wip.rty.nmd.inv)
We strongly recommend not listing applications or installers that write systemcritical files. Doing so could result in encryption of important system files, which
could make a Windows computer unbootable.
Common process names:
Outlook: outlook.exe
Word: winword.exe
FrontPage: frontpg.exe
PowerPoint: powerpnt.exe

137

Manage Policies
Access: msaccess.exe
WordPad: wordpad.exe
Microsoft Paint: mspaint.exe
Excel: excel.exe
The following hard-coded system and installer process names are ignored if
specified in this policy (you can also add to this list via the registry value
HKLM\Software\Dell\CMGShield\EUWPrivilegedList):
hotfix.exe, a Windows update process
update.exe, a Windows update process
setup.exe, a third-party installer process
msiexec.exe, a third-party installer process
wuauclt.exe, a Windows update process
wmiprvse.exe, a Windows system process
migrate.exe, a Windows update process
unregmp2.exe, a Windows update process
ikernel.exe, a third-party installer process
wssetup.exe, the Windows Encryption client installer
svchost.exe, a Windows system process
AES256, Rijndael 256, AES128, Rijndael 128, 3DES
User
Encryption
Algorithm

AES256

SDE
Encryption
Algorithm

AES256

Encryption algorithm used to encrypt data at the individual user level. You can
specify different values for different users of the same computer.
Encryption algorithms in order of speed, fastest first, are Rijndael 128, AES 128,
Rijndael 256, AES 256, 3DES.
AES 256, AES 128, 3DES
Encryption algorithm used to for System Data Encryption.
Encryption algorithms in order of speed, fastest first, are AES 128, AES 256, 3DES.
AES256, Rijndael 256, AES128, Rijndael 128, 3DES

Common
Encryption
Algorithm

Encrypt
Outlook
Personal
Folders

Encryption algorithm used to encrypt data at the endpoint (all users) level.
AES256

System paging files are encrypted using AES 128.
Encryption algorithms in order of speed, fastest first, are Rijndael 128, AES 128,
Rijndael 256, AES 256, 3DES.

Not Selected

Encrypts Outlook Personal Folders (%csidl:local_appdata
%\Microsoft\Outlook) with the User Data Encryption Key.
When this policy is selected, the paths listed in the environment variables TEMP
and TMP are encrypted. TEMP and TMP for the operating system are encrypted
with the Common Encryption Key.

Encrypt
Temporary
Files

Selected

Encrypt
Temporary
Internet Files

Selected

Encrypt User
Profile
Documents

Not Selected

Encrypt

Selected

To reduce encryption sweep time, the contents of the TEMP and TMP folders are
cleared for initial encryption, as well as updates to this policy. However, if your
organization uses a third-party application that requires the file structure within
the \temp directory to be preserved, you should prevent this deletion.
To disable temporary file deletion, create DeleteTempFiles (REG_DWORD) and set
its value to 0 in the registry at
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Credant\CMGShield.
When this policy is selected, the path listed in the environment variable
CSIDL_INTERNET_CACHE is encrypted with the User Data Encryption Key.
To reduce encryption sweep time, the contents of CSIDL_INTERNET_CACHE are
cleared for initial encryption, as well as updates to this policy.
This policy is applicable when using Microsoft Internet Explorer only. For other web
browsers, an Administrator must create an encryption policy that is specific to the
storage location of the temporary internet files used by each browser.
When this policy is selected, the following are encrypted:
• The users profile (C:\Users\jsmith) with the User Data Encryption Key
• \Users\Public with the Common Encryption Key
When this policy is selected, the Windows paging file is encrypted. A change to this

138

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Windows
Paging File

policy requires a reboot.
String - maximum of 100 entries of 500 characters each (up to a maximum of 2048
characters)
When a Service is managed by this policy, the Service is started only after the user
is logged in and the Encryption client is unlocked. This policy also ensures that the
Service managed by this policy is stopped before the Encryption client is locked
during logoff. This policy can also prevent a user logoff if a Service is unresponsive.
More...

Managed
Services

Syntax is one Service name per line. Spaces in the Service name are supported.
Wildcards are not supported. Entries are not case-sensitive. For example,
GoogleDesktop Manager is the same as googledesktopmanager.
The Service "log on as" setting has no bearing on whether or not the Encryption
client can control it. It does not matter if a user logs on with user credentials
verses the local system.
The startup type (Automatic or Manual) does not affect the ability of the
Encryption client to control it. Automatic or Manual startup is acceptable.
Managed Services will not be started if an unmanaged user logs on.
No Overwrite, Single-pass Overwrite, Three-pass Overwrite, Seven-pass Overwrite
Once encryption is complete, this policy determines what happens to the
unencrypted residue of the original files:
• No Overwrite deletes it. This value yields the fastest encryption processing.

Secure PostEncryption
Cleanup

No Overwrite

• Single-pass Overwrite overwrites it with random data.
• Three-pass Overwrite overwrites it with a standard pattern of 1s and 0s, then
with its complement, and then with random data.
• Seven-pass Overwrite overwrites it with a standard pattern of 1s and 0s, then
with its complement, and then with random data five times. This value makes it
most difficult to recover the original files from memory, and yields the most
secure encryption processing.

Secure
Windows
Credentials

Not Selected

When this policy is selected, the Windows Credentials will be secured by
encrypting the entire registry with the exception of registry information required
for computer boot. The information required for computer boot includes
HKLM/SYSTEM and all sub-keys.
This policy value will be automatically set to Selected if SDE is enabled.
More...
A reboot is required when a change to this policy is delivered. To control this
reboot, configure the following policies: Force Reboot on Update, Length of Each
Reboot Delay, and Number of Reboot Delays Allowed.

Block
Unmanaged
Access to
Domain
Credentials

Not Selected

This policy prevents unmanaged users and applications from accessing the Windows
domain credentials when a user is logged in.

Secure
Windows
Hibernation
File

Not Selected

When this policy is selected, the hibernation file will be encrypted only when the
computer enters hibernation. The Encryption client disengages protection when
the computer comes out of hibernation, providing protection without impacting
users or applications while the computer is in use.

Prevent
Unsecured
Hibernation

Not Selected

When this policy is selected, the Encryption client does not allow computer
hibernation if the client is unable to encrypt the hibernation data.

Scan
Workstation
on Logon

Not selected

When this policy is selected, all current and previously encrypted folders on the
encrypted computer's local hard drives are scanned each time a managed user logs
on, ensuring that all Common Encrypted Folders and User Encrypted Folders policy
values are properly implemented. Abides by the Workstation Scan Priority policy.
Highest, High, Normal, Low, Lowest

Workstation
Scan Priority

Lowest

Specifies the relative Windows priority of encrypted folder scanning. High and
Highest prioritize scanning speed over computer responsiveness, Low and Lowest
prioritize computer responsiveness over scanning speed and favor other resourceintensive activities, and Normal balances the two.
The client checks for a changed Workstation Scan Priority before processing the

139

Manage Policies
next file.
The scan priority levels are used in two ways.
1.

These values correspond with the values used by the Microsoft SDK to
set thread execution priority.

The client uses these values to introduce a delay in the encryption
sweep after every single file is processed.
The values translate to the following millisecond delay ranges, where the
encryption thread will sit idle and then return full control to the
operating system:
Highest=0 ms / Lowest=100 ms

Common, User, User Roaming
Choose a key to indicate who should be able to access files encrypted by the
following policies, and where:
• User Encrypted Folders
• Encrypt Outlook Personal folders
• Encrypt Temporary Files (\Users\\AppData\Local\Temp only)
• Encrypt Temporary Internet Files
• Encrypt User Profile Documents (except \All Users\Documents or for Windows XP,
\All Users\Shared Documents)
Select:
• Common if you want User Encrypted Folders to be accessible by all managed
users on the computer where they were created (the same level of access as
Common Encrypted Folders), and encrypted with the Common Encryption
Algorithm.
More...
User Data
Encryption
Key

User

The Common Encryption Algorithm controls the encryption algorithm for all User
Encrypted Folders and overrides any encryption algorithm selected, including the
default User Encryption Algorithm. For example, if the Common Encryption
Algorithm is set to AES 256, all Common and User Encrypted Files/Folders will be
encrypted with the AES 256 algorithm.
All other encryption parameters can be selected to override default settings. For
example, if the Encrypt Temporary Files policy is set to Not Selected, you can
override this setting for any managed user by setting this value to Selected.
Designated User Encrypted Folders use the Common Key, resulting in all managed
users having the key to access any encrypted files stored in these folders as
permitted by security settings on the operating system.
• User if you want these files to be accessible only to the user who created them,
only on the computer where they were created (the same level of access as User
Encrypted Folders), and encrypted with the User Encryption Algorithm.
• User Roaming if you want these files to be accessible only to the user who
created them, on any encrypted Windows computer, and encrypted with the User
Encryption Algorithm.
When incorporating an encryption policy to encrypt entire disk partitions, Dell
recommends using the default SDE policy, rather than Common or User. This
ensures that any operating system files that are encrypted are accessible during
times when the managed user is not logged in.
String - maximum of 1500 characters
List fully qualified Policy Proxy hostnames, or IP addresses, separated by carriage
returns. Ports cannot be specified in this policy.
More...
Once a valid entry is found, the remainder of the Policy Proxies listed are ignored.

Policy Proxy
Connections

Entries are processed in the following order:
1. GKConnections Override (this registry entry overrides all other entries)
2. GKConnections (this registry entry is set automatically by the client, based on
the this policy)
3. GK
To override this policy and specify ports via the registry key, set
HKLM\Software\Microsoft\WindowsNT\CurrentVersion\
Winlogon\CMGShield\GKConnectionsOverride.
The client communicates with Policy Proxies using the GKPORT (the default is

140

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
8000).
If necessary, change that port via the registry key
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\WindowsNT\Current
Version\Winlogon\CMGShield\GKPort.
Inherited values for this policy accumulate.
In order for the client to connect to a Policy Proxy specified in this policy, it must
be in the same group as the Policy Proxy specified during client installation.
Because the client supports up to 255 users per computer, this policy is available
only at the Enterprise policy level.
1-1440 minutes

Policy Proxy
Polling
Interval

Allow
Activations

360

The interval that the Encryption client attempts to poll Policy Proxy for policy
updates, and send inventory information to Policy Proxy.
The Encryption client also attempts to poll Policy Proxy each time a user logs on.
This policy is available at the Enterprise, Domain, User Group, and User levels.
This policy is used only by the Encryption client. Other applications do not have an
activation policy setting.

Selected

When this policy is selected, Encryption client activations are allowed.
When this policy is not selected, activations are blocked. Blocking activations is
useful for staggering activations, preventing activations during the initial Dell
Server setup, or preventing activations during a maintenance interruption.
Activate, Suspend

Current Shield
State

Activate

Activate is the normal state for an encrypted user. A user must be in this state in
order to activate a computer.
Select Suspend to require recovery before the user can access the computer.
When a user is suspended, encrypted data cannot be accessed. The user can be
recovered by changing this policy to Activate, and committing the policy.

See basic
settings
Policy-Based Encryption - User Experience

Selected
Not Selected
Enable
Software Auto
Updates

Not Selected

String

On Premise
Update
Staging
Location

String

Update Check
Period

10080

Force Logoff /
Reboot on
Policy Updates

Selected

Policy Viewer
Enabled

Not Selected

141

This policy defines the network location (UNC) where the Dell Server stages
Encryption client update packages. If a network location is not specified in this
policy, the Enable Software Auto Updates policy should not be published.
1-43200 minutes (1 minute to 30 days)
The period in minutes between checks for software auto updates.
0-5000

Number of
Policy Update
Delays
Allowed

Display Local
Encryption
Processing
Control

Selected enables the client update agent to automatically check for updates to
Encryption client software. If this policy is not selected, Encryption client auto
updates do not take place, regardless of other policy values. If this policy is
selected, the On Premise Update Staging Location policy must have a network
location in its value.

Not Selected

If Force Logoff/Reboot on Policy Updates is Selected, a non-zero value allows the
user to delay the required logoff or reboot the specified number of times. Set to
zero to disable delays.
Selected requires either a logoff or a reboot in order for key policy updates to take
effect. Otherwise, these policy updates take effect whenever the next logoff or
reboot occurs.
When Selected, the user can view their encryption policies from the Encryption
client icon in the system tray.
When Selected, the user sees a menu option in the system tray icon that allows
them to pause/resume encryption/decryption (depending on what the client is
currently doing).
Important: Allowing a user to pause encryption could allow the user to prevent
the Encryption client from fully encrypting or decrypting data per policy.

Manage Policies
This policy controls whether users see notification pop-ups if an application
attempts to access a file while the client is processing it.
Suppress File
Contention
Notification

Number of
Encryption
Processing
Delays
Allowed

Selected

More...
If the client is processing a large file that an application needs, and this policy is
Selected, it may appear that the application is unresponsive or slow to open (with
no message indicating what the issue is). Care should be taken when using this
policy.
0-5000

A non-zero value allows the user to delay any encryption processing required by
the encryption policies you set, the specified number of times. Set to zero to
disable delays.
5-40320 minutes
If Number of Encryption Processing Delays Allowed has a non-zero value, use this
policy to specify how often the user is prompted to continue with encryption
processing or delay again.
More...

Length of
Each
Encryption
Processing
Delay

This prompt displays for five minutes each time. If the user does not respond to
the prompt, encryption processing begins. The final delay prompt includes a
countdown and progress bar, and it displays until the user responds, or the final
delay expires and encryption processing begins.
Calculate the maximum possible delay as follows (a maximum delay would involve
the user responding to each delay prompt immediately prior to the 5-minute
mark):
(Number of Encryption Processing Delays Allowed x Length of Each Encryption
Processing Delay) + (5 minutes x [Number of Encryption Processing Delays Allowed 1])
5-40320 minutes
If Number of Policy Update Delays Allowed has a non-zero value, use this policy to
specify how often the user is prompted to logoff/reboot or delay again.
More...
This prompt displays for five minutes each time. If the user does not respond to
the prompt, the next delay begins. The final delay prompt includes a countdown
and progress bar, and it displays until the user responds, or the final delay expires
and the required logoff/reboot occurs.

Length of
Each Policy
Update Delay

You can change the behavior of the user prompt to begin or delay encryption, to
prevent encryption processing following no user response to the prompt.
To do this, set the registry key SnoozeBeforeSweep |(DWORD), stored in
HKLM\Software\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\Winlogon\CMGShield, to a
non-zero value. Any non-zero value will change the default behavior to snooze.
With no user interaction, encryption processing will be delayed up to the number
of configurable allowed delays. When the final delay expires, encryption
processing begins.
Calculate the maximum possible delay as follows (a maximum delay would involve
the user never responding to a delay prompt, each of which displays for 5
minutes):
(Number of Policy Update Delays Allowed x Length of Each Policy Update Delay) +
(5 minutes x [Number of Policy Update Delays Allowed - 1])

Force Reboot
on Update

Selected

Length of
Each Reboot
Delay

Number of
Reboot Delays
Allowed

Allow
Encryption

When selected, the computer immediately reboots to allow processing of
encryption or updates related to device-based policy, such as System Data
Encryption (SDE).
5-40320 minutes
The number of minutes to delay when the user chooses to delay reboot for devicebased policy.
0-5000

False

The number of times the user will be allowed to delay reboot for device-based
policy.
True, False, User-Optional
When True, there will be no encryption or decryption of data while the user is

142

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Processing
Only When
Screen is
Locked

actively working. The client will only process data when the workstation screen is
locked.
When False, encryption processing occurs any time, even while the user is working.
User-Optional adds an option to the system tray icon allowing the user to turn this
feature on or off.
Enabling this option will significantly extend the amount of time it takes to
complete encryption or decryption.

Hide Overlay
Icons

Selected

When Selected, encryption overlay icons do not display on encrypted files in File
Explorer for all managed users on the computer.

See basic
settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Bitlocker Encryption
This technology manages Microsoft BitLocker policies for full disk and removable media encryption.

Disable
BitLocker on
SelfEncrypting
Drives

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

If Selected, BitLocker Manager will not start encryption on a volume that is already
protected by a provisioned SED.
For example, if this policy is Selected and both C: and D: are on one physical selfencrypting drive, and the PBA has been provisioned, then C: and D: will not
encrypt for BitLocker even if System and Fixed drive encryption are turned on in
the BitLocker Manager policies.

See basic
settings
Bitlocker Encryption - Fixed Data Volume Settings

Configure the
Use of Smart
Cards on Fixed
Data Drives

Deny Write
Access to
Fixed Data
Drives Not
Protected by
BitLocker

Allow Access
to BitLocker
Protected
Fixed Data
Drives from
Earlier
Versions of
Windows
Do Not Install
BitLocker to
Go Reader on
FAT
Formatted
Fixed Drives

143

Allow
Disallow
Require
Allow

This policy specifies whether smart cards can be used to authenticate access to
BitLocker fixed data drives. These settings are enforced when turning on
BitLocker, not when unlocking a drive. BitLocker will allow unlocking a drive with
any of the protectors available on the drive.
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled for Organizations

Disabled

If the drive is protected by BitLocker, it will be mounted with read and write
access.
If you disable or do not configure this policy setting, all fixed data drives on the
computer will be mounted with read and write access.
Selected
Not Selected

Selected

When Selected, fixed data drives with the FAT file system can be unlocked and
viewed on computers running Windows Server 2008. This policy does not apply to
drives that are formatted with the NTFS file system.
Set this policy to Selected and the Do Not Install BitLocker to Go Reader on FAT
formatted Fixed Drives policy to Not Selected to allow BitLocker to Go Reader to
be installed on the fixed drive.
Selected
Not Selected

Not Selected

If this policy is Not Selected, BitLocker to Go Reader will be installed on the fixed
drive to enable users to unlock the drive on computers running Windows Server
2008.
Set this policy to Not Selected and the Allow Access to BitLocker Protected Fixed

Manage Policies
Data Drives from Earlier Versions of Windows policy to Not Selected to allow
BitLocker to Go Reader to be installed on the fixed drive.
Allow
Require
Disallow
Configure Use
of Passwords
for Fixed Data
Drives

Allow

When set to Require, a connection to a domain controller is necessary to validate
the complexity of the password. When set to Allow, a connection to a domain
controller will be attempted to validate complexity, but if no domain controller is
found, the password will still be accepted. When set to Do Not Allow, no password
complexity validation will be done.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Passwords for Fixed Data Drives must be set to
Allow or Require.

Configure
Password
Complexity for
Fixed Data
Drives

Do Not Allow
Require
Allow
Allow

Minimum
Password
Length for
Fixed Data
Drives

Encryption
Type for Fixed
Data Drives

8 min
20 max
8

Passwords must be at least 8 characters. To configure a greater minimum length
for the password enter the desired number of characters.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Passwords for Fixed Data Drives must be set to
Allow or Require.
Full Encryption

Full Encryption

Used Space Only Encryption
Select the type of encryption to use for Fixed Data Drives.
Selected
Not Selected
BitLocker drives can always be recovered with BitLocker Manager, even if this
value is Not Selected. This policy allows for the control of how BitLocker protected
fixed data drives are recovered in the absence of the required credentials.

Choose How
BitLockerprotected
Fixed Drives
Can be
Recovered

More...
This policy is the parent policy to:
Not Selected

Allow Data Recovery Agent for Protected Fixed Data Drives
Config User Storage of BitLocker 48-digit Recovery Password
Config User Storage of BitLocker 256-bit Recovery Key
Omit Recovery Options from the BitLocker Setup Wizard
Save BitLocker Recovery Info to AD DS for Fixed Data Drives
BitLocker Recovery Info to Store in AD DS
Do Not Enable BitLocker Until Recovery Info is Stored in AD DS for Fixed Data
Drives

Allow Data
Recovery
Agent for
Protected
Fixed Data
Drives

Configure User
Storage of

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

When Selected, a data recovery agent is allowed for use with BitLocker protected
fixed data drives. Before the agent can be used, it must be added from the Public
Key Policies in either the Group Policy Management Console or the Local Group
Policy Editor.
When setting this policy to Selected, the Choose How BitLocker-protected Fixed
Drives Can be Recovered policy must also be set to Selected.

Allow

Allow
Require

144

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Do Not Allow

BitLocker 48digit Recovery
Password

This policy determines if a user is allowed, required, or not allowed to generate a
48-digit password.
When setting this policy to Allow or Require, the Choose How BitLocker-protected
Fixed Drives Can be Recovered policy must also be set to Selected.

Configure User
Storage of
BitLocker 256bit Recovery
Key

Omit Recovery
Options from
the BitLocker
Setup Wizard

Allow
Require
Do Not Allow
Allow

This policy determines if a user is allowed, required, or not allowed to generate a
256-bit recovery key.
When setting this policy to Allow or Require, the Choose How BitLocker-protected
Fixed Drives Can be Recovered policy must also be set to Selected.
Selected
Not Selected

Not Selected

When Selected, users are prevented from specifying recovery options when
BitLocker is enabled. Recovery options for the drive are determined by policy
settings.
When setting this policy to Not Selected, the Choose How BitLocker-protected
Fixed Drives Can be Recovered policy must also be set to Selected.
Selected
Not Selected

Save BitLocker
Recovery
Information to
AD DS for
Fixed Data
Drives

Selected allows BitLocker recovery information to be stored in AD DS for fixed data
drives. BitLocker recovery information is always saved in the Remote Management
Console. Enabling this policy additionally saves the information to AD.
Selected

More...
The appropriate schema extensions and access control settings on the domain must
be first configured before AD DS backup can succeed.
When setting this policy to Selected, the Choose How BitLocker-protected Fixed
Drives Can be Recovered policy must also be set to Selected.
Set this policy to Selected to use the policy BitLocker Recovery Information to
Store in AD DS.
Recovery Passwords and Key Packages
Recovery Passwords Only

BitLocker
Recovery
Information to
Store in AD DS

Recovery Passwords and Key Packages

This policy provides the option of storing recovery passwords and key packages, or
storing the recovery password only in AD DS. The appropriate schema extensions
and access control settings on the domain must be first configured before applying
this policy.
The Choose How BitLocker-protected Fixed Drives Can be Recovered policy must
be set to Selected to use this policy.
To use this policy, Save BitLocker Recovery Information to AD DS for Fixed Data
Drives must be set to Selected.
Selected
Not Selected

Do Not Enable
BitLocker
Until Recovery
Information is
Stored in AD
DS for Fixed
Data Drives

Not Selected

Although BitLocker recovery information is automatically stored in the Remote
Management Console, this policy additionally requires BitLocker drive encryption
recovery information to be stored in AD DS. The appropriate schema extensions
and access control settings on the domain must be configured before using this
policy.
More...
This policy is used to prevent users from enabling BitLocker unless the computer is
connected to the domain and the backup of the BitLocker recovery information to
AD DS has succeeded.
The Choose How BitLocker-protected Fixed Drives Can be Recovered policy must
be set to Selected to use this policy.

Configure Use
of HardwareBased
Encryption for
Fixed Data
Drives

145

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

PARENT to the next 4 policies.
Selected enables the configuration of hardware-based encryption on fixed data
drives.

Manage Policies
Selected
Not Selected

Use HardwareBased
Encryption for
Fixed Data
Drives

Selected

Selected enables hardware-based encryption for fixed data drives.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Hardware-Based Encryption for Fixed Data
Drives must be set to Selected.

Use BitLocker
SoftwareBased
Encryption on
Fixed Data
Drives When
Hardware
Encryption is
Not Available

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

Selected enables BitLocker software-based encryption on fixed data drives if
hardware-based encryption is not available.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Hardware-Based Encryption for Fixed Data
Drives must be set to Selected.

Restrict
Crypto
Algorithms
and Cipher
Suites Allowed
for HardwareBased
Encryption on
Fixed Data
Drives

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected

Selected allows only specific crypto algorithm and cipher suites for BitLocker
hardware encryption on fixed data drives.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Hardware-Based Encryption for Fixed Data
Drives must be set to Selected.

Configure
Specific
Crypto
Algorithms
and Cipher
Suites Settings
on Fixed Data
Drives

String

String 2.16.840.1.101.3.4.1.2;
2.16.840.1.101.3.4.1.42
Set specific Crypto Algorithms and Cipher Suites on fixed data drives.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Hardware-Based Encryption for Fixed Data
Drives must be set to Selected.

See basic
settings
Bitlocker Encryption - Global Settings

Qualified path
Important: This policy is not used by BitLocker Manager, because it does not
prompt the user when saving recovery passwords.

Default Folder
Location to
Save Recovery
Password

Microsoft defines this policy as: This setting provides the default path that is
displayed when the BitLocker drive encryption setup wizard prompts the user to
enter the location of a folder to save the recovery password.
The text in this policy is translatable.

Encryption
Method and
Cipher
Strength

AES 128 with Diffuser

AES 128 with Diffuser
AES 256 with Diffuser
AES 128
AES 256
This policy specifies the encryption method and cipher strength used for BitLocker
drive encryption. Note that changing this policy has no effect if the drive is already
encrypted or encryption is in progress.
Selected
Not Selected

Enable
Organizational
Unique
Identifiers

Not Selected

This policy allows for the association of unique organizational identifiers to a new
drive that is enabled with BitLocker. These identifiers are stored as the
identification field and allowed identification field. The allowed identification
field is used in combination with the Deny Write Access to Removable Drives Not
Protected by BitLocker policy to help control the use of removable drives in the
organization.
This policy must be set to Selected to use the policies Set Organizational Unique
Identifiers and Set Allowed Org Unique Identifiers.

Set
Organizational
Unique

Up to 260 characters
The identification field allows you to associate a unique organizational identifier to
BitLocker-protected drives. This identifier is automatically added to new

146

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Identifiers

BitLocker-protected drives and can be updated on existing BitLocker-protected
drives using the Manage-BDE command-line tool. An identification field is required
for management of certificate-based data recovery agents on BitLocker-protected
drives and for potential updates to the BitLocker To Go Reader. BitLocker will only
manage and update data recovery agents when the identification field on the drive
matches the value configured in the identification field. In a similar manner,
BitLocker will only update BitLocker To Go Reader when the identification field on
the drive matches the value configured for the identification field.
To use this policy, Enable Organizational Unique Identifiers must be set to
Selected.
Up to 260 characters
The allowed identification field is used in combination with the Deny Write Access
to Removable Drives Not Protected by BitLocker policy to help control the use of
removable drives in the organization. It is a comma separated list of identification
fields from your organization or other external organizations.

Set Allowed
Organizational
Unique
Identifiers

Prevent
Memory
Overwrite on
Restart

Enable Smart
Card
Certificate
Identifier

To use this policy, Enable Organizational Unique Identifiers must be set to
Selected.
Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected

Selected prevents memory from being overwritten on restart. Preventing memory
overwrite may improve restart performance, but will increase the risk of exposing
BitLocker secrets. When Not Selected, BitLocker secrets are removed from memory
when the computer restarts.
Selected
Not Selected

Not Selected

This policy allows or denies an object identifier to be specified for enhanced key
usage with a certificate.
This policy must be set to Selected to use the policy Smart Card Certificate
Identifier.
1.3.6.1.4.1.311.67.1.1

Smart Card
Certificate
Identifier

1.3.6.1.4.1.311.67.1.1

This policy provides for an object identifier to be specified for enhanced key usage
with a certificate. BitLocker can identify which certificates may be used to
authenticate a user certificate to a BitLocker drive by matching the object
identifier in the certificate with the object identifier that is defined by this policy.
Use caution if changing the default value.
To use this policy, Enable Smart Card Certificate Identifier must be set to
Selected.

See basic
settings
Bitlocker Encryption - Operating System Volume Settings

Allow
Enhanced PINs
for Startup

Number of
Characters
Required in
PIN
Allow Network
Unlock at
Startup on
Operating
System Drives
Allow
SecureBoot on
Operating
System Drives

147

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected

Selected allows enhanced startup PINs to be used with BitLocker.
Enhanced startup PINs permit the use of characters including uppercase and
lowercase letters, symbols, numbers, and spaces. This policy setting is applied
when you turn on BitLocker.
4-20 digits

Not Selected

Selected

This policy configures the minimum length for a TPM startup PIN. The startup PIN
must have a minimum length of 4 digits and can have a maximum of 20 digits.
Selected
Not Selected
This policy specifies if a user is allowed to use the Network Unlock at Startup
feature on operating system drives.
Selected
Not Selected
This policy specifies if a user is allowed to use SecureBoot on operating system
drives.

Manage Policies
Disallow
Standard
Users from
Changing the
PIN on
Operating
System Drives

Not Selected

Enable Use of
Preboot
Keyboard
Input on
Slates

Not Selected

Reset
Platform
Validation
Data After
Recovery

Not Selected

Selected
Not Selected
This policy specifies if a standard user is allowed to change their PIN on operating
system drives.

Selected
Not Selected
This policy specifies if a preboot keyboard input is enabled on Slates.

Selected
Not Selected
This policy specifies if a preboot keyboard input is enabled on Slates.
Selected
Not Selected
BitLocker drives can always be recovered with BitLocker Manager, even if this
value is Not Selected. For the GPO, a Selected value allows you to specify how
BitLocker drives are recovered.

Choose How
BitLockerprotected
Operating
System Drives
Can be
Recovered

More...
This policy is the parent policy to:
Not Selected

Allow Data Recovery Agent for Protected Operating System Drives
Configure User Storage of BitLocker 48-digit Recovery Password
Configure User Storage of BitLocker 256-bit Recovery Key
Omit Recovery Options from the BitLocker Setup Wizard
Save BitLocker Recovery Info to AD DS for Operating System Drives
BitLocker Recovery Information to Store in AD DS (Windows Server 2008 Only)
Do Not Enable BitLocker Until Recovery Information is Stored in AD DS for
Operating System Drives

Allow Data
Recovery
Agent for
Protected
Operating
System Drives

Configure User
Storage of
BitLocker 48digit Recovery
Password

Configure User
Storage of
BitLocker 256bit Recovery
Key

Omit Recovery
Options from
the BitLocker
Setup Wizard

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

The "Allow Certificate Based Data Recovery Agent" is used to specify whether a
data recovery agent can be used with BitLocker operating system drives. Before a
data recovery agent can be used, it must be added from the Public Key policies in
either the Group Policy Management Console or the Local Group Policy Editor.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Operating System Drives Can
be Recovered must be set to Selected.
Do Not Allow
Require
Allow

Allow

This policy configures if a user is allowed, required, or not allowed to generate a
48-digit password.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Operating System Drives Can
be Recovered must be set to Selected.
Do Not Allow
Require
Allow

Allow

This policy configures if a user is allowed, required or not allowed to generate a
256-bit recovery key.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Operating System Drives Can
be Recovered must be set to Selected.
Selected
Not Selected

Not Selected

When Selected, users are prevented from specifying recovery options when
BitLocker is enabled. Recovery options for the drive are determined by policy
settings.

148

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Operating System Drives Can
be Recovered must be set to Selected.
Save BitLocker
Recovery
Information to
AD DS for
Operating
System Drives

BitLocker
Recovery
Information to
Store in AD DS
(Windows
Server 2008
Only)

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

Selected allows BitLocker recovery information to be stored in AD DS for operating
system drives. Note that the appropriate schema extensions and access control
settings on the domain must be first configured before AD DS backup can succeed.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Operating System Drives Can
be Recovered must be set to Selected.
Recovery Passwords and Key Packages
Recovery Passwords Only

Recovery Passwords and Key Packages

This policy provides the option of storing recovery passwords and key packages, or
storing the recovery password only in AD DS. The appropriate schema extensions
and access control settings on the domain must be first configured before applying
this policy.
This policy is applicable only to computers running Windows Server 2008.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Operating System Drives Can
be Recovered must be set to Selected.
Selected
Not Selected

Do Not Enable
BitLocker
Until Recovery
Information is
Stored in AD
DS for
Operating
System Drives

Not Selected

Although BitLocker recovery information is automatically stored in the Remote
Management Console, this policy additionally requires BitLocker drive encryption
recovery information to be stored in AD DS. The appropriate schema extensions
and access control settings on the domain must be configured before using this
policy.
This policy is used to prevent users from enabling BitLocker unless the computer is
connected to the domain and the backup of the BitLocker recovery information to
AD DS has succeeded.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Operating System Drives Can
be Recovered must be set to Selected.

Configure Use
of HardwareBased
Encryption for
Operating
System Drives
Use HardwareBased
Encryption for
Operating
System Drives
Use BitLocker
SoftwareBased
Encryption on
Operating
System Drives
When
Hardware
Encryption is
Not Available
Restrict
Crypto
Algorithms
and Cipher
Suites Allowed
for HardwareBased
Encryption on
Operating
System Drives
Configure

149

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

PARENT to the next 4 policies.
Selected enables the configuration of hardware-based encryption on operating
system drives.
Selected
Not Selected

Selected

Selected enables hardware-based encryption on operating system drives.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Hardware-Based Encryption for Operating
System Drives must be set to Selected.

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

Selected enables BitLocker software-based encryption on operating system drives
if hardware-based encryption is not available.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Hardware-Based Encryption for Operating
System Drives must be set to Selected.

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected

Selected allows only specific crypto algorithm and cipher suites for BitLocker
hardware encryption on operating system drives.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Hardware-Based Encryption for Operating
System Drives must be set to Selected.

2.16.840.1.101.3.4.1.2;2.16.840.1.101.3.4.1.42

String -

Manage Policies
2.16.840.1.101.3.4.1.2;
2.16.840.1.101.3.4.1.42

Specific
Crypto
Algorithms
and Cipher
Suites Settings
on Operating
System Drives
Encryption
Type for
Operating
System Drives
Configure Use
of Passwords
for Operating
System Drives

Configure
Password
Complexity for
Operating
System Drives

Specific Crypto Algorithms and Cipher Suites allowed on operating system drives.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Hardware-Based Encryption for Operating
System Drives must be set to Selected.

Full Encryption

Full Encryption
Used Space Only Encryption
Select the type of encryption to use for operating system drives.

Not Configured

Enabled
Disabled
Not Configured
Configure password requirements for Operating System Drives.
Allow
Require
Do Not Allow

Allow

Minimum
Password
Length for
Operating
System Drives

Require ASCIIOnly
Passwords for
Operating
System Drives
Use Enhanced
Boot
Configuration
Data Profile
Verify
Additional
BCD Settings

Exclude
Additional
BCD Settings

8-256
8

The default value is a password length of 8 characters. 8-256 characters are
allowed.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Passwords for Operating System Drives must be
set to Enabled.
Selected
Not Selected

Not Selected

Require ASCII-only passwords for operating system drives to create stronger
passwords.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Passwords for Operating System Drives must be
set to Enabled.

Disabled

Enabled
Disabled
Not Configured
Set this policy to Enable to allow the verification and exclusion of BCD settings.
String

String

Specify the additional Boot Configuration settings.
To use this policy, Use Enhanced Boot Configuration Data Profile must be set to
Enabled.
String

String

Exclude specific Boot Configuration settings.
To use this policy, Use Enhanced Boot Configuration Data Profile must be set to
Enabled.
Selected
Not Selected

Configure TPM
Platform
Validation
Profile

Not Selected

Set to Selected to enable boot up TPM drive unlocking for Windows 7 and Windows
Server 2008 R2. Selected allows the configuration of how the TPM security
hardware secures the BitLocker encryption key. This policy does not apply if the
computer does not have a compatible TPM or if BitLocker has already been turned
on with TPM protection.
This policy must be set to Selected to use the policy Configure Specific TPM
Platform Settings.
See http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/jj679890.aspx#BKMK_depopt3 for

150

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
more information.

PCR0,on
PCR1,off
PCR2,on
PCR3,off
PCR4,on
PCR5,on
PCR6,off
PCR7,off
PCR8,on
PCR9,on
Configure
Specific TPM
Platform
Settings

PCR10,on
PCR11,on
PCR12,off
PCR13,off
PCR14,off
PCR15,off
PCR16,off
PCR17,off
PCR18,off
PCR19,off

This policy allows you to configure how the computer's TPM security hardware
secures the BitLocker encryption key. This policy setting does not apply if the
computer does not have a compatible TPM or if BitLocker has already been turned
on with TPM protection. This setting determines what values the TPM measures
when it validates early boot components before unlocking a drive on a computer
running Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2.
More...
If you enable this policy before turning on BitLocker, you can configure the boot
components that the TPM will validate before unlocking access to the BitLockerencrypted operating system drive. If any of these components change while
BitLocker protection is in effect, the TPM will not release the encryption key to
unlock the drive and the computer will instead display the BitLocker recovery
console and require that either the recovery password or recovery key be provided
to unlock the drive.
If you disable or do not configure this policy, the TPM uses the default platform
validation profile or the platform validation profile specified by the setup script. A
platform validation profile consists of a set of Platform Configuration Register
(PCR) indices ranging from 0 to 23. The default platform validation profile secures
the encryption key against changes to the Core Root of Trust of Measurement
(CRTM), BIOS, and Platform Extensions (PCR 0), the Option ROM Code (PCR 2), the
Master Boot Record (MBR) Code (PCR 4), the NTFS Boot Sector (PCR 8), the NTFS
Boot Block (PCR 9), the Boot Manager (PCR 10), and the BitLocker Access Control
(PCR 11). The descriptions of PCR settings for computers that use an Extensible
Firmware Interface (EFI) are different than the PCR settings described for
computers that use a standard BIOS. The BitLocker Drive Encryption Deployment
Guide on Microsoft TechNet contains a complete list of PCR settings for both EFI
and standard BIOS.

PCR22,off

Warning: Changing from the default platform validation profile affects the security
and manageability of your computer. BitLocker's sensitivity to platform
modifications (malicious or authorized) is increased or decreased depending upon
inclusion or exclusion (respectively) of the PCRs.

PCR23,off

To use this policy, Configure TPM Platform Validation Profile must be set to True.

PCR20,off
PCR21,off

Selected
Not Selected
Configure BIOS
TPM Platform
Validation
Profile

Not Selected

Set to Selected to enable boot up BIOS TPM drive unlocking. Selected allows the
configuration of how the BIOS TPM security hardware secures the BitLocker
encryption key. This policy does not apply if the computer does not have a
compatible TPM or if BitLocker has already been turned on with TPM protection.
This policy must be set to Selected to use the policy Configure Specific BIOS TPM
Platform Settings.
See http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/jj679890.aspx#BKMK_tpmbios for
more information.

PCR0,on
PCR1,off
PCR2,on
Configure
Specific BIOS
TPM Platform
Settings

PCR3,off
PCR4,on
PCR5,off
PCR6,off
PCR7,off
PCR8,on

151

This policy setting allows you to configure how the computer's TPM security
hardware secures the BitLocker encryption key. This setting determines what
values the TPM measures when it validates early boot components before unlocking
an operating system drive on a computer with BIOS configuration or with UEFI
firmware that has the Compatibility Support Module (CSM) enabled.
If you enable this policy before turning on BitLocker, you can configure the boot
components that the TPM will validate before unlocking access to the BitLockerencrypted operating system drive. If any of these components change while
BitLocker protection is in effect, the TPM will not release the encryption key to
unlock the drive and the computer will instead display the BitLocker recovery
console and require that either the recovery password or recovery key be provided
to unlock the drive.
To use this policy, Configure BIOS TPM Platform Validation Profile must be set to

Manage Policies
PCR9,on

Selected.

PCR10,on
PCR11,on
PCR12,off
PCR13,off
PCR14,off
PCR15,off
PCR16,off
PCR17,off
PCR18,off
PCR19,off
PCR20,off
PCR21,off
PCR22,off
PCR23,off
Selected
Not Selected
Configure UEFI
TPM Platform
Validation
Profile

Not Selected

Set to Selected to enable boot up UEFI TPM drive unlocking. Selected allows the
configuration of how the UEFI TPM security hardware secures the BitLocker
encryption key. This policy does not apply if the computer does not have a
compatible TPM or if BitLocker has already been turned on with TPM protection.
This policy must be set to Selected to use the policy Configure Specific UEFI TPM
Platform Settings.
See http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/jj679890.aspx#BKMK_tpmvaluefi
for more information.

PCR0,on
PCR1,off
PCR2,on
PCR3,off
PCR4,on
PCR5,off
PCR6,off
PCR7,off
PCR8,off
PCR9,off
Configure
Specific UEFI
TPM Platform
Settings

PCR10,off
PCR11,on
PCR12,off
PCR13,off
PCR14,off
PCR15,off
PCR16,off

This policy setting allows you to configure how the computer's TPM security
hardware secures the BitLocker encryption key. This setting determines what
values the TPM measures when it validates early boot components before unlocking
an operating system drive on a computer with native UEFI firmware configurations.
If you enable this policy before turning on BitLocker, you can configure the boot
components that the TPM will validate before unlocking access to the BitLockerencrypted operating system drive. If any of these components change while
BitLocker protection is in effect, the TPM will not release the encryption key to
unlock the drive and the computer will instead display the BitLocker recovery
console and require that either the recovery password or recovery key be provided
to unlock the drive.
To use this policy, Configure UEFI TPM Platform Validation Profile must be set to
Selected.

PCR17,off
PCR18,off
PCR19,off
PCR20,off
PCR21,off
PCR22,off
PCR23,off
See basic
settings

152

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Bitlocker Encryption - Removable Storage Settings

Allow User to
Apply
BitLocker
Protection on
Removable
Drives

Selected

Allow User to
Suspend and
Decrypt
BitLocker
Protection on
Removable
Data Drives

Selected

Configure Use
of Smart Cards
on Removable
Data Drives

Deny Write
Access to
Removable
Drives Not
Protected by
BitLocker
Allow Access
to BitLocker
Protected
Removable
Data Drives
from Earlier
Versions of
Windows
Do Not Install
BitLocker to
Go Reader on
FAT formatted
Removable
Drives

Configure Use
of Passwords
for Removable
Data Drives

Configure
Password
Complexity for
Removable
Data Drives

Selected
Not Selected
When Selected, users are permitted to run the BitLocker setup wizard on a
removable data drive.

Selected
Not Selected
When Selected, users are authorized to suspend and decrypt BitLocker protection
on removable data drives.
Allow
Disallow
Require

Allow

Disabled

This policy specifies whether smart cards can be used to authenticate access to
BitLocker removable data drives. These settings are enforced when turning on
BitLocker, not when unlocking a drive. BitLocker will allow unlocking a drive with
any of the protectors available on the drive.
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled for Organization
If this policy is enabled, all removable drives that are not BitLocker protected will
be mounted as read only. If this policy is disabled, all removable drives on the
computer will be mounted with read and write access.
Selected
Not Selected

Selected

When Selected, removable data drives with the FAT file system can be unlocked on
computers running Windows Server 2008. This policy does not apply to drives that
are formatted with the NTFS file system.

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected

If this policy is Not Selected, removable data drives formatted with the FAT file
system that are BitLocker protected cannot be unlocked on computers running
Windows Server 2008. Bitlockertogo.exe will not be installed.
Allow
Require
Do No Allow

Allow

This policy specifies whether a password is required to unlock BitLocker removable
data drives. These settings allow the use of a password, require the use of a
password, or disallow the use of a password.
This policy must be set to Allow or Require to use the Configure Password
Complexity for Removable Data Drives and Minimum Password Length for
Removable Data Drives polices.
Allow
Require
Do Not Allow

Allow

Minimum
Password
Length for

153

8-20 characters
Passwords must be at least 8 characters in length, with a maximum of 20

Manage Policies
Removable
Data Drives

characters.

Encryption
Type for
Removable
Data Drives

Allow User to Choose
Full Encryption
Used Space Only Encryption

To use this policy, Configure Use of Passwords for Removable Data Drives must be
set to Allow or Require.

Full Encryption

Select the type of encryption to use for Removable Data Drives.
Selected
Not Selected
BitLocker drives can always be recovered with BitLocker Manager, even if this
value is Not Selected. This policy allows for the control of how BitLocker protected
removable data drives are recovered in the absence of the required credentials.

Choose How
BitLockerprotected
Removable
Drives Can be
Recovered

More...
This policy is the parent policy to:
Not Selected

Allow Data Recovery Agent for Protected Removable Data Drives
Configure User Storage of BitLocker 48-digit Recovery Password
Configure User Storage of BitLocker 256-bit Recovery Key
Omit Recovery Options from the BitLocker Setup Wizard for Removable Media
Save BitLocker Recovery Information to AD DS for Removable Data Drives
BitLocker Recovery Info to Store in AD DS for Removable Data Drives
Do Not Enable BitLocker Until Recovery Info is Stored in AD DS for Rem Data Drives

Allow Data
Recovery
Agent for
Protected
Removable
Data Drives

Configure User
Storage of
BitLocker 48digit Recovery
Password

Configure User
Storage of
BitLocker 256bit Recovery
Key

Omit Recovery
Options from
the BitLocker
Setup Wizard
for Removable
Media

Save BitLocker
Recovery
Information to
AD DS for
Removable
Data Drives

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

When Selected, a data recovery agent is allowed for use with BitLocker protected
removable data drives. Before the agent can be used, it must be added from the
Public Key Policies in either the Group Policy Management Console or the Local
Group Policy Editor.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Removable Drives Can be
Recovered must be to Selected.
Allow
Require
Do Not Allow

Allow

This policy configures if a user is allowed, required, or not allowed to generate a
48-digit password.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Removable Drives Can be
Recovered must be to Selected.
Allow
Require
Do Not Allow

Allow

This policy configures if a user is allowed, required, or not allowed to generate a
256-bit recovery key.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Removable Drives Can be
Recovered must be to Selected.
Selected
Not Selected

Not Selected

When Selected, users are prevented from specifying recovery options when
BitLocker is enabled. Recovery options for the drive are determined by policy
settings.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Removable Drives Can be
Recovered must be to Selected.
Selected
Not Selected

Selected

Selected allows BitLocker recovery information to be stored in AD DS for removable
data drives. The appropriate schema extensions and access control settings on the
domain must be first configured before AD DS backup can succeed.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Removable Drives Can be
Recovered must be to Selected.

154

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Set this policy to Selected to use the policy BitLocker Recovery Information to
Store in AD DS for Removable Data Drives.
Recovery Passwords and Key Packages
Recovery Passwords Only
BitLocker
Recovery
Information to
Store in AD DS
for Removable
Data Drives

Recovery Passwords and Key Packages

This policy provides the option of storing recovery passwords and key packages, or
storing the recovery password only in AD DS. The appropriate schema extensions
and access control settings on the domain must be first configured before applying
this policy.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Removable Drives Can be
Recovered must be to Selected.
To use this policy, Save BitLocker Recovery Information to AD DS for Removable
Data Drives must be set to Selected.
Selected
Not Selected

Do Not Enable
BitLocker
Until Recovery
Information is
Stored in AD
DS for
Removable
Data Drives

Not Selected

Although BitLocker recovery information is automatically stored in the Remote
Management Console, this policy additionally requires BitLocker drive encryption
recovery information to be stored in AD DS. Note that the appropriate schema
extensions and access control settings on the domain must be configured before
using this policy.
This policy is used to prevent users from enabling BitLocker unless the computer is
connected to the domain and the backup of the BitLocker recovery information to
AD DS has succeeded.
To use this policy, Choose How BitLocker-protected Removable Drives Can be
Recovered must be to Selected.

Configure Use
of HardwareBased
Encryption for
Removable
Data Drives
Use HardwareBased
Encryption for
Removable
Data Drives
Use BitLocker
SoftwareBased
Encryption on
Removable
Data Drives
When
Hardware
Encryption is
Not Available
Restrict
Crypto
Algorithms
and Cipher
Suites Allowed
for HardwareBased
Encryption on
Removable
Data Drives
Configure
Specific
Crypto
Algorithms
and Cipher
Suites Settings
on Removable
Data Drives

155

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

PARENT to the next 4 policies.
Selected enables the configuration of hardware-based encryption on removable
data drives.
Selected
Not Selected

Selected

Selected enables hardware-based encryption on removable data drives.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Hardware-Based Encryption for Removable
Data Drives must be set to Selected.

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

Selected enables BitLocker software-based encryption on removable data drives if
hardware-based encryption is not available.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Hardware-Based Encryption for Removable
Data Drives must be set to Selected.

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected

Selected allows only specific crypto algorithm and cipher suites for BitLocker
hardware encryption.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Hardware-Based Encryption for Removable
Data Drives must be set to Selected.

2.16.840.1.101.3.4.1.2;2.16.840.1.101.3.4.1.42

String 2.16.840.1.101.3.4.1.2;
2.16.840.1.101.3.4.1.42
Specific Crypto Algorithms and Cipher Suites allowed.
To use this policy, Configure Use of Hardware-Based Encryption for Removable
Data Drives must be set to Selected.

Manage Policies
See basic
settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Server Encryption
This technology manages Dell's data centric encryption using certificate-based authentication instead of the typical userbased authentication instead of the typical user-based authentication. This technology allows for protection of devices
such as Windows Servers that do not commonly have users logged in.

Server
Encryption

On
Off
Off

This policy enables or disables System Data Encryption (SDE) and Common
Encryption on the client server.
Changing the value of this policy triggers a new sweep to encrypt/decrypt files.

Allow
Software
Server
Encryption

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

This policy may be set to Not Selected to block activations during initial Dell Server
setup and maintenance interruptions.
1-10

Max Network
Failed
Attempts

Retry Interval
to connect to
Dell Server

Retry if
Authentication
Fails Upon
Network
Failure

Selected

Retry Interval
Upon Network
Failure

Server
Maintenance
Schedule

If this policy is Selected, client servers will be activated at the Enterprise level.

Number of successive failed attempts for a client server to connect to the Dell
Server before encryption keys are locked.
1-60 minutes
Time interval for the client server to attempt to connect to the Dell Server.
Selected
Not Selected
If Selected, the client server continues to attempt to contact the Dell Server if the
first attempt fails due to a network failure.
10-60 minutes

Not Selected

The length of time between attempts to contact the Dell Server if the first
attempt fails due to a network failure. The Retry if Authentication Fails Upon
Network Failure policy must be set to Selected for this policy to be enforced.
This policy must be selected to use all other Server Maintenance policies. If this
policy is Not Selected, no Server Maintenance policies are enforced, regardless of
other policy values.
Selected allows a maintenance schedule to control application of policy that
requires a reboot.
Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, Annually
The schedule configuration defines when the task should run.
Daily: Runs the task every day at the specified Server Maintenance Schedule Start
Time.

Server
Maintenance
Schedule
Repeats

Weekly

Weekly: Runs the task weekly on the days specified in Server Maintenance Day of
the Week.
Monthly: Runs the task monthly on the specified Server Maintenance Day of the
Month.
Quarterly: Runs the task quarterly on the specified Server Maintenance Day of the
Month.
Annually: Runs the task annually on the specified Server Maintenance Day of the
Month.

Server
Maintenance
Schedule Start
Time

21:00

Format is HH:mm. Example: 23:59
The time the task should run.

156

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Server
Maintenance
Day of the
Week

Saturday

Server
Maintenance
Day of the
Month

Infinite
Suppress

Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday
The day of the week the task should run.
1-31
The day of the month the task should run.
Example: 17.

Not Selected

Port Control
System

Disabled

Port: Express
Card Slot

Enabled

When Selected, an automatic reboot is suppressed indefinitely.
Enable or Disable all Port Control System policies. If this policy is set to Disable, no
Port Control System policies are applied, regardless of other Port Control System
policies.
All PCS policies require a reboot before the policy takes effect.
Enable, Disable, or Bypass ports exposed through the Express Card Slot.
Enable, Disable, or Bypass port access to external USB ports.

Port: USB

Enabled

Note: USB port-level blocking and HID class-level blocking is only honored if we
can identify the computer chassis as a laptop/notebook form-factor. We rely on
the computer's BIOS for the identification of the chassis.

Port: eSATA

Enabled

Enable, Disable, or Bypass port access to external SATA ports.

Port: PCMCIA

Enabled

Enable, Disable, or Bypass port access to PCMCIA ports.

Port: Firewire
(1394)

Enabled

Enable, Disable, or Bypass port access to external Firewire (1394) ports.

Port: SD

Enabled

Enable, Disable, or Bypass port access to SD card ports.

Port: Memory
Transfer
Device (MTD)

Enabled

Enable, Disable, or Bypass access to Memory Transfer Device (MTD) ports.

Class: Storage

Enabled

Subclass
Storage:
External Drive
Control

This policy interacts with the Removable Storage - EMS Access to unShielded Media
policy. If you intend to have Full Access to media, also set this policy to Full Access
to ensure that the media is not set to read only and the port is not blocked.
Full Access

Full Access: External Drive port does not have read/write data restrictions applied
Read Only: Allows read capability. Write data is disabled
Blocked: Port is blocked from read/write capability
This policy is endpoint-based and cannot be overridden by user policy.
CHILD of Class: Storage. Class: Storage must be set to Enabled to use this policy.
Full Access: Optical Drive port does not have read/write data restrictions applied
UDF Only: Blocks all data writes that are not in the UDF format (CD/DVD burning,
ISO burning). Read data is enabled.
Read Only: Allows read capability. Write data is disabled

Subclass
Storage:
Optical Drive
Control

UDF Only

Blocked: Port is blocked from read/write capability
This policy is endpoint-based and cannot be overridden by user policy.
Universal Disk Format (UDF) is an implementation of the specification known as
ISO/IEC 13346 and ECMA-167 and is an open vendor-neutral file system for
computer data storage for a broad range of media.
To encrypt data written to CD/DVD media:
Set EMS Encrypt External Media = Selected, EMS Exclude CD/DVD Encryption = Not
Selected, and Storage Class: Optical Drive Control = UDF Only.

Subclass
Storage:
Floppy Drive
Control

157

Read Only

CHILD of Class: Storage. Class: Storage must be set to Enabled to use this policy.
Full Access: Floppy Drive port does not have read/write data restrictions applied

Manage Policies
Read Only: Allows read capability. Write data is disabled
Blocked: Port is blocked from read/write capability
This policy is endpoint-based and cannot be overridden by user policy.
Class:
Windows
Portable
Device (WPD)

Subclass
Windows
Portable
Device (WPD):
Storage

Enabled

PARENT to the next policy. Set this policy to Enabled to use the Subclass Windows
Portable Device (WPD): Storage policy. Setting this policy to Disabled disables the
Subclass Windows Portable Device (WPD): Storage policy - no matter what its
value.
Control access to all Windows Portable Devices.
CHILD of Class: Windows Portable Device (WPD) . Class: Windows Portable Device
(WPD) must be set to Enabled to use this policy.

Full Access

Full Access: Port does not have read/write data restrictions applied.
Read Only: Allows read capability. Write data is disabled.
Blocked: Port is blocked from read/write capability.
Control access to all Human Interface Devices (keyboards, mice).

Class: Human
Interface
Device (HID)

Enabled

Class: Other

Enabled

Control access to all devices not covered by other Classes.

EMS Encrypt
External
Media

Not Selected

This policy must be selected to use all other Removable Storage policies. Not
Selected means that no encryption of removable storage takes place, regardless of
other policy values.

EMS Exclude
CD/DVD
Encryption

Not Selected

Not Selected encrypts CD/DVD devices.
Block, Read Only, Full Access
Note that this policy interacts with the Port Control System - Storage Class:
External Drive Control policy. If you intend to set this policy to Full Access, ensure
that Storage Class: External Drive Control is not set to Read Only or Blocked.
More...

EMS Access to
unShielded
Media

Read Only

When this policy is set to Block Access, you have no access to removable storage
unless it is encrypted.
Choosing either Read-Only or Full Access allows you to decide what removable
storage to encrypt.
If you choose not to encrypt removable storage and this policy is set to Full Access,
you have full read/write access to removable storage.
If you choose not to encrypt removable storage and this policy is set to Read-Only,
you can read or delete existing files on the unencrypted removable storage, but
files cannot be edited on, or added to, the removable storage.

EMS
Encryption
Algorithm

AES 256, AES 128, 3DES
AES256

Encryption algorithm used to encrypt removable storage.
Encryption algorithms in order of speed, fastest first, are AES 128, AES 256, 3DES.
Disabled, Local, Roaming

EMS Automatic
Authentication

Disabled

Local automatic authentication allows the encrypted media to be automatically
authenticated when inserted in the originally encrypting computer when the owner
of that media is logged in. When automatic authentication is Disabled, users must
always manually authenticate to access encrypted media.
Not Selecting Roaming automatic authentication helps to prevent users from
forgetting their password when they take the media home or share it with a
colleague. Not selecting Roaming automatic authentication also promotes a sense
of awareness from a security perspective for users that the data being written to
that media is protected.
Selected forces a scan of removable storage every time it is inserted.

EMS Scan
External
Media

Not Selected

When this policy is Not Selected and the EMS Encrypt External Media policy is
Selected, only new and changed files are encrypted.
See EMS Encryption Rules if changing this policy to Selected. Do not enable this
policy without applying EMS Encryption Rules also.

158

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
More...
A scan occurs at every insertion so that any files added to the removable storage
without authenticating can be caught. Files can be added to the removable storage
if authentication is declined, but encrypted data cannot be accessed. The files
added will not be encrypted in this case, so the next time removable media is
authenticated (to work with encrypted data), any files that may have been added
are scanned and encrypted.

EMS Access
Encrypted
Data on
unShielded
Device

Selected allows the user to access encrypted data on removable storage whether
the endpoint is encrypted or not.
Selected

More...
When this policy is Not Selected, the user is able to work with encrypted data
when logged on to any encrypted endpoint, regardless of the Dell Server the user
activated against. The user will not be able to work with encrypted data using any
unencrypted device.
String - Maximum of 150 devices with a maximum of 500 characters per
PNPDeviceID. Maximum of 2048 total characters allowed. "Space" and "Enter"
characters count in the total characters used.
This policy allows the specification of removable storage devices to exclude from
encryption [using the removable storage device's Plug and Play device identifier
(PNPDeviceID)], thereby allowing users full access to the specified removable
storage devices.
More...
This policy is available on an Enterprise, Domain, Group, and User level. Note that
local settings override inherited settings. If a user is in more than one group, all
EMS Device Whitelist entries, across all Groups, apply.
Note: This policy is particularly useful when using removable storage devices which
provide hardware encryption. However, this policy should be used with caution.
This policy does not check whether external media devices on this list provide
hardware encryption. Whitelisting removable storage devices which do not have
hardware encryption will not have enforced security and will not be protected.
For example, the Kingston® DataTraveler® Vault Privacy model enforces that
encryption is enabled to use the device. However, the Kingston DataTraveler Vault
model has an unsecured partition and a secured partition. Because it is the same
physical removable storage device with only one PNPDeviceID, the two partitions
cannot be distinguished, meaning that whitelisting this particular removable
storage device would allow unencrypted data to leave the endpoint.

EMS Device
Whitelist

Additionally, if a removable storage device is encrypted and is subsequently added
to the EMS Device Whitelist policy, it remains encrypted and requires a reformat
of the removable storage device to remove encryption.
The following is an example of a PNPDeviceID, which contains the manufacturer
identifier, product identifier, revision, and hardware serial number:

To whitelist a removable storage device, provide a string value which matches
portions of the device’s PNPDeviceID. Multiple device PNPDeviceIDs are allowed.
For example, to whitelist all Kingston DataTraveler Vault Privacy models, input the
string:

To whitelist both models of Kingston DataTraveler, the Vault and Vault Privacy
models, input the string:

Note that space characters are considered part of the substring to match to a
PNPDeviceID. Using the previous PNPDeviceID as an example, a space before and
after the semicolon would cause neither of the substrings to be matched, because
the space character is not part of the PNPDeviceID.
Instructions...
To find the PNPDeviceID for removable storage:

159

Insert the removable storage device into an encrypted computer.

Open the EMSService.log in C:\Programdata\Dell\Dell Data

Manage Policies
Protection\Encryption\EMS.
3.

Find PNPDeviceID=
For example:
14.03.18 18:50:06.834 [I] [Volume "F:\"] PnPDeviceID =
USBSTOR\DISK&VEN_SEAGATE&PROD_USB&REV_0409\2HC015
KJ&0
VEN=Vendor; Green highlighted text is for the vendor to be
excluded
PROD=Product/Model Name; Adding text highlighted blue also
excludes all of Seagate’s USB drives
REV=Firmware Revision; Adding text highlighted gray also
excludes the specific model being used
Serial number (in this example); Adding text highlighted yellow
excludes just this device

OR
To find the PNPDeviceID for removable storage on Windows 7 or later:
1.

Insert the removable storage device.

Open the Control Panel and go to Administrative Tools > Computer
Management.

Select the Hardware tab, select the drive, and click Properties.

A new windows displays. Select the Device Instance Path in the
Property drop-down menu.

The PNPDeviceID is displayed in the Value field.
To find the PNPDeviceID for removable storage on Windows XP:
1.

Click Start > Run...

Type msinfo32 and click Enter.

When the System Information window displays, go to Components > USB.

A list of USB devices and their PNPDeviceIDs displays.
Available Delimeters:
Tabs
Commas
Semi colons
Hex character 0x1E (Record separator character)
EMS Alpha
Characters
Required in
Password

Selected

Selected requires one or more letters in the password.

EMS Mixed
Case Required
in Password

Selected

Selected requires at least one uppercase and one lowercase letter in the password.

EMS Number
of Characters.
Required in
Password

EMS Numeric
Characters
Required in
Password

Selected

EMS Password
Attempts
Allowed

1-40 characters
Minimum number of characters required in the password.

Selected requires one or more numeric characters in the password.

1-10
Number of times the user can attempt to enter the correct password.

160

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
EMS Special
Characters
Required in
Password

Not Selected

EMS Access
and Device
Code Length

EMS Access
Code
Attempts
Allowed

Selected requires one or more special characters in the password.

8, 16, 32
Number of characters access and device codes have. 32 characters is the most
secure, while 8 is the easiest to enter.
1-10
Number of times the user can attempt to enter the access code.
Apply Cooldown, Wipe Encryption Keys
Action to take following unsuccessful EMS Access Code Attempts Allowed:

EMS Access
Code Failure
Action

Apply Cooldown

• Apply Cooldown to allow another round of attempts following the specified
cooldown period (EMS Cooldown Time Delay and EMS Cooldown Time Increment
policies)
• Wipe Encryption Keys to delete the encryption keys on the removable storage,
making the encrypted data inaccessible until the owner takes the media to an
encrypted computer for which he has a login.
String - 5-512 characters - Authentication Failed: Please contact your system
administrator.
Message that displays when a user needs to contact an administrator for an access
code after authentication failure.

EMS Access
String
Code Required
Authentication Failed. Please contact your system
Message
administrator.

More...
Message policies must have non-blank values.
"Space" and "Enter" characters used to add lines between rows count as characters
used. Messages over the 512 character limit are truncated on the client.
We recommend that you customize the second sentence of the message to include
specific instructions about how to contact a Help Desk or Security Administrator for
authentication failures.
0-5000 seconds

EMS Cooldown
Time Delay

EMS Cooldown
Time
Increment

Number of seconds the user must wait before attempting to enter the access code
after failing the specified number of times.
0-5000 seconds
Incremental time to add to the cooldown time each time the user fails to enter the
correct access code in the specified number of attempts.
String - 5-512 characters - You are not authorized to use this media. Please
contact your system administrator.
Message that displays following unsuccessful Access Code Attempts Allowed.

EMS Access
Code Failed
Message

String
You are not authorized to use this media. Please contact
your system administrator.

More...
Message policies must have non-blank values.
"Space" and "Enter" characters used to add lines between rows count as characters
used. Messages over the 512 character limit are truncated on the client.
We recommend that you customize the message to include specific instructions
about how to contact the Help Desk or Security Administrator.
Encryption rules to be used to encrypt/not encrypt certain drives, directories, and
folders.

EMS
Encryption
Rules

A total of 2048 characters are allowed. "Space" and "Enter" characters used to add
lines between rows count as characters used. Any rules exceeding the 2048 limit
are ignored.
String

See Encryption Rules for information.
More...
Storage devices which incorporate multi-interface connections, such as Firewire,
USB, eSATA, etc. may require the use of both Encryption External Media and
encryption rules to encrypt the endpoint. This is necessary due to differences in
how the Windows operating system handles storage devices based on interface
type.

161

Manage Policies
To ensure encrypting an iPod via Encryption External Media does not make the
device unusable, use the following rules:
-R#:\Calendars
-R#:\Contacts
-R#:\iPod_Control
-R#:\Notes
-R#:\Photos
You can also force encryption of specific file types in the directories above. Adding
the following rules will ensure that ppt, pptx, doc, docx, xls, and xlsx files are
encrypted in the directories excluded from encryption via the previous rules:
^R#:\Calendars
;ppt.doc
.xls.pptx
.docx.xlsx
^R#:\Contacts
;ppt
.doc.xls
.pptx.docx
.xlsx
^R#:
\iPod_Control
;ppt.doc
.xls.pptx
.docx.xlsx
^R#:\Notes
;ppt.doc
.xls.pptx
.docx.xlsx
^R#:\Photos
;ppt.doc
.xls.pptx
.docx.xlsx
Replacing these five rules with the following rule will force encryption of ppt,
pptx, doc, docx, xls, and xlsx files in any directory on the iPod, including
Calendars, Contacts, iPod_Control, Notes, and Photos:
^R#:\;ppt.doc.xls
.pptx.docx.xlsx
These rules disable or enable encryption for these folders and file types for all
removable devices - not just an iPod. Use care when defining rules to exclude an
iPod from encryption.
These rules have been tested against the following iPods:
iPod Video 30gb fifth generation
iPod Nano 2gb second generation
iPod Mini 4gb second generation
We do not recommend the use of the iPod Shuffle, as unexpected results may
occur.
As iPods change, this information could also change, so caution is advised when
allowing the use of iPods on Encryption External Media-enabled computers.
Because folder names on iPods are dependent on the model of the iPod, we
recommend creating an exclusion encryption policy which covers all folder names,
across all iPod models.
Block access to any external media that is less than 55 MB and thus has insufficient
storage capacity to host external media encryption (such as a 1.44MB floppy disk).
EMS Block
Access to
UnShieldable
Media

More...
Selected

All access is blocked if EMS Encrypt External Media and this policy are both
Selected. If EMS Encrypt External Media is Selected, but this policy is Not Selected,
data can be read from the unencryptable external media, but write access to the
media is blocked.
If EMS Encrypt External Media is Off, then this policy has no effect and access to
unencryptable external media is not impacted.

SDE
Encryption
Enabled

Selected

162

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
AES 256, AES 128, 3DES

SDE
Encryption
Algorithm

AES256

Encryption algorithm used to for System Data Encryption.
Encryption algorithms in order of speed, fastest first, are AES 128, AES 256, 3DES.

String
F#:\
-^%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\System Volume Information
-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\;dll.exe.sys.ocx.man.cat
.manifest.policy
-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\System32
SDE
Encryption
Rules

-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SysWow64

Encryption rules to be used to encrypt/not encrypt certain drives, directories, and
folders. See Encryption Rules for information.

-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\Fonts

SDE Encryption Rules may be changed as appropriate for your environment.
However, these defaults have been tested extensively. Removing these exclusions
may result in Windows issues, particularly after applying patch updates.

^3@%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SYSTEM32\;exe

Contact ProSupport for guidance if you are unsure about changing the values.

-^%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\WinSxS

-^3@%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SYSTEM32\cmd.exe;exe
-^3@%ENV:SYSTEMROOT%\SYSTEM32\autochk.exe;exe
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\ProgramData\Dell\Kace
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files\Dell\Kace
-^3%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\Program Files (x86)\Dell\Kace
Encryption
Enabled

Selected

This policy must be selected to use all Common Encryption policies. Not Selected
means that no Common Encryption takes place, regardless of other policy values.
Changing the value of this policy triggers a new sweep to encrypt/decrypt files.
String - maximum of 100 entries of 500 characters each (up to a maximum of 2048
characters)

String
Common
Encrypted
Folders

A list of folders on computer drives to be encrypted or excluded from encryption,
which can then be accessed by all managed users who have access to the
computer. See Encryption Rules for information.

%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\;accdb.doc.docm.docx.mdb.pdf.ppam
.pps.ppsm.ppsx.ppt.pptm.pptx.pub.puz.sldm.sldx.tif.tiff Important: Overriding directory protection can result in an unbootable computer
and/or require reformatting drives.
.vdx.vsd.vss.vst.vsx.vtx.xlam.xlm.xls.xlsb.xlsm.xlsx
.xsf.zip.rar
More...
%ENV:USERPROFILE%\Desktop
The available drive letters are:
%ENV:USERPROFILE%\Download
-^%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\;dat

#: Refers to all drives

f#: Refers to all fixed (non-removable) drives
r#: Refers to all removable drives
AES 256 or AES 128
Common
Encryption
Algorithm

AES256

Encryption algorithm used to encrypt data at the endpoint (all users) level.
System paging files are encrypted using AES 128.
Encryption algorithms in order of speed, fastest first, are AES 128, AES 256, 3DES.
String - maximum of 100 entries of 500 characters each

Exe List

Application
Data
Encryption
List

163

winword.exe
excel.exe
powerpnt.exe
msaccess.exe
winproj.exe
outlook.exe
acrobat.exe
visio.exe
mspub.exe
winzip.exe
winrar.exe
onenote.exe
onenotem.exe

We do not recommend adding explorer.exe or iexplorer.exe to the ADE list, as
unexpected or unintended results may occur.
However, explorer.exe is the process used to create a new notepad file on the
desktop using the right-click menu. Setting encryption by file extension, instead of
the ADE list, provides more comprehensive coverage.
Changes to this policy do not affect files already encrypted because of this policy.
List process names of applications (without paths) whose new files you want
encrypted, separated by carriage returns. Do not use wildcards.
More...
You can also specify these process names (separated by commas) via the registry
value HKLM\SOFTWARE\Credant\CMGShield\ApplicationDataEncryptionList.
The Encryption client encrypts all new files (not already being encrypted by
Common Encrypted Folders and User Encrypted Folders) on the current computer
hard drives created by these application processes whenever they are owned by a
currently-logged-on managed user. This may include files excluded from

Manage Policies
encryption by Common Encrypted Folders and/or User
Encrypted Folders.
The following folders and their subfolders are always excluded from encryption by
this policy:
C:\Windows\system32
C:\Windows\Software Distribution
C:\Windows\Security
C:\System Volume Information\Program
Files\Credant\(.dll.exe.sys.mac.ddp.wip.rty.nmd.inv)
We strongly recommend not listing applications or installers that write systemcritical files. Doing so could result in encryption of important system files, which
could make a Windows endpoint unbootable.
Common process names:
Outlook: outlook.exe
Word: winword.exe
FrontPage: frontpg.exe
PowerPoint: powerpnt.exe
Access: msaccess.exe
WordPad: wordpad.exe
Microsoft Paint: mspaint.exe
Excel: excel.exe
The following hard-coded system and installer process names are ignored if
specified in this policy (you can also add to this list via the registry value
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Credant\CMGShield\EUWPrivilegedList):
hotfix.exe, a Windows update process
update.exe, a Windows update process
setup.exe, a third-party installer process
msiexec.exe, a third-party installer process
wuauclt.exe, a Windows update process
wmiprvse.exe, a Windows system process
migrate.exe, a Windows update process
unregmp2.exe, a Windows update process
ikernel.exe, a third-party installer process
wssetup.exe, the Windows Encryption client installer
svchost.exe, a Windows system process
When this policy is selected, the paths listed in the environment variables TEMP
and TMP are encrypted. TEMP and TMP for the operating system are encrypted
with the Common Encryption Key.
Encrypt
Temporary
Files

Not Selected

Encrypt User
Profile
Documents
Encrypt
Windows
Paging File

Managed
Services

Not Selected

Selected

null

When this policy is selected, the following are encrypted:
• The users profile (C:\Users\jsmith) with the User Data Encryption Key
• \Users\Public with the Common Encryption Key
When this policy is selected, the Windows paging file is encrypted. A change to this
policy requires a reboot.
String - maximum of 100 entries of 500 characters each (up to a maximum of 2048
characters)
When a Service is managed by this policy, the Service is started only after the user
is logged in and the Encryption client is unlocked. This policy also ensures that the
Service managed by this policy is stopped before the Encryption client is locked

164

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
during logoff. This policy can also prevent a user logoff if a Service is unresponsive.
More...
Syntax is one Service name per line. Spaces in the Service name are supported.
Wildcards are not supported. Entries are not case-sensitive. For example,
GoogleDesktop Manager is the same as googledesktopmanager.
The Service "log on as" setting has no bearing on whether or not the Encryption
client can control it. It does not matter if a user logs on with user credentials
verses the local system.
The startup type (Automatic or Manual) does not affect the ability of the
Encryption client to control it. Automatic or Manual startup is acceptable.
Managed Services will not be started if an unmanaged user logs on.
No Overwrite, Single-pass Overwrite, Three-pass Overwrite, Seven-pass Overwrite
Once encryption is complete, this policy determines what happens to the
unencrypted residue of the original files:
• No Overwrite deletes it. This value yields the fastest encryption processing.
Secure PostEncryption
Cleanup

Single Pass Overwrite

Secure
Windows
Credentials

Selected

Block
Unmanaged
Access to
Domain
Credentials

Selected

This policy prevents unmanaged applications from accessing the Windows domain
credentials when a user is logged in.

Secure
Windows
Hibernation
File

Not Selected

When enabled, the hibernation file is encrypted only when the computer enters
hibernation. The Encryption client disengages protection when the computer
comes out of hibernation, providing protection without impacting users or
applications while the computer is in use.

Prevent
Unsecured
Hibernation

Not Selected

When enabled, the Encryption client does not allow computer hibernation if the
client is unable to encrypt the hibernation data.
Highest, High, Normal, Low, Lowest
Specifies the relative Windows priority of encrypted folder scanning. High and
Highest prioritize scanning speed over computer responsiveness, Low and Lowest
prioritize computer responsiveness over scanning speed and favor other resourceintensive activities, and Normal balances the two.
The client checks for a changed Workstation Scan Priority before processing the
next file.

Workstation
Scan Priority

Lowest

The scan priority levels are used in two different ways.
1.

These values correspond with the values used by the Microsoft SDK to
set thread execution priority.

165

Manage Policies
String - maximum of 1500 characters
List fully qualified Policy Proxy hostnames, or IP addresses, separated by carriage
returns. Ports cannot be specified in this policy.
More...
Once a valid entry is found, the remainder of the Policy Proxies listed are ignored.
Entries are processed in the following order:
1. GKConnections Override (this registry entry overrides all other entries)
2. GKConnections (this registry entry is set automatically by the client, based on
the this policy)
3. GK
Policy Proxy
Connections

String

To override this policy and specify ports via the registry key, set
HKLM\Software\Microsoft\WindowsNT\CurrentVersion\
Winlogon\CMGShield\GKConnectionsOverride.
The client communicates with Policy Proxies using the GKPORT (the default is
8000).
If necessary, change that port via the registry key
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\WindowsNT\Current
Version\Winlogon\CMGShield\GKPort.
Inherited values for this policy accumulate.
In order for the client to connect to a Policy Proxy specified in this policy, it must
be in the same group as the Policy Proxy specified during client installation.
Because the client supports up to 255 users per computer, this policy is available
only at the Enterprise policy level.

Policy Proxy
Polling
Interval

1-1440 minutes
720

The interval that the client attempts to poll Policy Proxy for policy updates, and
send inventory information to Policy Proxy.
The client also attempts to poll Policy Proxy each time a user logs on.

See basic
settings

•

Includes any of the following Windows CSIDL constants:
DESKTOP
INTERNET
PROGRAMS
CONTROLS
PRINTERS
PERSONAL
FAVORITES
STARTUP
RECENT
SENDTO
STARTMENU
166

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
STARTMENU
MYDOCUMENTS
MYMUSIC
MYVIDEO
DESKTOPDIRECTORY
DRIVES
NETWORK
NETHOOD
FONTS
TEMPLATES
COMMON_STARTMENU
COMMON_PROGRAMS
COMMON_STARTUP
COMMON_DESKTOPDIRECTORY
APPDATA
PRINTHOOD
LOCAL_APPDATA
ALTSTARTUP
COMMON_ALTSTARTUP
COMMON_FAVORITES
INTERNET_CACHE
COOKIES
HISTORY
COMMON_APPDATA
WINDOWS
SYSTEM
PROGRAM_FILES
PROGRAMFILES
MYPICTURES
PROFILE
SYSTEMX86
PROGRAM_FILESX86
PROGRAMFILESX86
PROGRAM_FILES_COMMON

167

Manage Policies
PROGRAM_FILES_COMMONX86
COMMON_TEMPLATES
COMMON_DOCUMENTS
COMMON_ADMINTOOLS
ADMINTOOLS
CONNECTIONS
COMMON_MUSIC
COMMON_PICTURES
COMMON_VIDEO
RESOURCES
PROFILES
%HKCU:regpath%

•

Includes a numeric or text value stored in the registry for the Current User. If you specify a path but
not an item, the client uses the default value

%HKLM:regpath%

•

Includes a numeric or text value stored in the registry for the local computer. If you specify a path
but not an item, the client uses the default value

%ENV:envname%

•

Includes the value of a Windows local environment variable

•

Includes the % character

Windows Policies that Require Reboot

•

SDE Encryption Enabled

•

Encrypt Windows Paging File

•

Secure Windows Credentials

•

All PCS policies

Windows Policies that Require Logoff

•

SDE Encryption Enabled

•

User state change to Suspended

•

EMS Encrypt External Media

•

EMS Scan External Media

•

EMS Encryption Algorithm

•

EMS Exclude CD/DVD Encryption

•

EMS Data Encryption Key

168

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

Encryption Rules
Important: Before you begin, you must understand directory protection, as well as when and how to
override directories and file types. If you do not completely understand the information included in this
section, as well as the encryption settings that currently exist on your environment, do not attempt to
override protected directories.
Do not encrypt files with the extension tmp. Encrypting .tmp files may result in an unbootable computer
and/or require reformatting drives.
Protected Directories
The Encryption client has several directories that are, by default, protected from encryption. The level of
protection varies from folder to folder. If a folder is protected, then the only way to encrypt data within
that directory is to use the override modifier described in Modifiers – What they are and what they do.
There are four levels (categories) of protection that directories and files can have: 0, 1, 2, and 3. Category 3
is the most protected level.
The following directories have Category 0 exclusions (including subfolders unless specified):
NOTE: All exclusions may not apply in all environments.

%SYSTEMDRIVE% (no subfolders)
Profile directory ("C:\Documents and Settings" in XP and "C:\Users" in Win7)
%SYSTEMROOT%
Default user profile ("C:\Documents and Settings\Default User" in XP and "C:\Users\Default" in Win7)
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILESX86
%SYSTEMROOT%\Driver Cache\i386
([HKLM\Software\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion]
SourcePath:REG_SZ)
%SYSTEMDRIVE%\I386
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA
%SYSTEMROOT%\temp\WgaErrLog.txt
F#:\boot
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA\Credant
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA\Dell\Dell Data Protection
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA\CmgAdmin.log
F#:\bootmgr
%SYSTEMROOT%\SysWOW64
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA\Microsoft\Windows\Caches
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES\Symantec
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILESX86\Symantec

169

Manage Policies
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES_COMMON\Symantec
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES_COMMONX86\Symantec
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA\Symantec
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES\McAfee
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILESX86\McAfee
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES_COMMON\McAfee
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES_COMMONX86\McAfee
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA\McAfee
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES\Trend Micro
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILESX86\Trend Micro
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA\Trend Micro
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES\Microsoft Security Client
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILESX86\Microsoft Security Client
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA\Microsoft Security Client
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES\Sophos
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILESX86\Sophos
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA\Sophos
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES\Kaspersky
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILESX86\Kaspersky
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA\Kaspersky
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILES\Kaspersky Lab
CSIDL_PROGRAM_FILESX86\Kaspersky Lab
CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA\Kaspersky Lab
%SYSTEMROOT%\Config.MSI
%SYSTEMROOT%\$Windows.~BT
F#:\.xen
%ProgramFiles%\Dell\Dell Data Protection\Encryption\Local Console.exe
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\WindowsApps
%SystemRoot%\SystemApps
%SystemRoot%\InfusedApps
The following directories have Category 1 exclusions:
%SYSTEMROOT%\System32\.tmp
The following directories have Category 2 exclusions:
%SYSTEMROOT%\System32

170

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
F#:\System Volume Information
%SYSTEMROOT%\SoftwareDistribution
%SYSTEMROOT%\Security
The following directories have Category 3 exclusions:
\.dll.exe.sys.mac.ddp.tbp.wip.rty.nmd.inv.config.sdf.installstate
%SYSTEMROOT%\system32\drivers\CmgHiber.dat
Modifiers – What they are and what they do
The ^ character is the “Override” command. It causes the listed policy to override protected directories. It
may be followed by a “2” or a “3”, indicating the level of the override.
The @ character is the “At” command. It will cause the listed policy to be applied at the specified folder
location only (subdirectories of that folder will not be subject to that policy).
The - is the “Not” command. It will cause the listed policy to be an exclusion policy instead of an inclusion
policy.
Using the Override Modifier
The Override Modifier can be used to allow for inclusion or exclusion in cases where there is a higher level of
protection. The following are the different override levels supported:
^ Category 1 Override
^2 Category 2 Override
^3 Category 3 Override
Encrypting/Not Encrypting Extensions
In order to include or exclude filename extensions using encryption rules, use the following within your
rules:

•

After specifying your directory location, use a semi-colon (;) before listing your extensions.

•

After specifying your directory location, you do not need to list a trailing backslash (\).

•

The period is used as a delineator. It is not meant to be used as “dot-extension.” However, you can
precede the first extension with a period.

•

The Override command (^) can be used with extensions.

•

The At command (@)can be used with extensions.

•

The Not command (-) can be used with extensions.

•

You can make any combination of the modifiers with an extension inclusion or exclusion.

Examples of extension inclusions/exclusion
C:\;doc.xls.ppt.docx.xlsx.pptx
What this does: On the C: drive, this encrypts all doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, and pptx files that do not
exist within any protected directory.
^C:\;txt
What this does: On the C: drive, this encrypts all txt files that are not in a directory that has
protection of Category 1 or better.

171

Manage Policies
-C:\;bat.exe.dll
What this does: On the C: drive, this causes all files with the extension bat, exe, and dll to not be
encrypted.
Encrypting/Not Encrypting Directories
In order to include or exclude directories using encryption rules, use the following within your rules:

•

After specifying your directory location, you do not need to list a trailing backslash (\).

•

If you list a directory for inclusion, every file contained within that directory will be encrypted.

•

The Override command (^) can be used with folders only when specifying an exclusion policy.

•

The At command (@) can be used with folders.

•

The Not command (-) can be used with folders.

•

You can make any combination of the supported modifiers for folders. If the Override command (^)
is used, the statement can only be an exclusion statement.

Examples of folder inclusion/exclusion
C:\CustomApplication\DataStore
What this does: On the C: drive, this causes every file within the directory of
\CustomApplication\DataStore to be encrypted.
-C:\Documents and Settings\All Users
What this does: On the C: drive, this applies a Category 0 level of protection to the directory of
\Documents and Settings\All Users.
-^2C:\CustomApplication\dll
What this does: On the C: drive, this applies a Category 2 level of protection to the directory of
\CustomApplication\dll.
Sub-directories and Precedence of Directives
Encryption rules may be listed in any order. If more than one rule applies to a given folder or file, then the
following general rules determine which one prevails:
1.

The rule with the more specific path prevails.

If the rules have equal paths, specified extensions prevail.

If the rules both specify extensions, exclusion overrides inclusion.

Example of sub-directories
C:\
-C:\MyApplicationFolder
What this does: (1st statement is an inclusion, 2nd statement is an exclusion) On the C: drive,
encrypt all files in folders at the root level and below, except for files residing in the protected
directories and any files residing in “MyApplicationFolder”.
Example 1 of competing directives:
C:\
-C:\MyApplicationFolder

172

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
^C:\;doc.xls.ppt.docx.xlsx.pptx
What this does: (1st statement is an inclusion, 2nd statement is an exclusion, 3rd statement is an
inclusion) On the C: drive, encrypt all files in folders at the root level and below, except for files
residing in the protected directories and files residing in “MyApplicationFolder”. However, override
and encrypt files with the extension doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, and pptx in the protected directories
and in the folder “MyApplicationFolder”.
Example 2 of competing directives:
C:\
-C:\MyApplicationFolder
^C:\;doc.xls.ppt.docx.xlsx.pptx
-^C:\MyApplicationFolder;doc.xls.ppt.docx.xlsx.pptx
What this does: (1st statement is an inclusion, 2nd statement is an exclusion, 3rd statement is an
inclusion, 4th statement is an exclusion) On the drive of C:, encrypt all files in folders at the root
level and below, except for files residing in the protected directories and files residing in
“MyApplicationFolder”. However, override and encrypt files with the extension doc, docx, xls, xlsx,
ppt, and pptx in the protected directories, but not in the folder “MyApplicationFolder”.
Example 3 of competing directives:
C:\
-C:\MyApplicationFolder
^C:\;doc.xls.ppt.docx.xlsx.pptx
-^C:\MyApplicationFolder;doc.xls.ppt.docx.xlsx.pptx
-^C:\MyApplicationFolder\Templates
What this does: (1st statement is an inclusion, 2nd statement is an exclusion, 3rd statement is an inclusion,
4th statement is an exclusion, 5th statement is an exclusion) On the C: drive, encrypt all files in folders at
the root level and below, except for files residing in the protected directories and files residing in
“MyApplicationFolder”. However, override and encrypt files with the extension doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, and
pptx in the protected directories, but not in the folder “MyApplicationFolder”. Additionally, the folder
“MyApplicationFolder\Templates” gains a category 2 protection causing no data to be encrypted there, since
the inclusion statements are less than or equal to category 2.
Environment Variables, KNOWNFOLDERID constants, and CSIDL
Using encryption rules, you can make use of environment variables, KNOWNFOLDERID constants (Windows 7
and later), and CSIDL values (pre-Windows 7 computers) in addition to specifying your policy folder locations
as absolute paths. In order to use variables in your encryption rules, follow these formatting rules:

173

•

Before and after the use of the variable, use a percent sign (%).

•

For environment variables, you must use “ENV:” preceding the variable name, all contained within
the percent signs.

•

For KNOWNFOLDERID constants, you must use "FOLDERID_" preceding the variable name. Percent
signs are not used.

•

For CSIDL variables, you must use “CSIDL:” preceding the variable name, all contained within the
percent signs.

•

Ensure that your variable contains a trailing backslash if you plan on appending another directory
after the use of the variable.

Manage Policies

•

Variables can be used in both folder and extension inclusion or exclusion rules.

The following environment variables are supported:
All locally defined environment variables
The following KNOWNFOLDERID values are supported:
RoamingAppData
Cookies
Desktop
Favorites
InternetCache
LocalAppData
Music
Pictures
Documents
Programs
Recent
SendTo
StartMenu
Startup
Templates
The following CSIDL variables are supported:
APPDATA
COOKIES
DESKTOPDIRECTORY
FAVORITES
INTERNET_CACHE
LOCAL_APPDATA
MYMUSIC
MYPICTURES
PERSONAL
PROGRAMS
RECENT
SENDTO
STARTMENU
STARTUP

174

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
TEMPLATES
Some examples of variables used in folder and extension policy:
%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\CustomApplication
What this does: This lists the folder \CustomApplication\ for encryption on the default drive where
Windows is installed.
-%ENV:USERPROFILE%\Desktop
What this does: This lists the user who is logged in to have their desktop obtain a category 0
protection.
Application Data Encryption (ADE)
ADE encrypts any file written by a protected application, using a category 2 override. This means that any
directory that has a category 2 protection or better, or any location that has specific extensions protected
with category 2 or better, will cause ADE to not encrypt those files.
For example, ADE will not encrypt any files written into /Windows/System32 folder, because this directory
has a default protection of category 2.
Example Policies for Common/User Key Encryption
The following set of encryption rules encrypts most of the drive, including standard Microsoft Office-type
documents in the Documents and Settings folders. This policy set should only be used for Common Encryption
(not User Encryption, Encryption External Media, or SDE). This is considered a strong policy set, and will
typically require some adjustments for local conditions and requirements.
%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\
^%ENV:USERPROFILE%\;
FOLDERID_Documents or %CSIDL:PERSONAL% (pre-Windows 7)
%ENV:USERPROFILE%\Desktop\
^%ENV:USERPROFILE%\;mp3.mp4.mpeg.avi.wmv.wav
-^%ENV:USERPROFILE%\Desktop\;
-%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\;
-%ENV:SYSTEMDRIVE%\config.msi
What this does:
Encrypts all of C:\, except for protected directories
Encrypts standard Microsoft Office documents across the drive, except for protected directories,
although it will encrypt them in the USERPROFILE directory.
Encrypts all of My Documents
Encrypts all of the Desktop, except for any selected excluded extensions
Excludes common system files from encryption
Excludes all encryption from C:\config.msi directory, due to MSI upgrade migration issues
All paths are dynamic based on environment variables
System Data Encryption (SDE)

175

Manage Policies
SDE is an intelligent file-based encryption method where the encryption key is auto-authenticated during the
volume mount process. A unique SDE Key is generated for each volume that is targeted for encryption by
SDE. This allows the SDE Key to be used to encrypt data that would not otherwise be possible with the
Common or User Keys due to time-based availability of the keys.
Due to the difference in how the SDE Key can be used, there are several caveats to be aware of when
considering use of this feature.

•

The built-in exclusions covered in protected directories do not apply to SDE. By design, SDE excludes
portions of the operating system that are necessary for booting and updating.

•

If a file is targeted for encryption by any key other than SDE in addition to SDE, then SDE will not
encrypt the file.

•

All encryption rules apply when writing SDE policies.

Policies for SDE Encryption
The following is the default SDE policy. Any changes to this policy should be considered carefully.
The following directories have Category 1 exclusions (including subfolders unless specified):
%SystemRoot%\system32\ntoskrnl.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\ntkrnlpa.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\ntkrnlmp.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\hal.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\halacpi.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\halmacpi.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\winload.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\kdcom.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\kd.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\kdnet.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\kd1394.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\kdusb.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\kdstub.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\mcupdate_AuthenticAMD.dll
%SystemRoot%\WinSxS\*\mcupdate_AuthenticAMD.dll
%SystemRoot%\WinSxS\*\mcupdate_GenuineIntel.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\mcupdate_GenuineIntel.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\winload.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\PSHED.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\BOOTVID.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\CLFS.SYS
%SystemRoot%\system32\CI.dll

176

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
%SystemRoot%\system32\sethc.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\utilman.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\narrator.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\magnify.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\osk.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\csrss.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\hvloader.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\hvix64.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\hvax64.exe
%ProgramFiles%\Dell\Dell Data Protection\Encryption\Local Console.exe
%SystemRoot%\boot
%SystemRoot%\prefetch
%SystemRoot%\system32\Boot
%SystemRoot%\Config.MSI
%SystemRoot%\system32\drivers
%SystemDrive%\Windows.old\Windows\WinSxS
%SystemRoot%\fonts
%SystemDrive%\boot
%SystemDrive%\boot\bcd.log
%SystemDrive%\boot\bcd.log1
%SystemDrive%\boot\bcd.log2
%SystemDrive%\boot\bcd
%SystemDrive%\boot\bootstat.dat
%SystemDrive%\boot\memtest.exe
%SystemRoot%\inf
%SystemRoot%\System Volume Information
%SystemRoot%\system32\CodeIntegrity\bootcat.cache
%SystemRoot%\system32\CodeIntegrity\driver.stl
%SystemRoot%\ ;dll.exe.sys.ocx.man.cat.manifest.policy
%SystemRoot%\system32
%SystemRoot%\WinSxS
%SystemRoot%\fonts
%SystemRoot%\WinSxS\pending.xml
%SystemRoot%\WinSxS\Temp

177

Manage Policies
%SystemRoot%\servicing\packages
%SystemRoot%\SoftwareDistribution\Download
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\Symantec
%SystemDrive%\Program Files (x86)\Symantec
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\Common Files\Symantec Shared
%SystemDrive%\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Symantec Shared
%SystemDrive%\ProgramData\Symantec
%AllUsersProfile%\Symantec
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\PGP Corporation
%SystemDrive%\PGPWDE00
%SystemDrive%\PGPWDE01
%SystemDrive%\PGPWDE02
%SystemDrive%\PGPWDE03
%SystemDrive%\SafeBoot.fs
%SystemDrive%\SafeBoot.rsv
%SystemDrive%\SafeBoot.csv
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\McAfee
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\Common Files\McAfee
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\McAfee
%SystemDrive%\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\McAfee
%SystemDrive%\Program Files (x86)\McAfee
%ProgramData%\McAfee\Common Framework
%AllUsersProfile%\McAfee\Common Framework
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\Trend Micro
%SystemDrive%\Program Files (x86)\Trend Micro
%AllUsersProfile%\Trend Micro
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\Microsoft Security Client
%SystemDrive%\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Security Client
%AllUsersProfile%\Microsoft Security Client
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\Sophos
%SystemDrive%\Program Files (x86)\Sophos
%AllUsersProfile%\Sophos
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\Kaspersky
%SystemDrive%\Program Files (x86)\Kaspersky

178

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
%AllUsersProfile%\Kaspersky
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\Kaspersky Lab
%SystemDrive%\Program Files (x86)\Kaspersky Lab
%AllUsersProfile%\Kaspersky Lab
%ProgramData%\Microsoft\Windows\Caches
%SystemDrive%\$Windows.~BT
%SystemRoot%\system32\.tmp
%SystemDrive%\Program Files\WindowsApps
%SystemRoot%\SystemApps
%SystemRoot%\InfusedApps
The following directories have Category 3 exclusions (including subfolders unless specified):
F#:\System Volume Information\MountPointManagerRemoteDatabase
F#:\.xen
%SystemRoot%\\.NLS.FON (coded – path queried from the registry
[HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet
\Control\Nls\CodePage] and [HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Nls\Language])
%APPDATA%\Roaming\Wave Systems Corp\DocMgr
%APPDATA%\Roaming\McAfee
%APPDATA%\Credant\.log
%APPDATA%\Dell\Dell Data Protection\.log
%APPDATA%\CmgAdmin.log
The following directories have Category 3 exclusions (no subfolders):
%SystemDrive%\AUTOEXEC.BAT
%SystemDrive%\BOOT.INI
%SystemDrive%\BOOTMGR
%SystemDrive%\BOOTNXT
%SystemDrive%\BOOTSECT.BAK
%SystemDrive%\CONFIG.SYS
%SystemDrive%\IO.SYS
%SystemDrive%\MSDOS.SYS
%SystemDrive%\NTDETECT.COM
%SystemDrive%\NTLDR
%SystemDrive%\install.log
%SystemDrive%\pagefile.sys

179

Manage Policies
%SystemDrive%\hiberfil.sys
%SystemDrive%\boot.bmp
%SystemDrive%\CMG3301d.DAT
%SystemDrive%\credsed.dat
%SystemDrive%\credsed.log
%SystemRoot%\bootstat.dat
%SystemDrive%\credsde.boo
%SystemRoot%\fonts\vgaoem.fon
%SystemRoot%\AppPatch\drvmain.sdb
%SystemRoot%\system32\config\.evt.ftl.regtrans-ms.blf
%SystemRoot%\system32\config\system
%SystemRoot%\system32\config\system.log
%SystemRoot%\system32\config\system.log1
%SystemRoot%\system32\config\system.log2
%SystemRoot%\system32\config\system.alt
%SystemRoot%\system32\config\system.sav
%SystemRoot%\system32\config\SYSTEM.CB1
%SystemRoot%\system32\config\SYSTEM.CB2
%SystemRoot%\system32\config\SYSTEM.CB3
%SystemRoot%\system32\config\SYSTEM.CBT
%SystemRoot%\system32\config\CREDSDE.BAD
%SystemRoot%\system32\winload.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\winresume.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\winlogon.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\autochk.exe
%SystemRoot%\system32\apisetschema.dll
%SystemRoot%\system32\catroot\*\windows-legacy-whql.cat
%SystemRoot%\WinSxS\*\drvmain.sdb
Notes
Protection of SystemRoot
The protection of the SystemRoot directory is specified so that only the root itself is protected, meaning
that the sub-directories of the SystemRoot do not inherit this protection. This would be the equivalent of
using the following policy:
-@C:\
Encryption External Media
180

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Encryption External Media operates off its own set of encryption rules independent of what Common
Encryption, User Encryption, or SDE uses. User/Common Encryption policies will only be applied to fixed
disks. If an endpoint is determined to be removable storage, then Encryption External Media policy will be
applied.
What Happens When Policies Tie

•

When an exclusion and inclusion statement both apply to a given directory or file, the exclusion
policy prevails.

•

If you apply a Common encryption policy and User encryption policy specifically to the same file or
location, the file or location will be Common Key encrypted.

•

If you apply a Common encryption policy and an SDE encryption policy specifically to the same file
or location, the file or location will be Common Key encrypted.

•

If you apply a user encryption policy and an SDE encryption policy specifically to the same file or
location, the file or location will be User Key encrypted.

See Sub-directories and Precedence of Directives for more information.
Generic Drive Statements
Instead of having to specify each drive in an inclusion or exclusion rule by its drive letter assignment, you
may use a generic rule to target either All Fixed Drives or all Removable Drives.
Fixed Drive Usage: Replace the drive letter with F#.
Example: F#:\ instead of C:\ or D:\
The Fixed Drive rule can only be used within a Common Encrypted Folder policy, User Encrypted
Folder policy, and/or SDE policy.
Removable Drive Usage: Replace the drive letter with R#.
Example: R#:\ instead of F:\ or H:\
The Removable Drive rule can only be used within an Encryption External Media Encryption Rules
policy.

Remove System Data Encryption (SDE)
To completely decrypt SDE encrypted files, apply the following policies:
SDE Encryption Enabled = Not Selected
Encrypt Windows Paging File = Not Selected
Secure Windows Credentials = Not Selected

Remove HCA-Based Encryption
To remove hardware-based encryption, issue a policy of Hardware Crypto Accelerator (HCA) = Off.

Authentication

Authentication
Authentication policies allow you to configure user experience and Windows authentication.

181

Manage Policies
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console.
Policy

Default Setting

Description

Pre-Boot Authentication
This technology provides a secure, tamper-proof environment by preventing data from being read from the
hard disk or operating system until the user enters the correct PBA login credentials. Pre-Boot
Authentication serves as an extension of the BIOS or boot firmware to provide a trusted authentication layer,
separate from the operating system.

Authentication Method

Support Information Text

Password

String
Please contact your system administrator.

Password
Smart Card
Select the type of authentication to use
when logging in to the PBA.
String 0-512 characters
Text to display on the PBA support
information screen. Customize the message
to include specific instructions about how to
contact the Help Desk or Security
Administrator. Not entering text in this field
results in no support contact information
being available for the user.
Text wrapping occurs at the word level, not
the character level. If a single word is more
than approximately 50 characters in length,
it will not wrap and no scroll bar will be
present, therefore the text will be
truncated.
The text in this policy is translatable.

PBA Title Text

0-17 characters

0-17 characters
The text to display on the top of the PBA
screen. Not entering text in this field results
in no title being displayed. Text does not
wrap, so entering more than 17 characters
results in the text being truncated.
The text in this policy is translatable.

Sync Users at PBA Activation

Not Selected

Select this option to sync all users of this
computer with the PBA database during PBA
activation.

See advanced settings

Windows Authentication
This technology sets definitions around user login, specifically what is required to login (password, smart
card, fingerprint), password recovery options, and password requirements (number of attempts allowed,
password length).
The possible VALUES are:
Windows Password
Logon Authentication Policy for
Administrators

Windows Password and None

None
Fingerprints
Contactless Card
One-Time Password
The possible VALUES are:

Logon Authentication Policy for Users

Windows Password and None

Windows Password
None
Fingerprints

182

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Contactless Card
One-Time Password
See advanced settings

Microsoft Passport
This technology allows the use of Microsoft Passport, specifically authentication attempts and PIN usage.
On
Off
Microsoft Passport

Off

Toggle to On to enable Microsoft Passport. If
this policy is toggled to Off, no Microsoft
Passport policies are enabled.
Microsoft Passport is supported only on
computers running Windows 10.
1-10 attempts

Maximum Windows Passport Authentication
Attempts

Logon Authentication Method

Number of chances the user has to
authenticate with correct credentials.
Currently, logon authentication method is
supported only with PIN.
4-127 numeric characters

PIN Length

Minimum number of characters required in
the PIN.

Advanced Authentication
Authentication policies allow you to configure user experience and Windows authentication.
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console.
Policy

Default Setting

Description

Authentication Method

183

Password

Password
Smart Card
Select the type of authentication to use
when logging in to the PBA.

Manage Policies

Support Information Text

String
Please contact your system administrator.

String 0-512 characters
Text to display on the PBA support
information screen. Customize the message
to include specific instructions about how to
contact the Help Desk or Security
Administrator. Not entering text in this field
results in no support contact information
being available for the user.
Text wrapping occurs at the word level, not
the character level. If a single word is more
than approximately 50 characters in length,
it will not wrap and no scroll bar will be
present, therefore the text will be
truncated.
The text in this policy is translatable.

PBA Title Text

0-17 characters

Sync Users at PBA Activation

Not Selected

Select this option to sync all users of this
computer with the PBA database during PBA
activation.

String 0-512 characters
Text to display before being allowed to log
on to the computer. For example: By clicking
OK, you agree to abide by the acceptable
computer use policy.
Legal Notice Text

String 0-512 characters

Not entering text in this field results in no
text, OK, or Cancel buttons being displayed.
Text wrapping occurs at the word level, not
the character level. If a single word is more
than approximately 50 characters in length,
it will not wrap and no scroll bar will be
present, therefore the text will be
truncated.
The text in this policy is translatable.

184

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Specify the questions that will be presented
to Windows users during recovery questions
setup. Separate each question by a carriage
return. These questions will be used if the
Windows password is forgotten. At least 3
questions must be specified.
What is the name of your first pet?
Who was your first employer?
Self Help Questions (Pre-8.0 clients)

At least 3 selectable questions

What was the first concert you attended?
What was the make of the first car you
owned?
What was the last name of your third grade
teacher?
In what city or town did your mother and
father meet?
In what city or town was your first job?
String 1-100 characters

Initial Access Code

String 1-100 characters

This policy is used to log on to a computer
when network access to the Dell Server and
Active Directory (AD) are both unavailable.
The Initial Access Code policy should only be
used if absolutely necessary, it is not the
recommended method to log in. Using the
Initial Access Code policy does not provide
the same level of security as the usual
authentication method of logging in using
User Name, Domain, and Password.
The Initial Access Code can only be used one
time, immediately after activation. The first
domain login that occurs after the Initial
Access Code is entered will be cached and
the Initial Access Code entry field will not be
displayed again.
9-32 characters with at least 1 number and 1
letter

Encryption Administrator Password

String

Computer-generated password used by the
Dell Server and client for recovery and other
internal processes. No end user or
Administrator interaction is required. All
values are automatically maintained in the
Dell Server and can never be deleted.
Entering a value for this policy does not
affect the Override Count.
Any number

Non-Cached User Login Attempts Allowed

Cached User Login Attempts Allowed

Self Help Question/Answer Attempts Allowed

This policy does not come into play when
connected to the network (there is a
connection to AD), because authentication
with AD is attempted.
This policy only comes into play when the
computer is not connected to the network
and an unknown user attempts to log in
(meaning, a user that has not logged in to
the computer before -- no credentials have
been cached).
1-20 times
Number of times that a cached user can
attempt to log in.
1-10 times

185

Number of times the user can attempt to
enter the correct answer.

Manage Policies

Enable One Step Logon

Selected

This policy simplifies the logon process when
multi-factor authentication is enabled at
both preboot and Windows logon. If selected
(or not configured), authentication is
required at preboot only, and users are
automatically logged on to Windows. If not
selected, authentication may be required
multiple times.
1-25 times

Number of Shutdown/Restart Delays Allowed

Number of times that a user is allowed to
snooze/delay a shutdown/restart before
being forced to shutdown/restart.
TPM requires a reboot.
SED requires a shutdown.
300-30000 seconds

Length of Each Shutdown/Restart Delay

300 seconds

Number of seconds between each time the
user is asked to shutdown/reboot.
TPM requires a reboot.
SED requires a shutdown.
60-1800 seconds

Length of Forced Shutdown/Restart Notice

60 seconds

When user has reached the maximum number
of authorized shutdown/restart
snoozes/delays, this policy sets the number
of seconds allowed before forcing a
shutdown/restart.
TPM requires a reboot.
SED requires a shutdown.
Selected
Not Selected

Allow PBA to Remember User Name

Selected

Enables or disables the ability for users to
select Remember Me on the PBA login
screen.
String 0-512 characters

Crypto Erase Password

String 0-100 characters

A word of code of up to 100 characters used
as a fail-safe security mechanism. Entering
this word or code in the user name or
password field during the PBA authentication
deletes the authentication tokens for all
users and locks the computer. Data is
cryptographically erased from the Windows
partition. Afterward, an administrator can
unlock the computer by issuing an Unlock
command.
Leave this field blank if you do not want a
crypto erase password available in case of
emergency.

Enable Client Check for PBA Commands

Not Selected

Select this option to sync all users of this
computer with the PBA database during PBA
activation.

See basic settings

186

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

The possible VALUES are:
Windows Password
In-session Authentication Policy for
Administrators

Windows Password and None

None
Fingerprints
Contactless Card
One-Time Password

The possible VALUES are:
Windows Password
In-session Authentication Policy for Users

Windows Password and None

None
Fingerprints
Contactless Card
One-Time Password
Specify the questions that will be presented
to Windows users during recovery questions
setup. Separate each question by a carriage
return. These questions will be used if the
Windows password is forgotten. At least 3
questions must be specified.
What is your mother's maiden name?
What was the name of the first school you
attended?
What is the name of your first pet?
What is your father's middle name?
What is your mother's middle name?
Who was your first employer?
Who was your first teacher?
What city were you born in?
What city was your mother born in?
What city was your father born in?

Recovery Questions for Windows
Authentication

At least 3 selectable questions

What was the first concert you attended?
Who is your favorite TV show character?
What was the name of your first stuffed
animal?
What was the make of the first car you
owned?
Where did you spend your honeymoon?
Where did you meet your spouse?
What is your oldest cousin's name?
What is your oldest niece's name?
What is your oldest nephew's name?
What is your youngest child's nickname?
What is your oldest child's nickname?
What was the last name of your third grade
teacher?
In what city or town did your mother and
father meet?
In what city or town was your first job?

Allow Recovery Questions

187

Not Selected

Selected
Not Selected
Set to Selected to allow users to use
recovery questions/answers to log on to

Manage Policies
Windows.

Errors
Audit
Details
Level of detail in Windows Event Logs.
Determines whether events such as
fingerprint registration and authentication
attempts are logged in the Windows Event
Log.
Log Events Level

Audit

Each higher level includes all previous levels.
Events are logged on the computer where
they occur. Normally, the Auditing level
provides sufficient detail, covering all logon,
authentication, fingerprint management, and
user management events. The Details levels
can fill the log file very quickly. Status
events provide information about the state
of several important systems on the
computer. They are logged on configurable
intervals and generally used when events are
remotely collected.
The False Accept Rate is the probability of
receiving a false acceptance decision when
comparing fingerprints scanned from
different fingers.
You can select one of the following FAR
values:
* Medium (1 in 10,000)
* Medium High (1 in 100,000)
* High (1 in 1,000,000)

False Accept Rate of Fingerprint

Medium High - 1 in 100,000

For example: if you select Medium High, on
average, one false acceptance will occur
when a fingerprint is compared against one
hundred thousand fingerprints scanned from
different fingers.
The higher the setting, the lower the chance
of receiving a false acceptance. However, at
the High setting, the system may reject
legitimate fingerprints.
NOTE: The FAR is set on a per verification
basis. When matching a fingerprint against
fingerprints of multiple users (identification),
the internally used FAR is automatically
adjusted to maintain the same effective FAR
as was selected for a single match.

Minimum Number of Fingerprints to Enroll

The minimum number of fingerprints
required to be enrolled.

Maximum Number of Fingerprints to Enroll

The maximum number of fingerprints
required to be enrolled.

Minimum Length of PIN

The minimum number of characters required
in the PIN.

Allow Users to Enroll Credentials

Selected

Set to Selected to allow users to enroll their
own credentials without administrator
involvement.

Allow Users to Modify Credentials

Selected

Set to Selected to allow users to modify their
own credentials that have been previously
set up or enrolled.

188

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

Values for reminders:
Disable Reminder
Reminder to Enroll Credentials (Admin)

In one day

At Next Logon
In One Day
In One Week
Every Two Hours

Reminder to Enroll Credentials Expiration
Date (Admin)

Now

The date (time is always 12 am) when
authentication policy is going into full effect.
Meaning, the client stops asking the local
admin to enroll credentials and forces them
to enroll before they can logon. The default
is “now”.
Values for reminders:
Disable Reminder

Reminder to Enroll Credentials (User)

In one day

At Next Logon
In One Day
In One Week
Every Two Hours

Reminder to Enroll Credentials Expiration
Date (User)

Action Upon Smart Card Removal

Now

Lock Workstation

The date (time is always 12 am) when
authentication policy is going into full effect.
Meaning, the client stops asking the user to
enroll credentials and forces them to enroll
before they can logon. The default is “now”.
No Action
Lock Workstation
Force Logoff
Disconnect if on a Remote Desktop session
The action that occurs when a smart card is
removed from the computer.
Selected
Not Selected
This policy is the "master policy" for all other
One-time Password policies.

Allow One-Time Password for Recovery

Not Selected

If this policy is Not Selected, the One-time
Passwords feature is disabled on the
endpoint. The user will not be able to use
OTP to unlock the account, regardless of
other OTP policy values.
If Selected, the One-time Password Recovery
feature is enabled and allows the user to use
a paired mobile device to generate
passwords for one-time use to unlock their
account, if the account password is lost.
6, 8, or 10 characters

One-Time Password Length

Maximum One-Time Password Authentication
Attempts

Require Password for Mobile Apps
See basic settings

189

Specifies the minimum One-time Password
length.
3-10

Selected

Number of times a One-time Password can be
entered into a device.
Set to Selected to require the One-time
Password generation application to be
password protected on the mobile device.

Manage Policies

Threat Prevention

Threat Prevention
Threat Prevention policies are available at the Enterprise, Endpoint Group, and Endpoint levels.
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console. In this table, master policies
are in bold font.
Policy

Default Setting

Description

Advanced Threat Prevention
This technology is powered by Cylance and protects your operating system by detecting and preventing
malware pre-execution. Advanced Threat Prevention uses artificial intelligence and predictive mathematical
models to quickly and accurately identify what is safe and what is a threat.

Advanced Threat Prevention

Off

On
Off
Toggle ON to enable Advanced Threat Prevention. If this
policy is toggled to OFF, Advanced Threat Prevention is
disabled, regardless of other policies.

File Actions

Selected
Not Selected
Unsafe Executable Auto
Quarantine with Executable
Control Enabled

Selected

If selected, Unsafe executable files are automatically
quarantined or blocked to prevent their execution.
Note: If you Auto Quarantine, it is highly recommended
that before deployment, you test Auto Quarantine only
on devices under a test policy in order to observe the
behavior and ensure that no business-critical applications
are blocked at execution.
Selected
Not Selected

Abnormal Executable Auto
Quarantine with Executable
Control Enabled

Selected

If selected, Abnormal executable files are automatically
quarantined or blocked to prevent their execution.
Note: If you Auto Quarantine, it is highly recommended
that before deployment, you test Auto Quarantine only
on devices under a test policy in order to observe the
behavior and ensure that no business-critical applications
are blocked at execution.

Memory Actions

Selected
Not Selected
This policy must be selected to use all other Memory
policies. If this policy is Not Selected, no Memory Action
policies are enforced, regardless of other policy values.
Memory Protection Enabled

Not Selected

NOTE: Before enabling Memory Protection, enable
Compatibility Mode, to ensure applications function
properly on the client computer. For instructions on how
to enable Compatibility Mode, see
Enable_Compatibility_Mode_for_Memory_Protection.htm.
Compatibility Mode does not apply to Mac clients.

See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

190

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

Threat Protection
This technology protects computers by identifying and taking action against threats of malware and
malicious activity involving files, folders, the registry, and processes.
On
Off
Threat Protection

Off

Toggle to ON to enable Threat Protection. If toggled to
OFF, no Threat Protection policies will be applied.
Threat Protection includes Malware Protection, Web
Protection, and Client Firewall.
Block Only
Report Only
Block and Report

Action on Malicious Activity for
Files and Folders

Block and Report

Prevents users from modifying or deleting Threat
Protection system files and folders and sets the action to
take upon attempt.
Block Only: Blocks activity but does not report to the
Server.
Report Only: Reports activity to the Server but does not
block activity.
Block and Report (default): Blocks and reports activity to
the Server.
Block Only
Report Only
Block and Report

Action on Malicious Activity for
Registry

Block and Report

Prevents users from modifying or deleting Threat
Protection registry keys and values and sets the action to
take upon attempt.
Block Only: Blocks activity but does not report to the
Server.
Report Only: Reports activity to the Server but does not
block activity.
Block and Report (default): Blocks and reports activity to
the Server.
Selected
Not Selected
This policy is the "master policy" for all other Exploit
Protection policies. If this policy is Not Selected, no
Exploit Protection policies are enforced, regardless of
other policy values.

Exploit Protection

Selected

A Selected value means that Exploit Protection is
enabled.
Exploit Protection monitors for application vulnerabilities
and keeps buffer overflow exploits from executing
arbitrary code on the computer.
This policy must be set to Selected to enable Exploit
Protection. If this policy is Not Selected, no Exploit
Prevention policies will be applied.
Selected
Not Selected

On-Access Protection

Selected

This policy is the "master policy" for all other On-Access
Protection policies. If this policy is Not Selected, no OnAccess Protection policies are enforced, regardless of
other policy values.
A Selected value means that On-Access Protection is
enabled.
This policy must be set to Selected to enable On-Access
Protection. If this policy is Not Selected, no On-Access
Protection policies will be applied.

191

Manage Policies
See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Web Protection
This technology protects computers by leveraging a web-based content ranking system to determine if a site
that a user is browsing is considered safe or not. This technology also grants the administrator the ability to
define what happens when an unsafe site is navigated to (allow, block, warn).

Off

Web Protection

On
Off
Toggle to ON to enable Web Protection. If toggled to
OFF, no Web Protection policies will be applied.
Block
Allow
Warn
Specifies the default action to apply to sites that have
not been verified.

Enforcement - Action to Apply to
Sites Not Verified

Allow

Enforcement - Enable File
Scanning for File Downloads

Selected

A Selected value scans all files (including .zip files)
before downloading. This option prevents users from
accessing a downloaded file until Threat Protection
marks the file as clean.
Downloaded files are sent to Threat Protection for
scanning. Threat Protection performs a Reputation
Service lookup on the file. If a downloaded file is
detected as a threat, Threat Protection takes action on
the file and alerts the user.
Selected
Not Selected

Enable Secure Search

Block Links to Risky Sites in
Search Results

Not Selected

A Selected value enables Secure Search, automatically
blocking malicious sites in search results based on safety
rating.
Selected
Not Selected
A Selected value prevents users from clicking links to
risky sites in search results.

See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Client Firewall
This technology protects computers by allowing administrators to determine which network traffic is
permitted to pass between end user computers and the network.
On
Off
Client Firewall

Off

Toggle to ON to enable Client Firewall. If toggled to OFF,
no Client Firewall Settings or Rules will be applied.
Client firewall is a stateful firewall.

192

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Protection Settings
This technology allows control over Threat Prevention settings such as display of threat event notifications
on the client computer and Web Protection and Client Firewall logging.

Suppress Popup Notifications

Minimum Popup Notification
Level

Not Selected

High

Selected
Not Selected
If Selected, no popup notifications of Advanced Threat
Prevention events display on the client computer.
High
Medium
Low
Severity level of events that result in popup notifications
that display on the client computer.
A setting of High allows only notifications of critical
events to display. A setting of Low displays all on-screen
notifications for all events. Listed below are individual
examples of events that fall into the severity levels:
High
1) Protection status has changed. (Protected means that
the Advanced Threat Prevention service is running and
protecting the computer and needs no user or
administrator interaction.)
2) A threat is detected and policy is not set to
automatically address the threat.
Medium
1) Execution Control blocked a process from starting
because it was detected as a threat.
2) A threat is detected that has an associated mitigation
(for example, the threat was manually quarantined), so
the process has been terminated.
3) A process was blocked or terminated due to a memory
violation.
4) A memory violation was detected and no automatic
mitigation policy is in effect for that violation type.
Low
1) A file that was identified as a threat has been added
to the Global Safe List or deleted from the file system.
2) A threat has been detected and automatically
quarantined.
3) A file has been identified as a threat but waived on
the computer.
4) The status of a current threat has changed (for
example, Threat to Quarantined, Quarantined to Waived,
or Waived to Quarantined).
String - File path

Log Files Location

:\ProgramData\DDP\Suite\Logs

Specifies the location for the log files.
The default location is
:\ProgramData\DDP\Suite\Logs.
Selected
Not Selected

Enable Activity Logging

Selected

This policy is the "master policy" for all other Threat
Protection logging policies. If this policy is Not Selected,
no Threat Protection logging takes place, regardless of
other policy values.
A Selected value enables Threat Protection logging.

Debug Logging for Web
Protection

193

Not Selected

Selected

Manage Policies
Not Selected
A Selected value enables verbose logging of Web
Protection activity.
Selected

Debug Logging for Client
Firewall

Not Selected

Not Selected
A Selected value enables verbose logging of Firewall
activity.

Advanced Threat Prevention
Threat Prevention policies are available at the Enterprise, Endpoint Group, and Endpoint levels.
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console. In this table, master policies
are in bold font.
Policy

Default Setting

Description

Advanced Threat
Prevention

Off

On
Off
Toggle ON to enable Advanced Threat Prevention. If this
policy is toggled to OFF, Advanced Threat Prevention is
disabled, regardless of other policies.

File Actions

Selected
Not Selected
Unsafe Executable
Auto Quarantine
With Executable
Control Enabled

Unsafe Executable
Auto Upload
Enabled

Selected

If selected, Unsafe executable files are automatically
quarantined or blocked to prevent their execution.
Note: If you Auto Quarantine, it is highly recommended that
before deployment, you test Auto Quarantine only on devices
under a test policy in order to observe the behavior and
ensure that no business-critical applications are blocked at
execution.
Selected
Not Selected

Selected

If selected, any detected Unsafe file is automatically
uploaded for a deeper analysis and additional details about
the file.
Selected
Not Selected

Abnormal
Executable Auto
Quarantine With
Executable Control
Enabled

Selected

If selected, Abnormal executable files are automatically
quarantined or blocked to prevent their execution.
Note: If you Auto Quarantine, it is highly recommended that
before deployment, you test Auto Quarantine only on devices
under a test policy in order to observe the behavior and
ensure that no business-critical applications are blocked at
execution.

194

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

Abnormal
Executable Auto
Upload Enabled

Allow Execution of
Files in Exclude
Folders

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

Not Selected

If selected, any detected Abnormal file is automatically
uploaded for a deeper analysis and additional details about
the file.
Selected
Not Selected
If selected, executable files are allowed to run, even if they
are in folders excluded in the Exclude Specific Folders policy.
Selected
Not Selected

Auto Delete

Days until Deleted

Not Selected

If selected, after the time period specified in the Days until
Deleted policy, files that are quarantined on an endpoint are
automatically deleted.
14-365 days
Number of days until files that are quarantined on an
endpoint are automatically deleted.

Memory Actions

Selected
Not Selected

Memory Protection
Enabled

This policy must be selected to use all other Memory policies.
If this policy is Not Selected, no Memory Action policies are
enforced, regardless of other policy values.
Not Selected

NOTE: Before enabling Memory Protection, enable
Compatibility Mode, to ensure applications function properly
on the client computer. For instructions on how to enable
Compatibility Mode, see Enable Compatibility Mode for
Memory Protection.
Compatibility Mode does not apply to Mac clients.

Enable Exclude
executable files

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

String

Exclude
executable files

195

\Windows\System32\CmgShieldService.exe
\Windows\System32\EMSService.exe
\Program Files\Dell\Dell Data Protection\Threat
Protection\DellAVAgent.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\cmdagent.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\FrmInst.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\macmnsvc.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\macompatsvc.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\maconfig.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\masvc.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\x86\FrmInst.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\x86\macompatsvc.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\x86\marepomirror.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\x86\McScanCheck.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\x86\McScript_InUse.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\x86\mctray_back.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\x86\Mue.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\x86\policyupgrade.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Agent\x86\UpdaterUI.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\ESConfigTool.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\MFEConsole.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\mfeesp.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\mfeProvisionModeUtility.exe

Allow specific process files to be excluded from Memory
Protection. This policy must be selected to use the Exclude
executable files policy.
String
Exclude specific process files from Memory Protection. This
allows the specified files to run or be installed on any device
on which this policy is enforced.
All exclusions added must be specified using the relative path
of that executable file (exclude the drive letter from the
path).
Correct (Windows): \Application\SubFolder\application.exe
Correct (Mac): /Users/application.app/executable
Incorrect: \Application\SubFolder\
Incorrect: C:\Application\SubFolder\application.exe

Manage Policies
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\PwdUninstall.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\RepairCache\CCUninst.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\RepairCache\McAfee_Common_x64.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\RepairCache\McAfee_Common_x64.msi
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\RepairCache\McAfee_Common_x86.msi
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\RepairCache\setupCC.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\aacinfo.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\cacheinfo.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\fwinfo.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\mfecanary.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\mfefire.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\mfehidin.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\mfemms.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\mfevtps.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\mmsinfo.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\vtpinfo.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\aacinfo.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\cacheinfo.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\fwinfo.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\mfecanary.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\mfefire.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\mfehidin.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\mfemms.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\mfevtps.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\mmsinfo.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\vtpinfo.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint
Security\Firewall\FWInstCheck.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint
Security\Firewall\FwWindowsFirewallHandler.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint
Security\Firewall\mfefw.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint
Security\Firewall\RepairCache\McAfee_Firewall_x64.msi
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint
Security\Firewall\RepairCache\McAfee_Firewall_x86.msi

196

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint
Security\Firewall\RepairCache\setupFW.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\McChHost.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\mfewc.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\mfewch.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\mfewcui.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\RepairCache\McAfee_Web_Control_x86.msi
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\RepairCache\setupWC.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\marepomirror.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\McScanCheck.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\McScript_InUse.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\mctray_back.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Mue.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\policyupgrade.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\UpdaterUI.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\MaComServer.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\MFEConsole.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\mfeProvisionModeUtility.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\RepairCache\CCUninst.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\aacinfo.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\cacheinfo.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\fwinfo.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\mfecanary.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\mfefire.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\mfehidin.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\mfemms.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\mfevtps.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\mmsinfo.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security
Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\Release\vtpinfo.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\aacinfo.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\cacheinfo.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\fwinfo.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\mfecanary.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\mfefire.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\mfehidin.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\mfemms.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\mfevtps.exe

197

Manage Policies
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\mmsinfo.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\VSCore_ENS_10.1\x64\vtpinfo.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\McChHost.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\mfewc.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\mfewch.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\mfewcui.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\RepairCache\McAfee_Web_Control_x64.msi
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\RepairCache\setupWC.exe
\Program Files (x86)\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Web
Control\x64\mfewch.exe
\Windows\System32\mfevtps.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint Security\Endpoint
Security Platform\LogDebugSetter.exe
\Program Files\McAfee\Endpoint
Security\MfeUpgradeTool.exe
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a stack pivot threat is
detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.
Exploitation: Stack
Pivot

Alert

Block - Block the process call if an application attempts to
call a memory violation process. The application that made
the call is allowed to continue to run.
Terminate - Block the process call if an application attempts
to call a memory violation process and terminate the
application that made the call.
Stack Pivot - The stack for a thread has been replaced with a
different stack. Generally the system will only allocate a
single stack for a thread. An attacker would use a different
stack to control execution in a way that is not blocked by
Data Execution Prevention (DEP).
The Stack Pivot exploitation affects Windows and macOS
operating systems.
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a stack protect threat is
detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.

Exploitation: Stack
Protect

Alert

Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.
Block - Block the process call if an application attempts to
call a memory violation process. The application that made
the call is allowed to continue to run.
Terminate - Block the process call if an application attempts
to call a memory violation process and terminate the
application that made the call.
Stack Protect - The memory protection of a thread's stack has
been modified to enable execution permission. Stack memory
should not be executable, so usually this means that an
attacker is preparing to run malicious code stored in stack

198

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
memory as part of an exploit, an attempt which would
otherwise be blocked by Data Execution Prevention (DEP).
The Stack Protect exploitation affects Windows and macOS
operating systems.

Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when an overwrite code threat is
detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Exploitation:
Overwrite Code

Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.
Alert

Block - Block the process call if an application attempts to
call a memory violation process. The application that made
the call is allowed to continue to run.
Terminate - Block the process call if an application attempts
to call a memory violation process and terminate the
application that made the call.
Overwrite Code - Code residing in a process's memory has
been modified using a technique that may indicate an
attempt to bypass Data Execution Prevention (DEP).
The Overwrite Code exploitation affects Windows operating
systems. This policy does not apply to Mac clients.
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a scanner memory search
threat is detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.

Exploitation:
Scanner Memory
Search

Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.
Alert

199

Manage Policies
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a malicious payload is
detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Exploitation:
Malicious Payload

Alert

Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.
Block - Block the process call if an application attempts to
call a memory violation process. The application that made
the call is allowed to continue to run.
Terminate - Block the process call if an application attempts
to call a memory violation process and terminate the
application that made the call.
Malicious Payload - A generic shellcode and payload detection
associated with exploitation has been detected.
The Malicious Payload exploitation affects Windows operating
systems. This policy does not apply to Mac clients.
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a remote memory allocation
threat is detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.

Process Injection:
Remote Allocation
of Memory

Alert

Block - Block the process call if an application attempts to
call a memory violation process. The application that made
the call is allowed to continue to run.
Terminate - Block the process call if an application attempts
to call a memory violation process and terminate the
application that made the call.
Remote Allocation of Memory - A process has allocated
memory in another process. Most allocations will only occur
within the same process. This generally indicates an attempt
to inject code or data into another process, which may be a
first step in reinforcing a malicious presence on a system.
The Remote Allocation of Memory process injection affects
Windows and macOS operating systems.
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a remote attempt to map
memory threat is detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.

Process Injection:
Remote Mapping
of Memory

Alert

200

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
thereby reinforce a malicious presence.
The Remote Mapping of Memory process injection affects
Windows and macOS operating systems.

Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a remote attempt to write to
memory threat is detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.
Process Injection:
Remote Write to
Memory

Alert

Block - Block the process call if an application attempts to
call a memory violation process. The application that made
the call is allowed to continue to run.
Terminate - Block the process call if an application attempts
to call a memory violation process and terminate the
application that made the call.
Remote Write to Memory - A process has modified memory in
another process. This is usually an attempt to store code or
data in previously allocated memory but it is possible that an
attacker is trying to overwrite existing memory in order to
divert execution for a malicious purpose.
The Remote Write to Memory process injection affects
Windows and macOS operating systems.
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a remote attempt to write a
portable executable to memory threat is detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.

Process Injection:
Remote Write PE
to Memory

Alert

201

Manage Policies
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a remote overwrite code
threat is detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.
Process Injection:
Remote Overwrite
Code

Alert

Block - Block the process call if an application attempts to
call a memory violation process. The application that made
the call is allowed to continue to run.
Terminate - Block the process call if an application attempts
to call a memory violation process and terminate the
application that made the call.
Remote Overwrite Code - A process has modified executable
memory in another process. Under normal conditions
executable memory will not be modified, especially by
another process. This usually indicates an attempt to divert
execution in another process.
The Remote Overwrite Code process injection affects
Windows operating systems. This policy does not apply to Mac
clients.
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a remote memory unmapping
threat is detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.

Process Injection:
Remote Unmap of
Memory

Alert

Block - Block the process call if an application attempts to
call a memory violation process. The application that made
the call is allowed to continue to run.
Terminate - Block the process call if an application attempts
to call a memory violation process and terminate the
application that made the call.
Remote Unmap of Memory - A process has removed a Windows
executable from the memory of another process. This may
indicate an intent to replace the executable image with a
modified copy for the purpose of diverting execution.
The Remote Unmap of Memory process injection affects
Windows operating systems. This policy does not apply to Mac
clients.
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a remote thread creation
threat is detected.

Process Injection:
Remote Thread
Creation

Alert

Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.
Block - Block the process call if an application attempts to
call a memory violation process. The application that made
the call is allowed to continue to run.
Terminate - Block the process call if an application attempts
to call a memory violation process and terminate the

202

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
application that made the call.
Remote Thread Creation - A process has created a new thread
in another process. A process's threads are usually only
created by that same process. This is generally used by an
attacker to activate a malicious presence that has been
injected into another process.
The Remote Thread Creation process injection affects
Windows and macOS operating systems.

Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a remote APC scheduled
threat is detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Process Injection:
Remote APC
Scheduled

Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.
Alert

Block - Block the process call if an application attempts to
call a memory violation process. The application that made
the call is allowed to continue to run.
Terminate - Block the process call if an application attempts
to call a memory violation process and terminate the
application that made the call.
Remote APC Scheduled - A process has diverted the execution
of another process's thread. This is generally used by an
attacker to activate a malicious presence that has been
injected into another process.
The Remote APC Scheduled process injection affects Windows
operating systems. This policy does not apply to Mac clients.
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a remote DYLD injection
threat is detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.

Process Injection:
Remote DYLD
Injection (Mac OS
X only)

Alert

Block - Block the process call if an application attempts to
call a memory violation process. The application that made
the call is allowed to continue to run.
Terminate - Block the process call if an application attempts
to call a memory violation process and terminate the
application that made the call.
DYLD Injection - An environment variable has been set that
will cause a shared library to be injected into a launched
process. Attacks can modify the plist of applications like
Safari or replace applications with bash scripts, that cause
their modules to be loaded automatically when an application
starts.
The DYLD Injection process injection affects macOS operating
systems. This policy does not apply to Windows clients.

203

Manage Policies
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when an LSASS read threat is
detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Escalation: LSASS
Read

Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.
Alert

Block - Block the process call if an application attempts to
call a memory violation process. The application that made
the call is allowed to continue to run.
Terminate - Block the process call if an application attempts
to call a memory violation process and terminate the
application that made the call.
LSASS Read - Memory belonging to the Windows Local Security
Authority process has been accessed in a manner that
indicates an attempt to obtain users' passwords.
The LSASS Read escalation affects Windows operating
systems. This policy does not apply to Mac clients.
Ignore
Alert
Block
Terminate
Specify the action to take when a zero byte allocation threat
is detected.
Ignore - No action is taken against identified memory
violations.
Alert - Record the violation and report the incident to the Dell
Server.

Escalation: Zero
Allocate

Alert

Execution Control

Prevent Service
Shutdown from
Device

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected

If selected, the Advanced Threat Prevention service is
protected from being shut down either manually or by another
process.
Selected
Not Selected

Kill Unsafe
Running Processes
and Sub-Processes

Not Selected

If selected, processes and sub-processes are quarantined and
terminated regardless of their state when a threat is detected
(exe or dll). Although a process or sub-process is terminated,
the command prompt window remains open.
If a file has been determined to be Safe and allowed to run
and then a threat model update occurs that results in the file
being identified as unsafe, the process is automatically
terminated. Dell recommends that you review threat model
updates before Selecting this policy. For more information,

204

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
see Threat Model Updates.

Background Threat
Detection

Run Once

Disabled
Run Recurring
Run Once
If set to Run Recurring or Run Once, a full-disk scan is run to
detect and analyze any dormant threats on the disk.
An update to the Threat Model triggers a full-disk scan.
Selected
Not Selected

Watch for New
Files

Set Maximum
Archive File Size
to Scan

If selected, any new or modified files are detected and
analyzed for dormant threats.
Selected

150 MB

Dell recommends enabling this policy. However, If Auto
Quarantine is enabled for all Unsafe or Abnormal files, all
malicious files will be blocked at execution. Therefore, it is
not necessary to enable this policy with Auto Quarantine
mode unless you prefer to quarantine a file as it is added to a
disk but before execution.
The default setting is 150 MB.
Specify the maximum size of archive (compressed) files,
including .jar files to be scanned. Because scanning
compressed files can negatively affect computer
performance, Dell recommends Quick-Scan - Scan Archives
and Full-Scan - Scan Archives to be run during off-work hours.

Protection Settings

Enable Exclude
Specific Folders
(includes
subfolders)

Selected
Not Selected
Selected

Allow specific folders to be excluded from Auto Quarantine
and Auto Upload. This policy must be Selected to use the
Exclude Specific Folders policy.
String
Folders specified in this policy are excluded from actions
performed based on Background Threat Detection and Watch
for New Files, when these policies are enabled. This exclusion
extends to subfolders of folders that are specified in this
policy.

Exclude Specific
Folders (includes
subfolders)

All exclusions must be specified using the Absolute path of
that executable file.
String

Windows requires an absolute path (requires a drive letter)
Mac requires an absolute path (macOS does not use a drive
letter)
Correct (Windows): C:\Program Files\Dell
Correct (Mac): /Mac\ HD/Users/Application\ Support/Dell
Incorrect: C:\Program Files\Dell\Executable.exe
Incorrect: \Program Files\Dell\
Spaces only must be escaped on Mac-based exclusions.

Application Control

205

Manage Policies
Selected
Not Selected
If Selected, specified devices are locked down, restricting any
changes. Only applications that exist on a device before the
lock-down are allowed to execute on that device. Any new
applications, as well as changes to the executables of existing
applications, are denied. The Advanced Threat Prevention
agent updater is also disabled.
Application
Control

Not Selected

Additionally, certain File Action, Memory Action, and
Execution Control policies are automatically set. These
policies may be changed after they are automatically set,
without disabling Application Control. See Policies Set by
Application Control for a list of policies that are automatically
set when the Application Control policy is Selected.
To exclude specific folders from lockdown, specify the folders
in the Application Control Allowed Folders policy.
IMPORTANT: Specify the following folder in the Application
Control Allowed Folders policy when running Data Guardian
Protected Office mode with this policy Selected:
C:\Users\\AppData\Local\assembly\tmp
This policy does not apply to Mac clients.
String

Application
Control Allowed
Folders

Specify folders to be excluded from Application Control
lockdown.
String

IMPORTANT: Specify the following folder in this policy when
running Data Guardian Protected Office mode with the
Application Control policy Selected:
C:\Users\\AppData\Local\assembly\tmp
Selected
Not Selected

Enable Change
Window

Not Selected

If selected, Application Control is temporarily disabled to
allow, edit, and run new applications or perform updates.
This includes updating the Advanced Threat Prevention agent.
After performing the necessary changes, deselect Enable
Change Window.
Note: Enable Change Window retains changes made to
Application Control. Deselecting Application Control and
resetting back to Selected resets Application Control to
default values.
This policy does not apply to Mac clients.

Script Control

Selected
Not Selected
Script Control

Not Selected

If Selected, Script Control protects devices by blocking
malicious scripts from running.
Note: Script Control is currently only available for PowerShell
and Active Scripts.
This policy does not apply to Mac clients.

Script Control
Mode

Active Script

Alert

Alert
Block
Alert monitors scripts running in the environment.
Recommended for initial deployment.
Block allows scripts to run only from specific folders. This
should be used only after testing in Alert mode.
This policy does not apply to Mac clients.

Alert

Alert
Block
Alert monitors Active Scripts running in the environment.
Recommended for initial deployment.
Block allows Active Scripts to run only from specific folders.
This should be used only after testing in Alert mode.
This policy does not apply to Mac clients.

206

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

Macros

PowerShell

PowerShell
Console

Alert

Alert
Block
Alert monitors Office macros running in the environment.
Recommended for initial deployment.
Block allows Office macros to run only from specific folders.
This should be used only after testing in Alert mode.
Note: Starting with Office 2013, macros are disabled by
default. Most of the time, users should not be required to
enable macros to view the content of an Office document.
Dell recommends enabling macros only for documents from
trusted users. Otherwise, macros should always be disabled.
This policy does not apply to Mac clients.

Alert

Alert
Block
Alert (default) - Monitors PowerShell scripts running in the
environment. Recommended for initial deployment.
Block - Allow PowerShell scripts to run only from specific
folders. This should be used only after testing in Alert mode.
This policy does not apply to Mac clients.

Allow

Allow
Block
Allow (default) - Allows the PowerShell v3 console to be
launched.
Block - Blocks the PowerShell v3 console from being launched.
Provides additional security by protecting against the use of
PowerShell one-liners.
Note: If this policy is set to Block and you use a script that
launches the PowerShell console, the script will fail. It is
recommended that users change their scripts to invoke the
PowerShell scripts, not the PowerShell console.
This policy applies only to PowerShell v3 and does not apply
to Mac clients.
Selected
Not Selected

Enable Approve
Scripts in Folders
(and Subfolders)

Not Selected

Allows scripts stored in specific folders to be automatically
approved to run. This policy must be selected in order to use
the policy, Script Control Approve Scripts in Folders (and
Subfolders).
This policy does not apply to Mac clients.
String
Folders specified in this policy are excluded from actions
performed based on the Script Control policy. This exclusion
extends to subfolders of folders that are specified with this
policy.

Approve Scripts in
Folders (and
Subfolders)

String

A folder must be specified using its relative path. A path may
not include the drive letter. Example: \Cases\ScriptsAllowed
A specified path may represent any of the following:
- local drive path
- mapped network drive path
- universal naming convention (UNC) path
This policy does not apply to Mac clients.
String

Quarantine

String

This policy is for Disconnected mode only, and allows for
modification of the math model to ensure that pre-defined
applications are handled in a specific way. This policy will
force quarantine files based on a SHA256 hash of the specific
portable executable.
String

Waive

207

String

Manage Policies
portable executable.

Disconnected Mode

String
Global Allow
(available only in
Disconnected
mode)

String

This policy will NOT be sent to the client if the Server does
not detect a Disconnected mode install token. The token is
prefixed with *DELLAG*.
The value of this policy must include the entire contents of
the policy.xml file. Copy and paste the contents of policy.xml
into the policy editor and shown in this example.
String

Quarantine
List (available only
in Disconnected
mode)

String

This policy will NOT be sent to the client if the Server does
not detect a Disconnected mode install token. The token is
prefixed with *DELLAG*.
The value of this policy includes a collection of hashes,
represented by these JSON examples.
String

Safe List (available
only in
Disconnected
mode)

String

Agent Settings

Suppress Popup
Notifications

Minimum Popup
Notification Level

Not Selected

High

Selected
Not Selected
If Selected, popup notifications for Advanced Threat
Prevention events do not display on the client computer.
High
Medium
Low
Severity level of events that result in popup notifications that
display on the client computer.
A setting of High allows only notifications of critical events to
display. A setting of Low displays all on-screen notifications
for all events. Listed below are examples of events that fall
into the severity levels:
High
1) Protection status has changed. (Protected means that the
Advanced Threat Prevention service is running and protecting
the computer and needs no user or administrator interaction.)
2) A threat is detected and policy is not set to automatically
address the threat.
Medium
1) Execution Control blocked a process from starting because
it was detected as a threat.
2) A threat is detected that has an associated mitigation (for
example, the threat was manually quarantined), so the
process has been terminated.
3) A process was blocked or terminated due to a memory
violation.
4) A memory violation was detected and no automatic
mitigation policy is in effect for that violation type.
Low
1) A file that was identified as a threat has been added to the
Global Safe List or deleted from the file system.
2) A threat has been detected and automatically quarantined.
3) A file has been identified as a threat but waived on the
computer.

208

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
4) The status of a current threat has changed (for example,
Threat to Quarantined, Quarantined to Waived, or Waived to
Quarantined).

Selected
Not Selected

Enable BIOS
Assurance

Selected

If selected, BIOS integrity checks are performed on end user
computers to validate that the BIOS has not been modified
from the Dell factory version. A custom factory image cannot
be used with this feature, as the BIOS has been modified. This
feature is available only on Dell platforms.
Platforms available with this feature include the newest
release of select XPS, Latitude, Optiplex, Precision
Workstations, and Venues. Speak to your Sales Associates for
details or contact Dell ProSupport.
This policy does not apply to Mac clients.

Enable Autoupload of Log Files

Not Selected

Selected
Not Selected
If selected, log files are automatically uploaded at 12:00 am
or when their size reaches 100 MB. If this policy is Not
Selected, logs can still be manually uploaded.

See basic settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Off

Toggle to ON to enable Threat Protection. If toggled to OFF,
no Threat Protection policies will be applied.
Threat Protection includes Malware Protection, Web
Protection, and Client Firewall.

209

Manage Policies
Block Only
Report Only
Block and Report
Action on
Malicious Activity
for Files and
Folders

Block and Report

Prevents users from modifying or deleting Threat Protection
system files and folders and sets the action to take upon
attempt.
Block Only: Blocks activity but does not report to the Server.
Report Only: Reports activity to the Server but does not block
activity.
Block and Report (default): Blocks and reports activity to the
Server.
Block Only
Report Only
Block and Report

Action on
Malicious Activity
for Registry

Block and Report

Action on
Malicious Activity
for Processes

Block and Report

Prevents users from stopping Threat Protection processes and
sets the action to take upon attempt.
Block Only: Blocks activity but does not report to the Server.
Report Only: Reports activity to the Server but does not block
activity.
Block and Report (default): Blocks and reports activity to the
Server.
String - Example: avtask.exe

Exclude Processes

String

Excludes specific process files from Threat Protection scans.
Enter the exact resource name of a process to exclude.

Client Update

Selected
Not Selected
Schedule

Selected

This policy is the "master policy" for all other Client
Scheduling policies. If this policy is Not Selected, no Client
Scheduling takes place, regardless of other policy values.
A Selected value enables the Client Scheduling options.
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
The schedule configuration defines when the task should run.
Schedule types are Daily, Weekly, and Monthly.

Schedule Repeats

Daily

Daily: Runs the task every day at the specified Schedule Start
Time.
Weekly: Runs the task weekly on the days specified in Day of
the Week.
Monthly: Runs the task monthly on the specified Day of the
Month.

Schedule Start
Time

String

String - format is [HH:mm tt]. Example: 11:59 PM
The time the task should run.

210

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

Day of the Week

Wednesday

Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday,
Saturday
The day of the week the task should run.
1-31

Day of the Month

Debug Logging for
Malware and
Exploit Protection

Not Selected

The day of the month the task should run.
Example: 17.
Selected
Not Selected
A Selected value enables debug logging of Malware and
Exploit Protection activity.
On
Off

Exploit Protection

Off

Toggle to ON to enable Exploit Protection. If toggled to OFF,
no Exploit Protection policies will be applied.
Exploit Protection protects the critical operating system
resources from changes made by malware or other
unauthorized processes.
On
Off

On-Access
Protection

Off

Toggle to ON to enable On-Access Protection. If toggled to
OFF, no On-Access Protection policies will be applied.
On-Access Protection protects the critical operating system
resources from changes made by malware or other
unauthorized processes at the time a resource is accessed.
10 to 9999

Max Seconds for
Scan

Specifies the maximum number of seconds for each file scan.
Limits each file scan to the specified number of seconds. If a
scan exceeds the time limit, the scan stops and logs a
message.

On-Access Scan

Selected
Not Selected
Scan Boot Sectors

Selected

Examines the disk boot sector. Consider disabling this policy if
a disk contains a unique or abnormal boot sector that cannot
be scanned.
Selected
Not Selected
Rescans all processes that are currently in memory each time:
- On-Access Scan is disabled and re-enabled.

Scan Processes on
Enable

Not Selected

- The computer starts.
When the on-access scanner is enabled, it always scans all
processes when they are executed.
Because some programs or executables start automatically
when the computer starts, enabling this option can slow the
computer and increase computer startup time.

Scan Trusted
Installers

Scan When
Copying Between
Local Folders

211

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected

Scans MSI files or Windows Trusted Installer service files.
Disable this option to improve the performance of large
Microsoft application installers.
Selected
Not Selected

Not Selected

Scans files whenever the user copies from one local folder to
another. If disabled, only items in the destination folder are
scanned. If enabled, items in both source and destination
folders are scanned.

Manage Policies
Disable
Very Low
Low
Medium
High
Very High
When enabled, samples are submitted to the lab to determine
if they are malware. Sensitivity level configures the sensitivity
level to use when determining if a detected sample is
malware.
The higher the sensitivity level, the higher the number of
malware detections. However, allowing more detections
might result in more false positive results.
Risk levels:
Very low - The detections and risk of false positives are the
same as with regular content files. A detection is made
available to Threat Protection when the lab publishes it
instead of waiting for the next file update. Use this setting for
desktops and servers with restricted user rights and a strong
security footprint. This setting results in an average of 10–15
queries per day, per computer.
Reputation Service
Sensitivity

Medium

Low - This setting is the minimum recommendation for
laptops or desktops and servers with a strong security
footprint. This setting results in an average of 10–15 queries
per day, per computer.
Medium - Use this level when the regular risk of exposure to
malware is greater than the risk of a false positive. The
proprietary, heuristic checks result in detections that are
likely to be malware. However, some detections might result
in a false positive. With this setting, the lab checks that
popular applications and operating system files do not result
in a false positive. This setting is the minimum
recommendation for laptops or desktops and servers. This
setting results in an average of 20–25 queries per day, per
computer.
High - Use this setting for deployment to systems or areas
which are regularly infected. This setting results in an average
of 20–25 queries per day, per computer.
Very high - Dell recommends using this level only for scanning
volumes and directories that do not support executing
programs or operating systems. Detections found with this
level are presumed malicious, but have not been fully tested
to determine if they are false positives. Use this setting for
on-demand scans on non-operating system volumes. This
setting results in an average of 20–25 queries per day, per
computer.
Selected
Not Selected
This policy is the "master policy" for all other On-Demand
Protection: Full Scan policies. If this policy is Not Selected, no
On-Demand Protection: Full Scan policies are enforced,
regardless of other policy values.
A Selected value means that On-Demand Protection: Full Scan
is enabled.

On-Demand
Protection - Full
Scan

Selected

This policy must be set to Selected to enable On-Demand
Protection: Full Scan settings. If this policy is Not Selected, no
On-Demand Protection: Full Scan policies will be applied.
By default, every time Full Scan runs, it scans the following
locations for threats:
- the computer memory for installed rootkits, hidden
processes, and other behavior that suggests malware is
attempting to hide itself. This scan occurs before all other
scans.
- the memory of all running processes.
- all drives and their subfolders on the computer.

212

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
By default, the scanner scans all file types, regardless of
extension.

Full Scan

Selected
Not Selected
Boot Sectors

Unwanted
Programs

Decode MIME Files

Selected

Examines the disk boot sector. Consider disabling this policy if
a disk contains a unique or abnormal boot sector that cannot
be scanned.
Selected
Not Selected

Selected

Not Selected

Enables the scanner to detect potentially unwanted programs.
The scanner uses configured information to detect potentially
unwanted programs.
Selected
Not Selected
Detects, decodes, and scans Multipurpose Internet Mail
Extensions (MIME) encoded files.
Selected
Not Selected

Scan Archives

Files Migrated to
Storage

Selected

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected

Program Threats

Selected

Macro Threats

Selected

Scan Subfolders

Selected

213

Examines the contents of archive (compressed) files, including
.jar files. Because scanning compressed files can negatively
affect computer performance, Dell recommends using this
option in scans during off-work hours.

Scans files that remote storage manages. When the scanner
encounters a file with migrated content, it restores the file to
the local computer before scanning.
Selected
Not Selected
Detects executable files that have code that resembles
malware.
Selected
Not Selected
Detects unknown macro viruses.
Selected
Not Selected
Examines all subfolders of the specified folder.

Manage Policies
Disable
Very Low
Low
Medium
High
Very High
When enabled, samples are submitted to the lab to determine
if they are malware. Sensitivity level configures the sensitivity
level to use when determining if a detected sample is
malware.
The higher the sensitivity level, the higher the number of
malware detections. However, allowing more detections
might result in more false positive results.
Risk levels:
Very low - The detections and risk of false positives are the
same as with regular content files. A detection is made
available to Threat Protection when the lab publishes it
instead of waiting for the next content file update. Use this
setting for desktops and servers with restricted user rights and
a strong security footprint. This setting results in an average
of 10–15 queries per day, per computer.
Reputation Service
Sensitivity

Medium

214

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
String - Comma-separated list of parameters
Specify files, folders, and drives to exclude from scanning.
Comma separated list of parameters:
,,
Possible values: ,,
Exclusions

String

Examples:
FileOrFolder,C:\Users,false
FileType,xml,false
FileType,mp?,false
ModifiedAge,120,true
AccessedAge,150,false
CreatedAge,300,true
Clean file
Delete file
Continue scanning
Specifies the first action for the scanner to take when a
threat is detected.

Threat First
Response

Clean file

Clean files - Removes the threat from the detected file, if
possible.
Delete files - Deletes files with potential threats.
Continue scanning - Continues scanning files when a threat is
detected. The scanner does not move items to the
quarantine.
Clean file
Delete file
Continue scanning
Specifies the action for the scanner to take when a threat is
detected if the first action fails.

Threat First
Response Fails

Delete file

Clean files - Removes the threat from the detected file, if
possible.
Delete files - Deletes files with potential threats.
Continue scanning - Continues scanning files when a threat is
detected. The scanner does not move items to the
quarantine.
Clean file
Delete file
Continue scanning
Specifies the first action for the scanner to take when a
potentially unwanted program is detected.

Exploit First
Response

Clean file

215

Manage Policies
Clean file
Delete file
Continue scanning
Specifies the action for the scanner to take when an
unwanted program is detected if the first action fails.
Exploit First
Response Fails

Delete file

Use Scan Cache

Selected

A Selected value enables the scanner to use the existing clean
scan results. A Selected value reduces duplicate scanning and
improves performance.
Low Priority
Below Normal
Normal
Enables the operating system to specify the amount of CPU
time that the scanner receives during the scan. Each task runs
independently, unaware of the limits for other tasks.

System Utilization

Below Normal

Low Priority - Provides improved performance for other
running applications. Select this option for computers with
end user activity.
Below Normal - Sets the computer utilization for the scan to
the default.
Normal - Enables the scan to complete faster. Select this
option for computers that have large volumes and little end
user activity.

Scan on Battery
Power

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected

A Selected value allows the scan when the computer is using
battery power. Not Selected postpones the scan until the
computer is no longer using battery power.
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
The schedule configuration defines when the task should run.
Schedule types are Daily, Weekly, and Monthly.

Schedule Repeats

Daily

Daily: Runs the task every day at the specified Full-Scan
Schedule Start Time.
Weekly: Runs the task weekly on the days specified in FullScan Schedule Day of the Week.
Monthly: Runs the task monthly on the specified Full-Scan
Schedule Day of the Month.

Schedule Start
Time

Day of the Week

String

Wednesday

String - format is [HH:mm tt]. Example: 11:59 PM
The time the task should run.
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday,
Saturday
The day of the week the task should run.
1-31

Day of the Month

The day of the month the task should run.
Example: 17.

Quick Scan

216

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Selected
Not Selected
This policy is the "master policy" for all other On-Demand
Protection: Quick Scan policies. If this policy is Not Selected,
no On-Demand Protection: Quick Scan policies are enforced,
regardless of other policy values.
A Selected value means that On-Demand Protection: Quick
Scan is enabled.
On-Demand
Protection - Quick
Scan

Selected

This policy must be set to Selected to enable On-Demand
Protection: Quick Scan settings. If this policy is Not Selected,
no On-Demand Protection: Quick Scan policies will be applied.
By default, every time Quick Scan runs, it scans the following
locations for threats:
- the memory of all running processes
- the files that the Windows Registry references
- the contents of the Windows folder
- the contents of the Temp folder
By default, the scanner scans all file types, regardless of
extension.
Selected
Not Selected

Boot Sectors

Unwanted
Programs

Decode MIME Files

Selected

Examines the disk boot sector. Consider disabling this policy if
a disk contains a unique or abnormal boot sector that cannot
be scanned.
Selected
Not Selected

Selected

Not Selected

Scan Archives

Files Migrated to
Storage

Selected

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected

Program Threats

Selected

Macro Threats

Selected

Scan Subfolders

Selected

217

Manage Policies
Disable
Very Low
Low
Medium
High
Very High
When enabled, samples are submitted to the lab to determine
if they are malware. Sensitivity level configures the sensitivity
level to use when determining if a detected sample is
malware.
The higher the sensitivity level, the higher the number of
malware detections. However, allowing more detections
might result in more false positive results.
Risk levels:
Very low - The detections and risk of false positives are the
same as with regular content files. A detection is made
available to Threat Protection when the lab publishes it
instead of waiting for the next content file update. Use this
setting for desktops and servers with restricted user rights and
a strong security footprint. This setting results in an average
of 10–15 queries per day, per computer.
Reputation Service
Sensitivity

Medium

218

String

Threat First
Response

Clean file

Threat First
Response Fails

Delete file

Clean files - Removes the threat from the detected file, if
possible.
Delete files - Deletes files with potential threats.
Continue scanning - Continues scanning files when a threat is
detected. The scanner does not move items to the
quarantine.
Clean file
Delete file
Continue scanning
Specifies the first action for the scanner to take when a
potential exploit is detected.

Exploit First
Response

Clean file

219

Manage Policies
Clean file
Delete file
Continue scanning
Specifies the action for the scanner to take when an exploit is
detected if the first action fails.
Exploit First
Response Fails

Delete file

Use Scan Cache

Selected

System Utilization

Below Normal

Scan on Battery
Power

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected

Schedule Repeats

Daily

Daily: Runs the task every day at the specified Quick-Scan
Schedule Start Time.
Weekly: Runs the task weekly on the days specified in QuickScan Schedule Day of the Week.
Monthly: Runs the task monthly on the specified Quick-Scan
Schedule Day of the Month.

Schedule Start
Time

Day of the Week

String

Wednesday

String - format is [HH:mm tt]. Example: 11:59 PM
The time the task should run.
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday,
Saturday
The day of the week the task should run.
1-31

Day of the Month

The day of the month the task should run.
Example: 17.

220

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Selected
Not Selected
Selected

Access Protection

Access Protection prevents other computers from making a
connection and creating or altering autorun (autorun.inf) files
from CDs. The rule prevents spyware and adware distributed
on CDs from being executed and will automatically block and
report the issue.
Selected
Not Selected

Script Scan
Protection

Selected

This policy enables scanning JavaScript and VBScript scripts to
prevent unwanted scripts from executing.
Note: If Script Scan Protection is disabled when Internet
Explorer is launched, and then is enabled, it doesn't detect
malicious scripts in that instance of Internet Explorer.

Source Sites for
Update

Hyperlink

To modify the source sites your clients access for Malware
Protection signature updates, click the Source Sites for
Updates link. To modify the priority level or availability of an
external source site, click either NAIHttp or NAIFtp, edit the
necessary fields, and click OK.
To designate an internal signature update server, see
Designate a Threat Protection Signature Update Server.
Designating a signature update server within your network
allows client computers to obtain signature updates without
accessing the Internet.

See basic settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Web Protection

Off

On
Off
Toggle to ON to enable Web Protection. If toggled to OFF, no
Web Protection policies will be applied.
Block
Allow
Warn

Enforcement Action to Apply to
Sites Not Verified

Specifies the default action to apply to sites that have not
been verified.
Allow

Enforcement Enable File
Scanning for File
Downloads

Selected

A Selected value scans all files (including .zip files) before
downloading. This option prevents users from accessing a
downloaded file until Threat Protection marks the file as
clean.
Downloaded files are sent to Threat Protection for scanning.
Threat Protection performs a Reputation Service lookup on
the file. If a downloaded file is detected as a threat, Threat
Protection takes action on the file and alerts the user.
NOTE: This policy does not apply when Web Protection is
installed as an optional feature with Advanced Threat

221

Manage Policies
Prevention.

Enforcement Enable HTML
iFrames Support
Enforcement Block Sites by
Default if
Reputation Service
Server is not
Reachable
Enforcement Block Phishing
Pages for All Sites

Enforcement Specify Reputation
Service Risk Level
to Block

Selected

Selected
Not Selected
A Selected value blocks access to malicious (Red) and warn
(Yellow) sites that appear in an HTML iframe.
Selected
Not Selected

Not Selected

Selected

Very High

A Selected value blocks access to websites if Web Control
cannot reach the Reputation Service server.
Selected
Not Selected
A Selected value blocks all phishing pages, overriding content
rating actions.
Disable
Very Low
Low
Medium
High
Very High
Specifies the Reputation Service risk level to block when the
Threat Protection on-demand scan feature is not installed and
enabled. Web Protection uses the risk level to calculate the
score when retrieving the checksum reputation from the
Reputation Service.
String - IP or IP Range

IP Exclusions for
Web Protection

String

Configures Web Protection not to rate or act on the specified
private IP address range. The format is the IP address or IP
address range.
Selected
Not Selected

Enable Secure
Search

Set Default Search
Engine

Block Links to
Risky Sites in
Search Results

Not Selected

Google

A Selected value enables Secure Search, automatically
blocking malicious sites in search results based on safety
rating.
Google
Yahoo
Bing
Ask
Specifies the default search engine to use for supported
browsers: Google, Yahoo, Bing, Ask.

Not Selected

Selected
Not Selected
A Selected value prevents users from clicking links to risky
sites in search results.

222

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Block
Allow
Warn
Specifies the action to apply to sites that are rated Red.
Rating Action for
Red Sites

Block

Block: Prevents users from accessing the site and displays a
message that the site is blocked. Block is the default for Red
sites.
Allow: Permits users to access the site.
Warn: Displays a warning to notify users of potential dangers
associated with the site. Users must dismiss the warning
before canceling or proceeding to the site.
Green-rated sites and downloads are automatically allowed.
Block
Allow
Warn
Specifies the action to apply to sites that are rated Yellow.

Rating Action for
Yellow Sites

Warn

Block: Prevents users from accessing the site and displays a
message that the site is blocked.
Allow: Permits users to access the site.
Warn: Displays a warning to notify users of potential dangers
associated with the site. Users must dismiss the warning
before canceling or proceeding to the site. Warn is the
default for Yellow sites.
Green-rated sites and downloads are automatically allowed.
Block
Allow
Warn
Specifies the action to apply to sites that are Unrated.

Rating Action for
Unrated Sites

Allow

Block: Prevents users from accessing the site and displays a
message that the site is blocked.
Allow: Permits users to access the site. Allow is the default
for Unrated sites.
Warn: Displays a warning to notify users of potential dangers
associated with the site. Users must dismiss the warning
before canceling or proceeding to the site.
Green-rated sites and downloads are automatically allowed.
Block
Allow
Warn
Specifies the action to apply to file downloads that are rated
Red.

Rating Action for
Red Downloads

Block

Block: Prevents users from downloading the file and displays
a message that the download is blocked. Block is the default
for Red downloads.
Allow: Permits users to proceed with the download.
Warn: Displays a warning to notify users of potential dangers
associated with the download file. Users must dismiss the
warning before ending or proceeding with the download.
Block
Allow
Warn

Rating Action for
Yellow Downloads

Specifies the action to apply to file downloads that are rated
Yellow.
Warn

Block: Prevents users from downloading the file and displays
a message that the download is blocked.
Allow: Permits users to proceed with the download.
Warn: Displays a warning to notify users of potential dangers
associated with the download file. Users must dismiss the
warning before ending or proceeding with the download. Warn

223

Manage Policies
is the default for Yellow sites.

Block
Allow
Warn
Specifies the action to apply to file downloads that are
Unrated.
Rating Action for
Unrated
Downloads

Allow

Block: Prevents users from downloading the file and displays
a message that the download is blocked.
Allow: Permits users to proceed with the download. Allow is
the default for Unrated downloads.
Warn: Displays a warning to notify users of potential dangers
associated with the download file. Users must dismiss the
warning before ending or proceeding with the download.

Web Event Logging

Log Web Control
iFrame Events

Log Web
Categories Green
Rated Sites

Not Selected

Selected
Not Selected
When this policy is selected, blocked Red (malicious) and
Yellow (warn) sites that display in an HTML iFrame are logged.
Selected
Not Selected

Not Selected

When this policy is selected, content categories are logged for
all green-rated sites. Selecting this policy may affect Server
performance.
Selected
Not Selected
When this policy is selected, web sites can be blocked based
on category.
Web Categories that can be blocked
When this policy is selected, the following categories can be
blocked. Check the box next to a category to block that
category. Categories indicated with * are selected and
blocked by default when this policy is selected.
Art/Culture/Heritage
Alcohol

Enable Web
Category Blocking

Anonymizers
Not Selected

Anonymizing Utilities
Business
Chat
Public Information
Potential Criminal Activities
Drugs
Education/Reference
Entertainment
Extreme
Finance/Banking
Gambling

224

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Games
Government/Military
Potential Hacking/Computer Crime*
Health
Humor/Comics
Discrimination
Instant Messaging
Stock Trading
Internet Radio/TV
Job Search
Information Security
Dating/Social Networking
Mobile Phone
Media Downloads
Malicious Sites*
Usenet News
Nudity
Non-Profit/Advocacy/NGO
General News
Online Shopping
Provocative Attire
P2P/File Sharing
Politics/Opinion
Personal Pages
Portal Sites
Remote Access
Religion/Ideology
Resource Sharing
Search Engines
Sports
Streaming Media
Shareware/Freeware
Pornography*
Spyware/Adware/Keyloggers*
Tobacco
Travel
Violence
Web Ads
Weapons
Web Mail
Web Phone
Auctions/Classifieds
Forum/Bulletin Boards
Profanity
School Cheating Information
Sexual Materials
Gruesome Content
Visual Search Engine
Technical/Business Forums
Gambling Related

225

Manage Policies
Messaging
Game/Cartoon Violence
Phishing*
Personal Network Storage
Spam URLs
Interactive Web
Fashion/Beauty
Software/Hardware
Potential Illegal Software
Content Server
Internet Services
Media Sharing
Incidental Nudity
Marketing/Merchandising
Parked Domain
Pharmacy
Restaurants
Real Estate
Recreation/Hobbies
Blogs/Wiki
Digital Postcards
Historical Revisionism
Technical Information
Dating/Personals
Motor Vehicles
Professional Networking
Social Networking
Text Translators
Web Meetings
For Kids
History
Moderated
Text/Spoken Only
Controversial Opinions
Residential IP Addresses
Browser Exploits*
Consumer Protection
Illegal UK
Major Global Religions
Malicious Downloads*
Potentially Unwanted Programs
See basic settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Client Firewall
This technology protects computers by allowing administrators to determine which network traffic is
permitted to pass between end user computers and the network.

226

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
On
Off
Client Firewall

Toggle to ON to enable Client Firewall. If toggled to OFF, no
Client Firewall Settings or Rules will be applied.

Off

Client firewall is a stateful firewall.
See Client Firewall Settings and Rules.

Settings and Rules
See basic settings

Client Firewall Settings and Rules
In the Client Firewall policy, Settings and Rules, click View/Edit.
In the Settings window, you can set Client Firewall Options and Client Firewall Rules.
Return to Client Firewall Policies
Client Firewall Options
Setting

UI Control

Description

Protection Options
Allow traffic for unsupported protocols

Check box

Allow only outgoing traffic until firewall
services have started

Check box

Allows all traffic that uses unsupported
protocols. When disabled, all traffic using
unsupported protocols is blocked.
Allows outgoing traffic but no incoming
traffic until the Firewall service starts.
If this option disabled, Firewall allows all
traffic before services are started.
Allows traffic with a local MAC address.

Check box

Allow bridged traffic

Enable IP spoof protection

Enable firewall intrusion alerts

Setting

The MAC address is an address in the list of
VMs that Firewall supports, not the local
system's MAC address. Use this option to
allow traffic through a bridged environment
with virtual machines.

Check box

Blocks network traffic from non-local host IP
addresses or from local processes that
attempt to spoof their IP address.

Check box

Displays alerts automatically when Firewall
detects a potential attack.

Description

UI Control

Tuning Options
Enable Adaptive mode

Check box

Creates rules automatically to allow traffic.
NOTE: Enable this option temporarily while
tuning a deployment.

Log all blocked traffic to client activity log

Check box

Enabled by default
Logs all blocked traffic to the Firewall event
log (FirewallEventMonitor.log) on the
Endpoint Security Client.

227

Manage Policies

Log all allowed traffic to client activity log

Check box

Disabled by default
Logs all allowed traffic to the Firewall event
log (FirewallEventMonitor.log) on the
Endpoint Security Client.
NOTE: Enabling this option might negatively
impact performance.

Setting

Description

UI Control

Network Reputation
High Risk
Unverified
Do not block
Medium Risk
Specifies the rating threshold for blocking
incoming or outgoing traffic from a network
connection.
High Risk - This source/destination sends or
hosts potentially malicious content/traffic
that is considered risky.
Incoming network - reputation threshold

Drop-down menu

Unverified - This site appears to be a
legitimate source or destination of
content/traffic, but also displays properties
suggesting that further inspection is
necessary.
Do not block - This site is a legitimate source
or destination of content/traffic.
Medium Risk - This source/destination shows
behavior that is considered suspicious. Any
content/traffic from the site requires special
scrutiny.
High Risk
Unverified
Do not block
Medium Risk
Specifies the rating threshold for blocking
incoming or outgoing traffic from a network
connection.
High Risk - This source/destination sends or
hosts potentially malicious content/traffic
that is considered risky.

Outgoing network - reputation threshold

Drop-down menu

Setting

Description

UI Control

Stateful Firewall
Number of seconds (1-240) before TCP
connections time out

Up/down number selector

Specifies the time, in seconds, that an
unestablished TCP connection remains active
if no more packets matching the connection
are sent or received. The default number is

228

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
60; the valid range is 1–240.

Number of seconds (1-300) before UDP and
ICMP echo virtual connections time out

Setting

Up/down number selector

Specifies the time, in seconds, that a UDP or
ICMP Echo virtual connection remains active
if no more packets matching the connection
are sent or received. This option resets to its
configured value every time a packet that
matches the virtual connection is sent or
received. The default number is 60; the valid
range is 1–300.

Description

UI Control

DNS Blocking
Defines domain names to block.
When applied, this setting adds a rule near
the top of the firewall rules that blocks
connections to the IP addresses resolving to
the domain names.

Domain name

Button/text input field

Add - To add a domain name to block, click
Add, then enter a domain name. You can use
the * and ? wildcards. For example,
*domain.com. Separate multiple domains
with a comma (,) or a carriage return.
Duplicate entries are automatically removed.
Delete - To remove a domain name from the
blocked list, select the domain name and
click Delete.

Return to top

Client Firewall Rules
Client Firewall applies the rule at the top of the firewall rules list.
1.

Client Firewall applies the rule at the top of the firewall rules list. If the traffic meets this rule’s
conditions, Client Firewall allows or blocks the traffic. It doesn't try to apply any other rules in the
list.

If the traffic doesn't meet the first rule’s conditions, Client Firewall continues to the next rule in the
list until it finds a rule that the traffic matches.

If no rule matches, the firewall automatically blocks the traffic.

To modify Core Networking or Default Rules, expand either Core Networking Rules or Default Rules, select
the rule to modify, and edit the desired settings, and click OK. The settings are described in the table
below.
Alternatively, click one of the following buttons to perform the desired action:
Add Rule - Adds a firewall rule.
Duplicate - Creates a copy of the selected item.
Delete - Removes a selected firewall item.
Setting

229

UI Control

Description

Manage Policies

Description
Name

Text input field

Specifies the descriptive name of the item.

Status

Check box

Select Enable rule to make the rule active.
Allow
Block
Treat match as intrusion
Log matching traffic
Allow - Allows traffic through the firewall if
the item is matched.

Actions

Radio button/Check box

Block - Stops traffic from passing through the
firewall if the item is matched.
Treat match as intrusion - Treats traffic that
matches the rule as an attack and generates
an event that is sent to the Reputation
Service. The Block action for the rule must
be selected for an event to be generated.
Log matching traffic - Preserves a record of
matching traffic in the Firewall activity log
on the Endpoint Security Client.
In
Out
Either

Drop-down menu

Direction

In - Monitors incoming traffic.
Out - Monitors outgoing traffic.
Either - Monitors both incoming and outgoing
traffic.

Text input field

Notes

Setting

UI Control

Provides more information about the rule.

Description

Networks
Any protocol
IP protocol
Non-IP protocol

Network protocol

Radio Button/Check box

Any protocol - Allows both IP and non-IP
protocols.
IP protocol - Excludes non-IP protocols. IPv4
protocol or IPv6 protocol. If neither check
box is selected, any IP protocol applies. Both
IPv4 and IPv6 can be selected.
Non-IP protocol - Includes non-IP protocols
only.
Wired
Wireless
Virtual

Connection types

Check box

Indicates if one or all connection types
apply.
A Virtual connection type is an adapter
presented by a VPN or a virtual machine
application, such as VMware, rather than a
physical adapter.

230

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
To add a network, click Add, then specify
the following:
Name - Specifies the network address name
(required).
Type - Select either Local Network or
Remote Network.
Specify Networks

Button/Drop-down menu/text input field

Click Add, then specify the following:
Network type - Specifies the origin or
destination of traffic. Select from the
network types Single IP, Subnet, Local
subnet, Range, or Fully qualified domain
name
IP address - Specifies the IP address to add
to the network. Wildcards are valid.

Transport
Select the transport protocol from the dropdown menu.

Transport protocol

Drop-down menu

Executables
The name that you use for the executable to
add or edit.

Name

String

The file path to the executable.

File path

String

Description of the executable.

File description

231

String

Manage Policies
The MD5 hash of the process.

Fingerprint

String

Enables or disables the digital signature
check that guarantees code hasn't been
altered or corrupted since it was signed with
a cryptographic hash.
Enable digital signature check

Check box

If enabled, specify:
Allow any signature — Allows files signed by
any process signer.
Signed by — Allows only files signed by the
specified process signer.

Return to top
Return to Client Firewall Policies

Policies Set by Application Control
The following policies are set when Advanced Threat Prevention > Application Control is selected.
Policy

Setting When Application Control policy is Selected

Unsafe Executable Auto Quarantine With Executable Control
Enabled

Selected

Abnormal Executable Auto Quarantine With Executable Control
Enabled

Selected

Memory Protection Enabled

Selected

Exploitation: Stack Pivot

Terminate

Exploitation: Stack Protect

Terminate

Exploitation: Overwrite Code

Terminate

Exploitation: Scanner Memory Search

Terminate

Exploitation: Malicious Payload

Terminate

Process Injection: Remote Allocation of Memory

Terminate

Process Injection: Remote Mapping of Memory

Terminate

Process Injection: Remote Write to Memory

Terminate

Process Injection: Remote Write PE to Memory

Terminate

Process Injection: Remote Overwrite Code

Terminate

Process Injection: Remote Unmap of Memory

Terminate

Process Injection: Remote Thread Creation

Terminate

Process Injection: Remote APC Scheduled

Terminate

232

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Process Injection: Remote DYLD Injection (Mac OS X only)

Terminate

Escalation: LSASS Read

Terminate

Escalation: Zero Allocate

Terminate

Watch for New Files

Selected

Advanced Threat Events tab fields and filters
The Advanced Threat Events tab displays information about events for the entire enterprise based on
information available in the Dell Server.
The tab displays if the Advanced Threat Prevention service is provisioned and licenses are available.
To access the Enterprise Advanced Threats tab, follow these steps:
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Enterprise.

Select the Advanced Threat Events tab.

Use the following filters to select content to display on the Advanced Threat Events tab:
Type - Threat Found, Threat Blocked, Threat Terminated, Memory Violation Blocked, Memory Violation
Terminated, Memory Violation (Detected), Threat Removed, Threat Quarantined, Threat Waived, Threat
Changed, Protection Status Changed.
Severity - Severity level of the event: Critical, Major, Minor, Warning, or Informational.
Timeframe (in days) - 1, 7, 14, 30, 60, 90
Columns - Allows you to select the following additional columns to display:
Host Name - The fully qualified name of the computer
Data - Details about the event
Created - Date and time that the event was captured
Machine Name - Name of the computer on which the threat event was detected
Path - Path to the file in which the threat was detected
Sha256 - The file's 256-character Secure Hash Algorithm can be compared with an expected result to
indicate whether the file has been tampered with.
Score - The threat file's score, indicating the confidence level that the file is malware. The higher the
number, the greater the confidence.

Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Protection
The Protection tab provides information about files and scripts that are potentially harmful.
Threats
The table lists all events found across the organization. An event may also be a threat but is not necessarily
so.
View additional information about a specific threat either by clicking on the threat name link to view details
displayed on a new page or by clicking anywhere in the row of the threat to view details at the bottom of
the page.

233

Manage Policies
To view additional threat information in the table, click the drop-down arrow on a column header to select
and add columns. Columns display metadata about the file, such as Classifications, Cylance Score
(confidence level), AV Industry conviction (links to VirusTotal.com for comparison with other vendors), Date
first found, Data last found, SHA256, MD5, File information (author, description, version), and Signature
details.
Filter Events Table Data
Click the Threat Filters dropdown list at the upper right side of the table to view data about events
by Priority, Status: Last 24 Hours, and Status: Total.
The number of events occurring in each subcategory are shown in parentheses.
Priority: Unsafe - Select a priority to view only events that match the selected priority. High,
Medium, or Low.
Status: Last 24 Hours - Select a status to view only events that have had changes to this status in the
last 24 hours.
Status: Total - Select a status to only events with that status.
The predictive threat model used to protect devices receives periodic updates to improve detection rates.
To understand differences in how a new threat model affects information about files in your organization,
see Threat Model Updates.
Commands
Select a threat to act on it. On this page, you can do the following to the selected threat data:
Export - Export threat data to a CSV file.
Select the rows you want to export, and then click Export.
Open the file with Microsoft Excel or similar application, which allows you to sort and organize the
data.
Global Quarantine - Add a file to the global quarantine list. The threat is permanently quarantined
from all devices.
Add the selected file to the Global Quarantine list to prevent it from being run on any device in the
organization. Adding a file to Quarantine removes it from lists of Unsafe files.
1.

Select a threat.

Click Global Quarantine.

Enter a reason that this file should be global quarantined and click Yes.
Safe - Add a file to the safe list. The file is permanently treated as safe across all devices.
1.

Select the file you want to list as safe.

Click Safe.

Select the category that fits the file.

Enter a reason why the file should be listed as safe, and click Yes.
Note: Occasionally, a “good” file may be reported as unsafe (this could happen if the
features of that file strongly resemble those of malicious files). Waiving or safelisting the
file can be useful in these instances.

Edit Global List - Add or remove files from the global quarantine list.
1.

Click Edit Global List.
234

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
2.

Select the items you want to change.

Select Safe to add the selected items to the safelist, or select Remove from list to remove
the selected files from the Global Quarantine list.

Manually Add File to the Global Quarantine list
1.

Click Edit Global List.

Click Add File.

Enter the file's SHA256 hash number. (required)

Enter the file's MD5 number, if available.

Enter the file name, if available.

Enter the reason the file should be quarantined.

Click Submit.

View Threat Details - Click a threat name to display details of the threat details on a new page. Click
anywhere in the threat’s row to display the same threat details on the left side of this page, under
the table.
File Details
Details: [file name]
At the bottom of the page, this section displays details about the file that triggered an event. To display this
information, select the row that displays the file name in the Advanced Events table.
Click the filename next to Details: to display the same information about the event on a new web page.
Overview
The overview box contains summary information about the file.
Threat Indicators
Threat Indicators are observations about a file that has been analyzed.
These indicators help administrators understand the reason for a file’s classification and provide insight into
its attributes and behavior. Threat Indicators are grouped into categories.
Devices
In the Devices pane, the administrator can view a list of devices that have unsafe or abnormal files and
quarantine or waive them.
The device list can be filtered by file state: Unsafe, Quarantined, Waived, or Abnormal.
Waiving a file will allow that file to run on the device.
Detailed Threat Data
If the file has been uploaded for analysis, the Detailed Threat Data pane may display a comprehensive
summary of the static and dynamic characteristics of the file including additional file metadata, file
structure details, and dynamic behaviors such as files dropped, registry keys created or modified, and URLs
with which it attempted to communicate.
Note: If no results display in the Detailed Threat Data pane, the file has not yet been uploaded for analysis.
Debug logging may provide information about why the file was not uploaded.
Script Control Table

235

Manage Policies
The table lists details about Active and PowerShell scripts that have been blocked or have triggered an alert
and the affected devices.
Columns display the File name, Interpreter (PowerShell or ActiveScript), Last found, Drive type (such as
internal hard drive), SHA256, Number of devices on which the script is found, and Number of occurrences
that were blocked or triggered alerts.
To filter column data, click the filter icon on a column header and select values to include or exclude.

Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Agents
After an Advanced Threat Prevention client is installed on an endpoint computer, it is recognized by the
Security Management Server as an agent.
Agents Table Data, Explained



Name - The name of the agent on the endpoint computer.



State - State of the agent, online or offline. A computer will be in the offline state after three
failed attempts in a 15-minute period to contact the Cylance server.



Offline Date - If applicable, the date on which the agent went offline.



Files Analyzed - Number of files analyzed on the endpoint computer.



Unsafe - Number of files deemed Unsafe on the device. An unsafe file has characteristics that
greatly resemble malware.



Quarantined - Number of files Quarantined on the device.



Waived - Number of Waived files on the device.



Abnormal - Number of Quarantined files on the device.



Exploit Attempts - Number of exploit attempts on the device.

Commands
To export details about an agent or remove an agent from the list, click the appropriate button:
Export - Creates and downloads a CSV file that contains device information (Name, State, Policy,
etc.).
Remove - Removes selected agents from the Agent Table. This does not uninstall the agent from the
device.

Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Certificate
The Certificate tab allows you to upload a certificate for the purpose of safelisting it.
Certificates must be in .cer or .crt format.
To upload a certificate, follow these steps:
1.

Navigate to Populations > Enterprise > Advanced Threats tab > Certificate tab.

Click Browse.

Select a certificate and click Open.

Click Upload Certificate.

236

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
5.

At the Upload Successful dialog, click OK.

For instructions about how to safelist a certificate, see Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Global List.

Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Cylance Score and Threat Model Updates
A Cylance score is assigned to each file that is deemed Abnormal or Unsafe. The score represents the
confidence level that the file is malware. The higher the number, the greater the confidence.
Threat Model Updates
The predictive threat model used to protect devices receives periodic updates to improve detection rates.
Two columns on the Protection page in the Remote Management Console show how a new threat model
affects your organization. Display and compare the Production Status and New Status columns to see which
files on devices might be impacted by a model change.
To view the Production Status and New Status columns:
1.

In the left pane, click Populations > Enterprise.

Select the Advanced Threats tab.

Click the Protection tab.

Click the down-arrow on a column header in the table.

Hover over Columns.

Select the Production Status and New Status columns.

Production Status - Displays the current model status (Safe, Abnormal or Unsafe) for the file.
New Status - Displays the model status for the file in the new model.
For example, a file that was considered Safe in the current model might change to Unsafe in the new model.
If your organization needs that file, you can add it to the Safe list. A file that has never been seen or score
by the current model might be considered Unsafe by the new model. If your organization needs that file, you
can add it to the Safe list.
Only files found on device in your organization and that have a change in its Cylance Score are
displayed. Some files might have a Score change but still remain within its current Status. For example, if
the Cylance Score for a file goes from 10 to 20, the file status may remain Abnormal and the file will appear
in the updated model list (if this file exists on devices in your organization).
The information for the model comparison comes from the database, not your devices. So no re-analysis is
done for the model comparison. However, when a new model is available and the proper Agent is installed, a
re-analysis is done on your organization and any model changes are applied.
Compare Current Model with New Model
You can now review differences between the current model and the new model.
The two scenarios you should be aware of are:
Production Status = Safe, New Status = Abnormal or Unsafe

•
•

Your Organization considers the file as Safe
Your Organization has Abnormal and/or Unsafe set to Auto-Quarantine

Production Status = Null (not seen or scored), New Status = Abnormal or Unsafe

237

Manage Policies

•
•

Your Organization considers the file as Safe
Your Organization has Abnormal and/or Unsafe set to Auto-Quarantine

In the above scenarios, the recommendation is to Safelist the files you want to allow in your organization.
Identify Classifications
To identify classifications that could impact your organization, Dell recommends the following approach:
1.

Apply a filter to the New Status column to display all Unsafe, Abnormal, and Quarantined files.

Apply a filter to the Production Status column to display all Safe files.

Apply a filter to the Classification column to only show Trusted - Local threats.
Trusted - Local files have been analyzed by Cylance and found to be safe. Safelist these items after
review. If you have a lot of files in the filtered list, you may need to prioritize using more
attributes. For example, add a filter to the Detected By column to review threats found by
Execution Control. These were convicted when a user attempted to execute an application and need
more urgent attention than dormant files convicted by Background Threat Detection or File
Watcher.

Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Global List
The Global Quarantine, Safe, and Unassigned tables provide a view of files in list as well as options to
perform actions on these files.
Global Quarantine
Global Quarantine lists files that are permanently quarantined from all devices.
Add a file to the global quarantine list
Add the selected file to the Global Quarantine list to prevent it from being run on any device in the
organization. Adding a file to Quarantine removes it from lists of Unsafe or Unassigned files.
1.

Select Global Quarantine (n).

Select a threat.

Click Add File.

Enter a reason that this file should be global quarantined and click Yes.
Manually Add File to the Global Quarantine list

Select Global Quarantine (n).

Click Add File.

Enter the file's SHA256 hash number. (required)

Enter the file's MD5 number, if available.

Enter the file name, if available.

Enter the reason the file should be quarantined.

Click Submit.
Remove a file from the global quarantine list
Remove the selected file from the Global Quarantine list to allow it to run on any device in the
organization.
238

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
1.

Select Global Quarantine (n).

Select a file.

Click Remove from List.
Safelist a file from the global quarantine list
Safelist the selected file from the Global Quarantine list to allow it to run on any device in the
organization.

Select Global Quarantine (n).

Select a file.

Click Safe.

Safe
Safelisted files and certificates are permanently treated as safe across all devices. Any certificate that is
safelisted will be a known safe certificate for the Advanced Threat Prevention tenant.
Add a file to the safe list
Safelisting a file allows that file to run on any device across the entire organization.
Note: Occasionally, a “good” file may be reported as unsafe (this could happen if the features of that
file strongly resemble those of malicious files). Waiving or safelisting the file can be useful in these
instances.
1.

Select Safe (n).

Click Add File.

Enter the file's SHA256 hash number. (required)

Enter the file's MD5 number, if available.

Enter the file name, if available.

Enter the reason the file should be safelisted.

Click Submit.
Remove a file from the safe list

Select Safe (n).

Select Files (n).

Select the file you want to remove from the safe list.

Click Remove from List.
Add a certificate to the safe list
Safelisting a certificate allows access to that certificate, as needed, across the entire organization.

239

Select Safe (n).

Select Certificates (n).

Select the certificate you want to list as safe.

Click Add Certificate.

Manage Policies
5.

Select the category that fits the certificate.

Enter a reason why the certificate should be listed as safe, and click Submit.
Note: You must upload a certificate in order for it to be available to safelist. For more information,
see Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Certificate.
Remove a certificate from the safe list

Select Safe (n).

Select Certificates (n).

Select the certificate you want to remove from the safe list.

Click Remove from List.

Unassigned
Unassigned files can be added to the global quarantine or safe list.
Add an unassigned file to the global quarantine list
Add the selected file to the Global Quarantine list to prevent it from being run on any device in the
organization. Adding a file to Quarantine removes it from lists of Unsafe or Unassigned files.
1.

Select Unassigned (n).

Select a file.

Click Global Quarantine.

Enter a reason that this file should be global quarantined and click Yes.
Manually Add File to the Global Quarantine list

Select Unassigned (n).

Click Add File.

Enter the file's SHA256 hash number. (required)

Enter the file's MD5 number, if available.

Enter the file name, if available.

Enter the reason the file should be quarantined.

Click Submit.
Add an unassigned file to the safe list
Safelisting a file allows that file to run on any device across the entire organization.

Select Unassigned (n).

Select a file.

Click Safe.

Select the category that fits the file.

Enter a reason why the file should be listed as safe, and click Yes.
Note: Occasionally, a “good” file may be reported as unsafe (this could happen if the features of

240

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
that file strongly resemble those of malicious files). Waiving or safelisting the file can be useful in
these instances.
Manually Add File to the Safe list
1.

Select Unassigned (n).

Click Add File.

Enter the file's SHA256 hash number. (required)

Enter the file's MD5 number, if available.

Enter the file name, if available.

Enter the reason the file should be safelisted.

Click Submit.
Add the selected file to the Global Quarantine list to prevent it from being run on any device in the
organization. Adding a file to Quarantine removes it from lists of Unsafe or Unassigned files.

Select Global Quarantine (n).

Select a threat.

Click Add File

Enter a reason that this file should be global quarantined and click Yes.
Manually Add File to the Global Quarantine list

Select Global Quarantine (n).

Click Add File.

Enter the file's SHA256 hash number. (required)

Enter the file's MD5 number, if available.

Enter the file name, if available.

Enter the reason the file should be quarantined.

Click Submit.

Manage Enterprise Advanced Threats - Options
The Options tab allows you to integrate with Security Information Event Management (SIEM) software using
the Syslog feature as well as export Advanced Threat data. SIEM software allows administrators to run
customized analytics on threat data within their environments. Software options include Splunk, available to
Splunkbase users at https://splunkbase.splunk.com/app/3233.
Syslog events are persisted at the same time Agent events are persisted to the Cylance server. For more
information about supported event types, see Syslog Event Types.
To integrate with SIEM, select Syslog/SIEM on the Options tab, and complete the form that displays. For a
list of syslog server IP addresses to allow, see Syslog IP Addresses.
With SIEM integration, to export data about threats, select Threat Data Report on the Options tab. For
instructions and a description of exportable data, see Threat Data Report.

241

Manage Policies
Threat Data Report
Select Threat Data Report on the Options tab to enable threat data export to .csv files.
The following types of data are available for export:
Threats - Lists all threats discovered in your organization. This information includes File Name and File
Status (Unsafe, Abnormal, Waived, and Quarantined).
Devices - Lists all devices in your organization that have an Agent installed. This information includes Device
Name, OS Version, Agent Version, and Policy applied.
Events - Lists all events related to the Threat Events Graph on the Dashboard for the last 30 days. This
information includes File Hash, Device Name, File Path, and the Date the event occurred.
Indicators - Lists each threat and the associated threat characteristics.
Cleared - Lists all files that have been cleared in your organization. This information includes files that were
Waived, added to the Safe List, or deleted from the quarantine folder on a device.
Export Data
To access the exported data:
1.

Select Generate token.

Copy the URL of the desired data and paste it into a web browser address field.

In the URL, replace [Token] with the generated token displayed in the Token field.

To disable access to the exported data, select Delete or regenerate to invalidate the current token. After
regenerating a token, provide it to persons who should have continued access to the exported data.

Advanced Threat Prevention Classifications
The Advanced Threat Prevention Classifications pane shows a heat map of threats. The color indicates the
priority classification of the threat. The size of the box indicates the relative number of endpoints that have
a particular threat. This classification helps administrators determine which threats and devices to address
first. Click a threat to view threat and device details.
Threat classifications include the following:
Malware

•
•

Trojan
Downloader

Potentially Unwanted Programs (PUP)

•
•
•

Adware
Hacking Tool
Portable Application

Enable Compatibility Mode for Memory Protection
Compatibility Mode allows applications to run on the client computer while Memory Protection or Memory
Protection and Script Control policies are enabled. Compatibility Mode is enabled through a registry setting
or a command on the client computer. Compatibility Mode does not apply to Mac clients.

242

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
To enable Compatibility Mode with a registry setting:
1.

In the Remote Management Console, disable the Memory Protection Enabled policy. If the Script
Control policy is enabled, disable it.

Save the policy changes, and Commit_Policies.

Using the Registry Editor on the client computer, go to
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Cylance\Desktop.

Right-click Desktop, click Permissions, then take ownership and grant yourself Full Control.

Right-click Desktop, then select New > Binary Value.

For the name, type CompatibilityMode.

Open the registry setting and change the value to 01.

Click OK, then close Registry Editor.

In the Remote Management Console, enable the Memory Protection Enabled policy. If the Script
Control policy was enabled, enable it.

10. Save the policy changes, and Commit_Policies.
To add the registry setting with a command:
1.

In the Remote Management Console, disable the Memory Protection Enabled policy. If the Script
Control policy is enabled, disable it.

Save the policy changes, and Commit_Policies.

Select one command line option to run on the client computer:
(For one computer) Psexec:
psexec -s reg add HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Cylance\Desktop /v CompatibilityMode /t
REG_BINARY /d 01
(For multiple computers) Invoke-Command cmdlet:
$servers = "testComp1","testComp2","textComp3"
$credential = Get-Credential -Credential {UserName}\administrator
Invoke-Command -ComputerName $servers -Credential $credential -ScriptBlock {New-Item -Path
HKCU:\Software\Cylance\Desktop -Name CompatibilityMode -Type REG_BINARY -Value 01}

In the Remote Management Console, enable the Memory Protection Enabled policy. If the Script
Control policy was enabled, enable it.

243

Save the policy changes, and Commit_Policies.

Manage Policies

Disconnected Mode Policy Examples
Examples for Global Allow, Quarantine List, and Safe List policies are shown below.
Global Allow policy example

Default
Acme
uxSYabW9P2nMbGLzuqJhvT9Y
Date(-62135596800000+0000)

temp\files\exe1.exe
stuff\folder\exe2.exe

244

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

3fdc391ef0e200af3e4c206e785e1de0
1E-05
509
XjxtEUkQvOFIxTZof+f6Jb149fhxFbOHUzc3S/5Hif6zqeiZrvOaM9QvGruM1un
/uiOGeMwiNB3lLCBD9PtwbgaYUpiz8Ne88wOmKhnerXo5TJRy+4HzPWDotDXSz+d5AHP74zbbHfH7m47KG
9bFAsPa4KNhFLqSOD3g/AI7ZCWLL/IOFyWcFMTLLkeLRycDIyZpzf8QDskQVsAt8Ub1h2UGY4BGgKwCQfY
z9J/yJWuF1XGy9A7rMAHzYdqh0B5s4Y2iB2jrdlHuGSxtNPu9gTuMldfxEBgcXq7XUWxuJUTbo1Fv2jsCH
Ypd/hg1d+3SkNbI9qykHmK9gnCH2r7IHPlK5zvR9Y1eVxTshl6JoxQMDD+M0VkrL3tHqlS1mJi9NI979dd
8GiYnAqtkFsMg+FhOT2PkVkBSzLgkCF+rHWoeDdo+MVX79X9XjJqT1kRwSM2p30IPi4g+NH6X/YPs6Fz7w
b95jMx6ILX/L7pHGOdM0fSeSfwO/XIOyk5FhogOJqY86SkJs437CS7+pW+nz82lXuFqNP4pZaG2xf2iepT
Do89dAMQJGWEoCnlR1z0lPI8782TLLRm5OKytCrhUMut+P28K8LuPOTdTgSCnf2uVrcecQTz/BZOyqX5B6
vy7g1P2H0HmEV1uVfhWMjABRoSK+aI5VXd5qNRaY4zfn0w5Z6LOiIYDtvESgkLuw0bzHrsf5ADKEkwv9Ig
09DxhDYzLdJlZp/DNMsnJGtvntZ/cezXbGtzJuGSFq7lem5L00cavDQ3vRo3GlfettwN2CT9Z2MssLJhwe
TS8utTabMBFfIsM8dx3sdN26lAsx9rDyR7fLn4BJ2WnMXv8FRoTZJ3oXxOQFUsCM1Rnhw7ottTaLEiPf7R
d4jdxbsErBnK1CYfyYAePaD6ycle1h6bYMyWxUUD2ZqyVBiu3La/4MKalmI9V2IzEsYObxp9RRXkY3HcTz
PHk5e8Zp+YbPQAr88RNpC277sCRiBWYlb00OH/hx5yc61rae/pzrGjusBT53KaiG6mlLpvRYrqDQ7fW0cp
Fa2eC1czQ+o8LN/gNVT7FtFhKgd8pnQW00CidxeSULfzRk6TS9rLCgXBDtRyK1fRrkkOCrHZU/YvC2BXaW

245

Manage Policies
VAx60giDsKxBUYQsgXQbaGwPG279ChdwnjWlVMWCqdvOoGEBMDApjbkqqkwgHJpkCJIF4zOTChpVfM17Pf
Kw/uycxoqMzpdb+AOQnTX+MzRm9BkTN9T9aFh+CRleDqc/xhP59RBUUT3GAP+rk3789EQXdUVp9tC7hmXT
jjg85jWSEe6IcGE5RY7NQXdXZGJScLmyiUVq+0lZjO3xkAUZ5eq0lUJo5KYaneGeYQFe7VzSmyzPMao6YP
fpnRxOuLvMANIhKf9q0zL1IPgJfVTwU9AHoLcUE2ztor3bdrRnZ3+e5HqZkEpHtMGruMjiP4ZLmA7tJNhj
63KspEEKJfCSkXGw74+cepc6J5ThPJWNd33IZmgcwqE27/sXxsb5xzYFgfBUZmr12KnU7JMbg95bZTatxN
8PtIQS2NTdnyXK/f7j7i74FQZXNksONgfyEelFDOTlqlI7SLKw1uffUEk2QGv54bUQANLhbAvLbLR1b6v3
52rw3ANgECdQbqXcvKE/jYKUzHSW3qqIPcPnrguYVoJuydKNiJVmoaqPLJ3LC6m7+PdGBuqEdVo+MK/PMJ
dTVb47zW1RSYX0t9SJ/4xWEBybUMsHXRZTux6nlca5qCxHDiHb50I677Bi+Y0YLddza7iA7z4mPTRmqEX6
jEo5ZorZ4kcTIbNHj77p4kzouYDg3s+o+9KvoxcI0iw8MAOtKrRVZTN24jjSUAETJ66rb3JdzcfJJeb7w4
QVOUckL2kfyaS4ASp80fzpOxJl3hSLw2bnR2n0WukMhj3kWvY+GeXDBfGzHfDGeLV0pF/+hQTPR/XWuOSs
nH1wUeJEXS3al6lyhcRCS7XbVPt+85NYGuk2ntf6zmST/v6a3E2exxerUDAmHfCK/0VQKrqlYec1hkH1Sb
vCQ==
rT7UrQItY0RfpDEVEDwSXdiGq3fUgEJ9OpQMEUEacRRy1OFAS2W51
m9f3hbzrOA7lvoiKZLy9/h0koV2d5vyIj+xC275ucwOvqhKpKPQH8mfcD3vT498DuteV0i1Tmzq/WFLlhd
qK75CF8ys17UVZZabbExD2s9W49gUft5W9UozOW5K1mC9V5E79YCf83s0wra6qrZqENI98WNpD9UbyN1UQ
N72g5mQligT8ViuoEMagB6JQaTI8CgCLe6NK8DFvuykGOYVtLfKCtmCqt0eg1Im0oFxLiVrouovcCdNpfz
WOXflQSEVEbVeqfPxEuTrHRWZBzFxOYLrT86tSsH8ll+XC3uFjN7uI/HB8daE3saFPmIAZUC9sq3rMU8Ro
y9+iRw3lebL0P51RTSHxC9Mz8xr85gt3m4MyqSO8mNNBxIzwxeUCishz8A17VB5ai/R5Hy17zMTwIXU2x5
Pcnpd2UqyeLQbXWpnkeRpl7f0rdwBM0FDCpZqExnFYQswvOb8kPnruC0/iIgx/zNSFeuFlT8dSbCZNvgh0
7Ohh4sl0v9U9Ir7nBe9ZreDgdZMdZ1wCTqXBk/yxJB74+95uRYasNznVAG2yD1IIwtWNvygHrmw5sZgk09
7K2quTOHjDp0thnhaSGdOK5pF2TFEm8zegjewP65pR5Jdys1lvKquzbx3NZ3LtR0XyVIMBzcF9NDLP8v4U
kwaKg9EL73o2yPjqgDVwt9AhXlh4VdSEv5M+JRfo+EguQB9I/DleTbWUGAEMMn1cADZj9yY0fB/SEsDVAW
iLbiP/PYcUXz6g4Cv2uF9jk2Tn7KEbvuFWfIlnq2+z/qUNUH0Uj44jgqswv6G/q5VfbW5dM0MtTGmZd5jE
8PNy3R/uygm4ZoTvnOUu93FIC8dpmVjlsyii9XhM8XN/YX9om5wXAJ9CuTgRWbuUK4lvW9ROiEokQRFu76
Y8OTEvx6kpCEFgAVZlhbfe0fmGo+CD1wI+dg0tze2BN7jk/ItXgiPKp/+/fLoH3HR8mZSWX8bW8uRpBgqo
3xq57tpP9JxcyPQetG9fungtlBjzAd53Frro8XYXbzOd71honuEsFYv4T03ojU8w7a9EBbJ7SvRfDDi27m
T/YmZNr3Y39FRlT7qQ44Ng5cjgp9etwVIego1xpfBXECF2PxOuA/S7u06QakK+Ngkl+bFw5MBbG/NLHALb
kV+jbL6NKmUMWHYO4ruPzSoUYE84f9V0WFBZpWMxnx/j/ZZZMwv8+p8kF3dAR9SjK38coPVCnLCJ8uDJPo
LDXS79u+pfQbsqgdPL+dwDeQAlIhHzjpNlpM5UeHYGUiwHFbOr8GTdq2GSEacfW510uv1dNeIk1wo2a2zl
cBMH0V57f3/aVi0ZDtDKL5N1TO81xSPa6/hck4RGjIRInr632OmMh/dtx+40q7c8269KQSnXvpaVS8kyf2
GvLMHCWurEg+NyCB0N5+UonnC+0i9KialfIByLBuPCNQppds0mkjhbCmJqPtCxgLaJVYop2qddzsry9PFW
97tDEJcUilrQc7a5NTFWExc4a8LLpT+dtXNxEvZAg2VSsffawcZ894um6Gw55IBRmLHeyso0Y3zBWOGq5G
3KA31fFyk9OAfxgdwIkHA6jB9nSRzi/ea7HSRUHNRfp26Bc0/c4K/dDDA23NdTOT14AIuU+3d822EH9l/M
cuVa1FAK1gzPwcOrL8lT3x9vrRJwUOCw0EamqgAzQNrE3tIbPsVuOhevtZhjm+NDzRZcxuk4Tu38Tojo5H
2xCucaEWdYxz0CKzCch/vH8FIpr0J9s1Jbl0Ac1m+frnuUZImePkSXdmvkX4SpD4hoCy0L1F4eVGMniFfj
fCIhQyBwphCoqGKo1wP7WOQA/9fDZc7z0vka2u6Uz3Sy/ekJHZ0yI7OzP4nAzTq7bnBQR2KCXgLaUP2mq0
VjyFS9zPmsxloHU8fjs2kDP4jH2e+qXSAJwQ0112Y+9mEvdktSkAJq24c5HSO4F80p1Ae8YhpuAECKXqCC
+P0YiksNToTGA==

Quarantine List and Safe List policy examples
Quarantine List
The Global Quarantine List contains hashes of files to be quarantined as shown in this example:

0A5F695900F1FC75070BB8B7C7A55B5BCFAAD6FE
525E7A55B5BCB6B16F25B5DD6CE11DFC6DD0B4E6
Safe List
The following sample value for the Safe List policy can be set at the Enterprise- and Endpoint-levels:

3fdc391ef0e200af3e4c206e785e1de0
246

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
1E-05
509
Xj..CQ==
rT..A==

Threat Protection Policy Overview
Threat Protection policies are divided into the following categories:

•

Threat Protection

•

Client Firewall

•

Web Protection

When you set the Threat Protection policy to Selected, you can then set policies for these client options:

•

Actions to take when malicious activity is identified (Block, Report, Block and Report)
Policies allow you to set the action to take when users attempt to modify or delete Threat
Protection system files, registry keys, and processes. The default setting for these policies is
Block and Report: Action on Malicious Activity for Files and Folders, Action on Malicious
Activity for Registry, and Action on Malicious Activity for Processes.

•

Exclusion of specified processes from Threat Protection scans

•

Logging locations and debug/verbose logging of certain activities
Activity logging is enabled by default. Debug logging is disabled by default.

•

Client update scheduling
Client updates ensure that client computers are always protected from the latest threats
through content files that include definitions of threats such as viruses and spyware, that are
used to detect threats. The Client Update Schedule policy is selected (Enabled) by default.
The Client Update Schedule Repeats policy, which determines the frequency of client
updates, is set to Daily by default.

The following policies represent the different types of scans included in Threat Protection:
On-Access Protection – When a user accesses files, folders, and programs, the on-access scanner intercepts
the operation and scans the item. Default: Selected (Enabled).
On-Demand Protection - Full Scan – Based on a schedule set in policy, the on-demand scanner runs a
thorough check of all areas of the computer. Default: Selected (Enabled).
By default, every time Full Scan runs, it scans the following for threats:

•

Computer memory for installed rootkits, hidden processes, and other behavior that suggests
malware is attempting to hide itself. This scan occurs before all other scans.

•

Memory of all running processes.

•

All drives on the computer and their subfolders.

By default, the scanner scans all file types, regardless of extension.
247

Manage Policies
On-Demand Protection - Quick Scan – Based on a schedule set in policy, the on-demand scanner runs a quick
check of areas of the computer that are most susceptible to threats. Default: Selected (Enabled).
By default, every time Quick Scan runs, it scans the following for threats:

•

Memory of all running processes.

•

Files that the Windows Registry references.

•

Contents of the Windows folder.

•

Contents of the Temp folder.

By default, the scanner scans all file types, regardless of extension.
Access Protection – Prevents other computers from making a connection and creating or altering autorun
(autorun.inf) files from CDs. The rule prevents spyware and adware distributed on CDs from being executed
and automatically blocks and reports such issues. Default: Selected (Enabled).
Exploit Protection – Monitors for application vulnerabilities and keeps buffer overflow exploits from
executing arbitrary code on the computer. Default: Selected (Enabled).
Script Scan Protection – Enables scanning JavaScript and VBScript scripts to prevent unwanted scripts from
executing. Default: Selected (Enabled).
Configurable Actions - After Threat is Detected
Actions taken if a threat, unwanted program, or exploit is detected are controlled by policy and include the
following:
Full-Scan Threat First Response - Specifies the first action for the scanner to take when a threat is detected.
Default: Clean file.
Full-Scan Threat First Response Fails - Specifies the action for the scanner to take when a threat is detected
if the first action fails. Default: Delete file.
Full-Scan Unwanted Program First Response - Specifies the first action for the scanner to take when a
potentially unwanted program is detected. Default: Clean file.
Full-Scan Unwanted Program First Response Fails - Specifies the action for the scanner to take when an
unwanted program is detected if the first action fails. Default: Delete file.
Quick-Scan Threat First Response - Specifies the first action for the scanner to take when a threat is
detected. Default: Clean file.
Quick-Scan Threat First Response Fails - Specifies the action for the scanner to take when a threat is
detected if the first action fails. Default: Delete file.
Quick-Scan Exploit First Response - Specifies the first action for the scanner to take when a potential exploit
is detected. Default: Clean file.
Quick-Scan Exploit First Response Fails - Specifies the action for the scanner to take when an exploit is
detected if the first action fails. Default: Delete file.
Reputation Service Sensitivity policies
When the Full-Scan Reputation Service Sensitivity or Quick-Scan Reputation Service Sensitivity policies are
enabled, samples are submitted to the Reputation Service lab to determine if they are malware. The
sensitivity level is used when determining if a detected sample is malware. The higher the sensitivity level,
the higher the number of malware detections. However, allowing more detections might result in more false
positive results.
The following values can be set:

248

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Disable - Samples are not submitted to the Reputation Service lab.
Very Low - A detection is made available to Threat Protection when the Reputation Service lab publishes it
instead of waiting for the next file update. Average of 10-15 queries per day, per computer.
Low - This setting is the minimum recommendation for laptops or desktops and servers with a strong security
footprint. This setting results in an average of 10-15 queries per day, per computer.
Medium - Use this level when the regular risk of exposure to malware is greater than the risk of a false
positive. This setting is the minimum recommendation for laptops or desktops and servers. Average of 20-25
queries per day, per computer.
High - Use this setting for deployment to systems or areas which are regularly infected. This setting results
in an average of 20-25 queries per day, per computer.
Very High - Dell recommends using this level only for scanning volumes and directories that do not support
executing programs or operating systems. Detections found with this level are presumed malicious, but have
not been fully tested to determine if they are false positives. Use this setting for on-demand scans on nonoperating system volumes. This setting results in an average of 20-25 queries per day, per computer.
For more detail about Threat Protection policies, see Windows Threat Protection.
Client Firewall Policies
The Client Firewall is a stateful firewall that checks all incoming and outgoing traffic against its list of rules.
If the traffic matches all criteria in a rule, the Client Firewall acts according to the rule, blocking or allowing
traffic through the firewall.
Configurable options and rules define how the Client Firewall works. When the master policy, Client
Firewall, is set to On, you can select View/Edit in the Settings and Rules policy to view or configure an
extensive set of Client Firewall options and rules.
Client Firewall options
Options include which subsets of traffic to block or allow and logging settings, as well as timeout parameters
for TCP, UDP, and ICMP connections.
Client Firewall rules
Client firewall rules define specific handling of network traffic. Each rule provides a set of conditions that
traffic must meet and an action to allow or block that traffic. When Client Firewall finds traffic that
matches a rule’s conditions, it performs the associated action.
Client Firewall uses precedence to apply rules and applies the rule at the top of the firewall rules list.
1.

If the traffic meets the conditions of the rule at the top of the list, Client Firewall allows or blocks
the traffic. It does not try to apply any other rules in the list.

If the traffic does not meet the first rule’s conditions, Client Firewall continues to the next rule in
the list until it finds a rule that the traffic matches.

If no rule matches, the firewall automatically blocks the traffic.

For a list of Client Firewall rules and their descriptions, see Client Firewall Settings and Rules.
Web Protection Policies
Web Protection monitors web browsing and downloads to identify threats and enforce action set by policy
when a threat is detected, based on ratings for websites. When you set the master policy, Web Protection,
to On, you can set other policies for Web Protection.
The Reputation Service analyzes each website and assigns a color-coded safety rating based on test results.
The color indicates the level of safety for the site:

249

Manage Policies
Red – Malicious
Yellow – Potentially malicious
Green - Safe
Through the following policies, you can assign actions to implement when a user accesses a website or
attempts a download, based on website ratings:
Rating Action for Red Sites - Specifies the action to apply to sites that are rated Red. Default: Block.
Rating Action for Yellow Sites - Specifies the action to apply to sites that are rated Yellow. Default: Warn.
Rating Action for Unrated Sites - Specifies the action to apply to sites that are Unrated. Default: Allow.
Rating Action for Red Downloads - Specifies the action to apply to file downloads that are rated Red.
Default: Block.
Rating Action for Yellow Downloads - Specifies the action to apply to file downloads that are rated Yellow.
Default: Warn.
Rating Action for Unrated Downloads - Specifies the action to apply to file downloads that are Unrated.
Default: Allow.
Configurable actions for website access or download attempts include the following:
Block – Prevents users from accessing the site or downloading a file from the site. A message is displayed.
Allow – Permits users to access the site or proceed with the download.
Warn – Displays a warning to notify users of potential dangers associated with the site or download file.
Users must dismiss the warning before ending the web session or proceeding with the download.
To exclude a private IP address or range of addresses from Web Protection content rating actions, specify
the IP address or IP address range in the IP Exclusions for Web Protection policy.
To block all phishing pages, without regard to policy values that control content rating actions, select the
Enforcement - Block Phishing Pages for All Sites policy.

Designate a Threat Protection Signature Update Server
Both an HTTP and FTP signature update server are pre-configured with your Security Management Server
installation. You can also, optionally, designate an internal signature update server or servers within your
network.
Designating a signature update server within your network allows client computers to obtain signature
updates without accessing the Internet. Rather than individual clients contacting an external update server,
they contact your internal update server, which maintains current signatures through contact with the
external signature update server.
To designate a signature update server, follow these steps:
1.

As an administrator on the server that will be the internal update server, run the appropriate
command:
VSSETUP_86.EXE /SetRelayServerEnable=1
or
VSSETUP_64.EXE /SetRelayServerEnable=1

Restart the internal update server.

In the Dell Server Remote Management Console, navigate to Populations > Enterprise and select
Malware Protection on the Security Policies tab.
250

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
4.

In Malware Protection advanced settings, click Source Sites for Updates.

Click Add.

Enter a Name for the internal update server.

To enable connections to the internal update server, select Enabled. To enable later, clear the
Enabled check box.

In the Order field, set the sequence in which clients will contact the internal update server in
relation to other update servers. Dell recommends that you set the Order for internal update
servers to precede the Order for external update servers.

Select the type of repository or path to the update server: HTTP repository, FTP repository, UNC
path, or Local path.

10. Enter the URL or path to the internal update server.
11. Complete the remaining fields in the form, and click OK.
12. Repeat these steps to designate additional internal update servers.
To revert an internal update server to non-update server status, enter the appropriate command:
VSSETUP_86.EXE /SetRelayServerEnable=0
or
VSSETUP_64.EXE /SetRelayServerEnable=0

Data Guardian

Data Guardian
Data Guardian provides the following:

•

Data is encrypted on the device and if the data is moved. To decrypt and view the content, users
must have Data Guardian installed on the client. Users can access protected files on Windows, Mac,
mobile devices, and a web portal.

•

An audit trail of file activity allows you to monitor security. See Data Guardian and Audit Events.

•

Protection against data leakage for protected Office documents - policies allow you to control
copy/paste or to add a watermark with the user's name, domain, and computer ID

Data Guardian basic policies are available for these populations:

•

Cloud Encryption - Enterprise, Endpoint Groups, and Endpoints

•

Protected Office Documents - Enterprise (master switch)

•

Mobile Client - Enterprise, Domain, User Groups, and User

•

Web Portal - Enterprise, Domain, User Groups, and User

•

Node level policies are only available at the Enterprise level and require a node restart.

•

Lock Account is only available at the User level.

Determine which Data Guardian policy groups you want to enable for Windows and Mac:

251

Manage Policies

Data Guardian Policy Groups

Windows

Cloud Encryption is On

Office and non-Office documents are
Office and non-Office documents are
protected as .xen files based on policies set. protected as .xen files based on policies set.

Protected Office Documents is Off

Cloud Encryption is Off
Protected Office Documents is On

Mac

A DDG VDisk virtual drive displays in the
client's Windows Explorer.
Office documents are protected based on
policies. For more information, see Set
Security Policies to Protect Office Documents
N/A
in Windows.
No DDG VDisk virtual drive is created. NonOffice documents are not impacted.

Both are On

Non-Office documents are protected as .xen Non-Office documents are protected as .xen
files if in the DDG VDisk virtual drive.
files.
A DDG VDisk virtual drive displays in the
client's Windows Explorer.

Office documents are protected based on
Protected Office policies.

Office documents have different levels of
security based on policy. If protected, the
Office document retains its extension in the
cloud but unauthorized users cannot access
it.

For more information, see Set Security
Policies to Protect Office Documents in Mac.

Additional policies impact Office documents.
For more information, see Set Security
Policies to Protect Office Documents in
Windows.
Neither is On

Files are not protected. If opened, content
displays in cleartext.

The Dell Server automatically updates profiles of cloud storage providers. For more information, see Cloud
Profile Update.
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console. In this table, master policies
are in bold font.
Policy

Default Setting

Description

Cloud Encryption
This technology allows for files to be automatically encrypted prior to being uploaded to supported public
clouds; this maintains ownership/control of all data encryption keys. The supported public cloud providers
are Dropbox, Dropbox for Business, Box, SkyDrive, OneDrive for Business, and Google Drive.
Cloud Encryption

Off

(Windows and Mac)

Enable Access to Restricted
File

Toggle On to enable Cloud Encryption policies. If this policy is Off, no
Cloud protection takes place, regardless of other policies.
Not Selected

(Windows and Mac)

Selected
Not Selected
Applies only to Google Drive. Selected disables any Google Drivecreated shortcuts to the web that Data Guardian cannot encrypt.

(Windows)
Enable In-App Feedback
(Cloud)

On
Off

Not Selected

Selected
Not Selected
When selected, an end user can submit feedback and satisfaction
ratings to Dell via a link within the client application to a web form.

252

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Cloud Storage Protection
Providers
(Windows and Mac)

String
Protect,Dropbox_V1
Protect,Box.net_V1
Protect,Chrome_V1*
Protect,Firefox_V1*
Protect,IE_V1*
Protect,SkyDrive_V1
Allow,BoxInstaller_V1
Allow,SkyDriveInstaller_V1
Protect,Flash_V1*
Protect,Java_V1*
Allow,TrendMicroProxy_V1
Allow,DropboxInstaller_V1
Protect,OneDrive_For_Business_V1

String
Profiles that Allow, Block, Protect, or Bypass these
providers/connections. Protect: Allow the provider/connection,
encrypt the files, and send audit events about file/folder activity.
Block: Block all access to the provider/connection. Allow: Allow the
provider/connection to pass through without encrypting, but audit
file/folder activity. Bypass: Bypass the protection of the
provider/connection without encrypting or auditing. When this value
is set, the cloud storage provider folder does not display in the DDG
VDisk virtual drive on the client computer.
The format is: ProtectionLevel,ProfileName.
ProtectionLevel options: Allow, Protect, Block, Bypass
The Dell Server automatically checks for updated profiles of Cloud
storage providers supported with Data Guardian. When available,
updated profiles are sent to Data Guardian clients after the
administrator commits policy changes. When the Pending Policy
Changes value in the Remote Management Console is automatically
incremented although an administrator has not modified policy
values, at least one updated profile is available.

Protect,Google_Drive_V1
The polling interval for Cloud storage provider profile updates is daily
Allow,OneDriveForBusinessInstaller_V1 at 12:30 a.m.
Allow,GoogleDriveInstaller_V1
*For these profiles, ProtectionLevel
settings must match.
Dropbox Encrypt Personal
Folders

Selected

(Windows)
Dropbox Encrypt Personal
Folders Message
(Windows)

Help File Visible

Selected
Not Selected
Selected encrypts personal cloud storage provider folders.

String

You have added files to your Dropbox Message to display when Dropbox Encrypt Personal Folders is set to
(Personal) folder. Do not add business Not Selected. This message is customizable by the Administrator.
files to your Dropbox (Personal)
folder. The names of all files that you
add to your Dropbox (Personal) folder
are being logged and sent back to the
Dell Server.
Selected

(Windows)

Selected
Not Selected
Selected allows the registration help file to be visible in the provider
folder.
More...
Not Selected hides the help file, therefore, potential file sharers will
not be redirected to the registration URL located at
https://..com:8443/cloudweb/register.

See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Protected Office Documents
This technology allows for Office documents (Excel, PowerPoint, and Word) to be encrypted at the file level.
Encryption travels with the file wherever it goes, inside or outside the network.
Protected Office
Documents
(Windows and Mac)
Note: Enabled only at the
Enterprise level.

253

Off

On
Off
Toggle On to provide users with a menu option for protecting Office
documents (.docx, .xlsx, .pptx, .docm, .xlsm, .pptm, and .pdf). On
also allows you to enable other Protected Office policies. If this
policy is Off, no Office-protected formatting takes place, regardless

Manage Policies
of other policies.
See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Mobile Client
This technology allows mobile phones and tablets access to encrypted content on supported public clouds,
including Dropbox, Box, Google Drive, OneDrive, and OneDrive for Business.
Data Guardian

Off

Off
Cloud Protection
Office Protected Documents
Both
Select one option or Both to use Data Guardian with mobile clients. If
this policy is Off, Data Guardian is not enabled for mobile clients,
regardless of other policies.

Dropbox

Allow and Audit

Allow and Audit
Allow and Protect
Disallow
Sets the status for Dropbox usage and protection.

Box

Allow and Audit

Allow and Audit
Allow and Protect
Disallow
Sets the status for Box usage and protection.

Google Drive

Allow and Audit

Allow and Audit
Allow and Protect
Disallow
Sets the status for Google Drive usage and protection.

OneDrive

Allow and Audit

Allow and Audit
Allow and Protect
Disallow
Sets the status for OneDrive usage and protection.

OneDrive for Business

Allow and Audit

Allow and Audit
Allow and Protect
Disallow
Sets the status for OneDrive for Business usage and protection.

Apply Encryption to Root
Data-Store Location

Selected

Selected
Not Selected
Selected encrypts personal cloud storage provider folders.

Geo-Fencing

Enable Geo-Fencing

Not Selected

Selected
Not Selected
Selected allows only users in the region selected in the Geo-Fencing
Location policy to access files.

Geo-Fencing Location

US and Canada

US
Canada
US and Canada
Sets the location in which users can access files.
The Enable Geo-Fencing policy must be Selected.

See advanced settings

254

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Web Portal
This technology allows for files to be automatically encrypted prior to being uploaded to supported public
clouds using a web-based client; this maintains ownership/control of all data encryption keys. The supported
public cloud providers are Dropbox, Dropbox for Business, Box, SkyDrive, OneDrive for Business, and Google
Drive.
Edit Permission

Selected

Selected
Not Selected
Selected allows users to edit files within the web client.

External User Edit
Permission

Not Selected

Selected
Not Selected
Selected allows external users to edit files within the web client.

Main Title Image

Choose File button

(Enterprise only)

Image or logo to display on the login page.
Note: The image must be a .jpg of square dimensions with a
maximum file size of 25 KB. If the image height and width dimensions
are not equal, the displayed image is stretched.

Masthead

Choose File button

(Enterprise only)
Access Agreement

String

(Enterprise only)

Image to display as the masthead on the login page. The image must
be a .png file, 26x26 pixels.
Agreement text to be displayed for users to accept before they are
allowed to log in.

See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Settings
This technology enables/disables Data Guardian Mac and Data Guardian Mobile access.
Allow Mac Data Guardian
Activation

Not Selected

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected prevents Mac Data Guardian clients from being
activated.

Allow Mobile Data Guardian
Activation

Selected

Selected
Not Selected
Not Selected prevents Mobile iOS or Android Data Guardian clients
from being activated.

Advanced Data Guardian
Advanced Data Guardian policies are available for these populations:

255

•

Cloud Encryption - Enterprise, Endpoint Groups, and Endpoints

•

Protected Office Documents - Enterprise, Endpoint Groups, and Endpoints (The Protected Office
Documents master policy, Enable Callback Beacon, and Callback Beacon URL policies are available
at the Enterprise level only.)

•

Mobile Client - Enterprise, Domain, User Groups, and User

•

Web Portal:

Manage Policies

•

Node level policies are only available at the Enterprise level and require a node restart.

•

Lock Account is only available at the User level.

See Data Guardian policy groups to determine which policies to enable.
The Dell Server automatically updates profiles of cloud storage providers. For more information, see Cloud
Profile Update.
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console. In this table, master policies
are in bold font.
Policy

Default Setting

Description

(Windows and Mac)

Toggle On to enable Cloud Encryption
policies. If this policy is Off, no Cloud
Encryption protection takes place,
regardless of other policies.

iOS Document Handling

Disallow

(Windows)

Allow
Disallow
Use this policy to allow or disallow iOS
clients to open documents with external
applications.

Help File Name

1. How to access secure files.html

(Windows)

String
Name of the registration help file. The file
name format is helpfilename.html.

Help File Contents
(Windows)

On
Off

HTML

HTML for the registration help file. HTML
validation is not performed.

The files in this folder have been secured
using Data Guardian. To view files in this
PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" folder you need to register with the owner
"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1- of the files.

%PRODUCTNAME% and %ACTIVATIONURL%

The html can be modified to suit your

environment.
How to Access Secure Files

%PRODUCTNAME%

The files in this folder have been secured
using %PRODUCTNAME%.

To view the files in the folder, you need to
register with the owner of the files.

Click
Here To Register

Excluded Folders
(Windows)

String
%windir%
%SystemDrive%\$recycle.bin
%ProgramFiles%
%SystemDrive%\users\*\appdata
%ProgramFiles(x86)%

String
Folders excluded from encryption,
separated by carriage returns. A "!" before
the variable means to exclude exactly that
directory. Folders without the "!" are partial
matches, so everything that starts with the
path will be excluded.

%ProgramData%\WebEx
Excluded Files
(Windows)

String

C3901A99-1A1B-55B4-AE11-891207B1D341.xen Files excluded from encryption, separated
by carriage returns.
desktop.ini
thumbs.db
creddb.cef
~$*
.~*
~*.tmp
.DDPCE.attr
*.lnk

Server Polling Interval

360 minutes

1-1440 minutes

(Windows and Mac)

How often, in minutes, the client checks in
with the Dell Server for updates. Default is
360 minutes (6 hours).

Software Update Server URL

String

(Windows)

Use this policy if software updates for users
will be located at an alternate Server URL.

Obfuscate Filenames

Extension only

(Windows and Mac)

Extension only
Guid
Select Extension only to display the actual
filename with the ".xen" extension. Select
Guid to display a scrambled filename with
the ".xen" extension.
When this policy is changed, Cloud
Encryption maintains the previous option
for any existing folders. Any new folders
created will have the new policy applied.
To use the new policy with the old files, cut
and paste files to a new folder.

Folder Management Enabled
(Windows)

Not Selected

Selected
Not Selected
Selected allows management of encryption
on a folder-by-folder basis within the sync
client folders. For example, if users
uploaded files before installing Data
Guardian, you can provide temporary Folder
Management rights to some users.
To provide temporary Folder Management
rights to a user:

257

Set this policy for the specific
endpoint to Selected.

Instruct the user to manually
turn on encryption for the pre-

Manage Policies
existing folder. The files will be
encrypted when the files sync to
the cloud.
3.

After the folders are encrypted,
set the Folder Management
Enabled policy for the endpoint
back to Not Selected.

See basic settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Off

(Basic - Windows and Mac)

Toggle On to provide users with a menu
option for protecting Office documents
(.docx, .xlsx, .pptx, .docm, .xlsm, .pptm,
and .pdf). On also allows you to enable
other Protected Office policies. If this
policy is Off, no Office-protected
formatting takes place, regardless of other
policies.

Note: Enabled only at the Enterprise level.

Force Protected Files Only

On
Off

Not Selected

(Windows)

Selected
Not Selected
Selected forces users to save Office files as
protected documents. It also enables a
sweep on the clients' internal fixed drives
to locate new Office files and change them
to Protected mode. It disables the Share
option (Office 2013 and 2016) and Save &
Send option (Office 2010).
If Not Selected, users have some options in
determining whether to save a file as
protected or unprotected.

Enable Time To Live and Embargo Control

Not Selected

(Windows)

On Screen Watermark

Selected
Not Selected
Selected allows users to specify dates for
when protected Office files are accessible
to external users.

Not Selected

Selected
Not Selected
Selected displays a watermark on the client
computer screen when any protected Office
file is open.

Print Control
(Windows and Mac)

Allowed

Allowed
Watermark
Disabled
Controls the Print function of protected
Office documents (.docx, .xlsx, .pptx,
.docm, .xlsm, .pptm, and .pdf):

•

Allowed - Print option is enabled
for protected Office documents.

•

Watermark - Print option is
enabled for protected Office
documents but a watermark with
the user's name, domain name,
and computer ID displays on each
page. Unprotected documents

258

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
print without the watermark.

•

Disabled - Print option is
enabled. However, if the user
clicks Print for a protected Office
document or when a protected
Office document is open in
Acrobat Reader DC, a toaster
states that Print is not allowed.
In addition, the attempt to print
is an audit event. Note: Users
can print unprotected Office
documents.

Note: If Force Protected Files Only is Not
Selected, the Print option is available for
all unprotected Office documents.
Export Control

Allowed

(Windows)

Allowed
Watermark
Disabled
For Office 2013 and higher, controls the
Export function of protected Office
documents (.docx, .xlsx, .pptx, .docm,
.xlsm, .pptm, and .pdf):

•

Allowed - This varies based on
whether Force Protected Files
Only is Selected. For detailed
information, see Set Security
Policies to Protect Office
Documents.

•

Watermark - Export is disabled.
See Protected Export.

•

Disabled - Export is disabled for
protected Office documents.
Users can export unprotected
Office documents.

Note: For Office 2010, see Save and Send.
Protected Office Clip Board Unauthorized
Text
(Windows)

Pasting of protected data is not allowed on this String to display when a user attempts to
computer. Please contact your administrator for paste secure data from a protected
assistance.
document into an unprotected location.

Protected Office Document Tamper Prompt The file has been tampered with. Contact the
author or your administrator.

(Windows)

Offline Key Generation Escrow Reminder
Delay

3 days

(Windows)

Protected Office Documents Cover Page
Notice

1-14 days. 3 days default.
Specifies the number of days the client will
wait while not being able to escrow key
material prior to warning the end user.

(Windows)
Offline Key Generation Escrow Reminder
Text

String to display if a user encounters an
Office-protected document that is
identified as having been tampered with.

Data Guardian has not been able to contact the
Dell Server for several days. Please ensure that String to display when the end user is
you are connected to the network. If you are
warned that the client cannot escrow key
connected to the network, contact your
material.
Administrator.
String

(Windows and Mac)

Enterprise-defined text to be displayed
on Office-protected cover pages. Maximum
number of character is 4096. See Set Cover
Page Policies.
Note: If line breaks are entered as part of the
text, they are automatically converted to spaces
to ensure the text displays correctly in all Office
applications.

Protected Office Documents Cover Page
Corporate Logo

259

Browse button and Save Logo File button

Image to be displayed on the
document cover page. See Set Cover Page
Policies.

Manage Policies
(Windows and Mac)

Note: The logo image must be a .jpg
of square dimensions with a maximum file
size of 25 KB. If the image height and width
dimensions are not equal, the displayed
image is stretched.

Protected Office Documents Cover Page
Dell Server URL

String

(Windows and Mac)
Enable Callback Beacon

Not Selected

Dell Server URL that will be displayed on
the cover page.
Selected inserts a callback beacon into
every protected Office file.
To use the callback beacon, the following
requirements must be met:

Callback Beacon URL

String

•

The beacon server must be
installed as part of Front End
Server/Proxy Mode installation.
Port 8446 must be open. For
more information, see the
Security Management Server
Installation and Migration Guide
or Security Management Server
Virtual Quick Start Guide and
Installation Guide.

•

An administrator must have
enrolled to receive Product
Notifications.

•

The Callback Beacon URL policy
is set.

Specifies the URL to be used when the
callback beacon is inserted into Officeprotected files.
The URL, for example
http://server.domain.com:8446, must be
externally available, hosted on an HTTP
server that is installed as part of Front End
Server/Proxy Mode installation. Port 8446
must be open. For more information, see
the Security Management Server
Installation and Migration Guide or Security
Management Server Virtual Quick Start
Guide and Installation Guide.
The Enable callback beacon policy must be
Selected.

Hidden Audit Trail within Protected Office
Document
(Windows and Mac)

Selected

Enables a hidden watermark audit trail
within a Protected Office Document. See
also for Mobile and Web Client. For
information on decrypting protected
documents to view audit data, see the Data
Guardian in the Recovery Guide. See also
web_client and Mobile.
Selected
Not Selected

On Screen Watermark

Not Selected

Selected displays a watermark on the
mobile client screen when any protected
Office file is open.

See basic settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Mobile Client
This technology allows mobile phones and tablets access to encrypted content on supported public clouds,

260

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
including Dropbox, Box, Google Drive, OneDrive, and OneDrive for Business.
Enable Callback Beacon

Not Selected

Selected inserts a callback beacon into
every protected Office file.
To use the callback beacon, the following
requirements must be met:

Callback Beacon URL

String

•

An administrator must have
enrolled to receive Product
Notifications.

•

The Callback Beacon URL policy
is set.

Hidden Audit Trail within Protected Office
Document

Selected

Enables a hidden watermark audit trail
within a Protected Office Document. For
information on decrypting protected
documents to view audit data, see the Data
Guardian in the Recovery Guide. See also
Windows_and_Mac and web_client.
Selected
Not Selected

On Screen Watermark

Not Selected

Selected displays a watermark on the
mobile client screen when any protected
Office file is open.
1-1440 minutes

Server Polling Interval

360 minutes

How often, in minutes, the client checks in
with the Data Guardian for updates. Default
is 360 minutes (6 hours).

Workspace Access

4 or 6
Application pass code (PIN)

Required number of characters for
Workspace PIN.
4 - 16

Set maximum failed login attempts

Set action on maximum failed login
attempts

Timeout for 1 minute

261

Define the number of PIN login failures.
Then set the policy for action to take on
the Workspace after the failed attempts.
Timeout for 1 minute
Timeout for 5 minutes

Manage Policies
Lock Workspace
Wipe Workspace Data
The action to take after the maximum
failed login attempts are reached.
2, 5, 20, 30, or 60 minutes
Set inactivity lock duration

Set copy/paste capabilities

Not Selected

Allow Non-Genuine device OS

Not Selected

Configure the amount of inactivity time
that can elapse before the end user must
re-enter a PIN.
Selected
Not Selected
Selected allows users to copy and paste
outside of the workspace.
Selected
Not Selected
Selected allows a jailbroken iOS device or a
rooted Android device.

Cover Page

Protected Office Documents Cover Page
Acceptance Text

String

Enterprise-defined text to be displayed
on Office-protected cover pages. See Set
Cover Page Policies.
Image to be displayed on the
document cover page. See Set Cover Page
Policies.

Protected Office Documents Cover Page
Corporate Logo

Browse button and Save Logo File button

Protected Office Documents Cover Page
Dell Server URL

String

The file being opened appears to have been
tampered with and can no longer be validated.
Protected Office Document Tamper Prompt Please contact the original author or your
administrator.

Note: The logo image must be a .jpg
of square dimensions with a maximum file
size of 25 KB. If the image height and width
dimensions are not equal, the displayed
image is stretched.
Dell Server URL that will be displayed on
the cover page.
Text to be displayed if a user encounters an
Office Protected Document that has been
determined was tampered with.

Web Browser

Set a default homepage

http://www.dell.com

Homepage default for the Workspace
browser.
Pre-configure bookmarks.

Pre-configure bookmarks
See basic settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Protected Office Documents Cover Page
EULA

Not Selected

String

Selected
Not Selected
Selected prevents the user from logging in
to the web client.
Text to be displayed on Protected Office
Documents Cover Page.
The text in this policy is translatable.

262

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Corporate logo to display on the document
cover page.
Protected Office Documents Cover Page
Corporate Logo

Choose File button

Protected Office Documents Cover Page
Dell Server URL

String

Note: The image must be a .jpg of square
dimensions with a maximum file size of 25
KB. If the image height and width
dimensions are not equal, the displayed
image is stretched.
Dell Server URL that will be displayed on
the Cover Page.
Selected inserts a callback beacon into
every protected Office file.
To use the callback beacon, the following
requirements must be met:

Enable Callback Beacon

•

An administrator must have
enrolled to receive Product
Notifications.

•

The Callback Beacon URL policy
is set.

Not Selected

Specifies the URL to be used when the
callback beacon is inserted into Officeprotected files.

Callback Beacon URL

String

The URL, for example
http://server.domain.com:8446, must be
externally available, hosted on an HTTP
server that is installed as part of Front End
Server/Proxy Mode installation. Port 8446
must be open. For more information, see
the Security Management Server
Installation and Migration Guide or Security
Management Server Virtual Quick Start
Guide and Installation Guide.
The Enable callback beacon policy must be
Selected.

Hidden Audit Trail within POD

Selected

On Screen Watermark

Not Selected

Selected displays a watermark on the
mobile client screen when any protected
Office file is open.

See basic settings

Set Cover Page Policies
You can set policies to customize a cover page for protected Office documents.

•

263

Internal users - The cover page displays for the following:

Manage Policies

•

Protected Office Documents policies have been enabled but the user has not yet installed or
activated the Data Guardian.

•

User opens a protected Office document from the cloud.

•

User downloads a protected Office document to a device that does not have Data Guardian
installed.

Unauthorized users - The cover page displays, and the person cannot access the content.

To customize the cover page for protected Office documents, you can use these Advanced Data Guardian
policies:

•

Protected Office Documents Cover Page Notice

•

Protected Office Documents Cover Page Corporate Logo

•

Protected Office Documents Cover Page Dell Server URL

Cloud Profile Update
The Security Management Server can automatically check for updated profiles of cloud storage providers
supported with Data Guardian.
To configure Dell Server to automatically check for updated profiles, follow these steps:
1.

Navigate to \conf\ and open the application.properties file.

Locate cloud.profile.updater.enabled and set the value to true.

When update is enabled and updated profiles are available, the profiles are sent to Data Guardian clients
after the administrator commits policy changes. When the Pending Policy Changes value in the Remote
Management Console is automatically incremented although an administrator has not modified policy values,
at least one updated profile is available.
The polling interval for cloud storage provider profile updates is daily at 12:30 a.m.

Set Policies to Protect Office Documents in Windows
For enhanced security on Office documents (.docx, .pptx, .xlsx, .docm, .pptm, .xlsm, or .pdf), you can
implement Data Guardian's Protected Office mode for internal users.
You can open a protected .pdf file with:

•

Adobe Acrobat Reader DC

•

Microsoft Word - from a local drive or from the network
Note: You cannot map a network drive to a local drive to open a .pdf.

If an unauthorized user tries to access a protected file, the file remains encrypted, for example when the
file is:

•

Attached in an email

•

Moved in a browser - if the user selects Move in a cloud sync client

•

Moved in File Explorer

•

Stored on removable media

264

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Set Policies for Protected Office Documents
To set Protected-mode policies on Office documents for internal users:
1.

In Populations > Enterprise, under the Data Guardian technology group, click the Protected Office
Documents policy group.

Determine the level of security for Office documents:

•

Opt-in mode (allows users the option to choose which Office documents to protect): Toggle
the Protected Office Documents policy to On.

•

Force-Protected mode (ensures protection of all Office documents):

•

At the Enterprise level, toggle the Protected Office Documents policy to On.

•

At the Enterprise, Endpoint Groups, or Endpoints level, click Show advanced
settings and select the Force Protected Files Only check box.

Note: For Endpoint Groups or Endpoints, click an option to access the Detail page’s Security Policies
tab.
4.

Set additional Protected Office Documents policies based on security requirements for Office
documents, for example, Print, Export, and Embargo.

To view protected Office documents in mobile devices, see Set Policies to Protect Office Documents
in Mobile Devices.

Determine Impact on Windows Users for Opt-in or Force Protected Modes
When you set Protected Office Documents policies and the client is activated, the File menu for Office
documents displays additional options and enables/disables some options.
Dell recommends that you test policy updates on a test group of endpoints before applying them on a large
scale.
This table provides an overview of the security impact on the Office File menu options for internal users
based on which policies you activate:

•

Protected Office Documents (Opt-in mode - user has the option to choose which Office documents
to protect. Both Save As and Protected Save As are enabled).

•

Protected Office Documents and Force Protected files only (Force-Protected mode - higher
security) - The Force Protected policy enables a sweep on the clients' internal fixed drives to
locate unprotected Office files and change them to Protected mode. It disables Save As, the Share
option (Office 2013 and 2016), and Save & Send option (Office 2010). It enables Protected Save As.
For Data Guardian to sweep the Office documents, the user must log in and be connected to the
network. The sweep acquires keys from the server for ten unprotected Office files at a time. If fewer
than ten unprotected Office files require keys, the sweep waits 30 seconds for more files but then
requests the keys.
Note: Sweep ignores network file share, optical, and removable drives.
Note: On the DDG VDisk virtual drive, if the user right-clicks to create an Office document, it is saved
as a .xen file. The user must manually access the File menu option and save the document as
Protected. The Office document retains its file extension, such as .docx or .pdf, in the cloud but is
encrypted.
Note: For Office-protected documents, users cannot run macros in macro-enabled documents.

265

Manage Policies

Policies for Force-Protected
mode:

File menu
option for Policy for Opt-in mode:
Office
Protected Office Documents
documents

Open

Save

Save As

Protected
Save As

Protected Office Documents
Force Protected files only

Protected Office documents

Unprotected Office documents

All Office documents

Files open as usual.

Unprotected documents open in readonly mode. See Save and Protected
Save As.

User clicks Save: the file
is protected.

User clicks Save: the file is
saved but not in protected
mode.

User clicks Save: the file is protected.

Enabled for user - saves as
unprotected

Enabled for user- saves as
unprotected

Disabled for user - the only option is
Protected Save As.

Enabled for user

If the file is in read-only mode, the
Save As window opens. The only option
Save as type field - If this is the in the Save as type field is Protected
first time to save the file, the (Documents, Presentation, or
Save As window opens and this Workbook).
field has the standard list of
User opens and saves a .xen file - the
options.
User opens and saves a .xen file only option in the Save as type field is
the only option in the Save as type
Protected. The .xen file is removed
field is Protected. The .xen file is
from the cloud.
removed from the cloud.
If the file is in read-only mode, the
Save As window opens. The only
option in the Save as type field is
Protected (Documents,
Presentation, or Workbook).

Save as type field - the only option Save as type field - the only
Save as type field - the only option
is Protected (Documents,
option is Protected (Documents, is Protected (Documents,
Presentation, or Workbook).
Presentation, or Workbook).
Presentation, or Workbook).

This table provides an overview of additional Protected Office policy settings and what displays in the Office
File menu.
File menu Policy enabled (some protection options for user):
option for
Protected Office Documents
Office
documents

(Office 2013
and higher)

Protected Office Documents
Force Protected files only

Protected Office documents

Unprotected Office documents

With Force Protected enabled, the
user is forced to save any Office
document as Protected.

Enabled for user

For Office-protected documents,
the Print_Control policy
determines how this function
behaves.
Export

Policies enabled (higher security):

Office 2013/2016 and Export
Control policy:

•

Allowed: Enabled for
user

•

Watermark: Export is
disabled. See Protected
Export.

•

Disabled: Disabled for
user

For Office-protected documents, the
Print_Control policy determines how
this function behaves.
Enabled for user

Office 2013/2016 and Export Control
policy:

•

Allowed: Export option is
enabled for user. However,
with Force Protected
enabled and a higher level
of security, Dell
recommends setting this
policy to Watermark or
Disabled. With Allowed,
users can save as another
file type, which could leave
a document unprotected.

266

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

•

Watermark: Export is
disabled. See Protected
Export.

•

Disabled: Disabled for user

Protected
Office 2013/2016 and Export
N/A
Export
Control policy:
(Office 2013
• Watermark: The user
and higher)
can export only to a
This option
PDF, but a watermark
displays in
with their name,
the File
domain name, and
menu only if
computer ID displays on
the Export
each page.
Control
Note: Export is disabled
policy is set
for user.
to
Watermark.

Office 2013/2016 and Export Control
policy:

Save and
Enabled for user
Send (Office
2010)

Disabled for user

Enabled for user

(Office 2013
and higher )

Disabled for protected Office
documents

Watermark: The user can
export only to a PDF, but a
watermark with their name,
domain name, and
computer ID displays on
each page.
Note: Export is disabled for
the user.

Note: To export to a PDF, the user can
use the Print menu (if Print Control
policy is set to Allowed) to print to a
PDF.

(Instead of
Export)
Share

•

Enabled for user

Disabled for user

Enabled for unprotected
documents

This table provides an overview of Protected Office policy settings and other menu options.
File menu
option for Policy enabled (some protection options for user):
Office
Protected Office Documents
documents

Copy/Paste
(Office
Protected
Clip Board
policy)

Policies enabled (higher security):

Protected Office Documents
Force Protected files only
With Force Protected enabled, the
user is forced to save any Office
document as Protected.

Protected Office documents

Unprotected Office documents

Copy/Paste only to a protected
Office document or protected
.pdf. However, no unprotected
PDFs can be open in Adobe
Acrobat Reader DC.

Copy/Paste unprotected content Copy/Paste only to a protected Office
as usual.
document or protected .pdf. However,
no unprotected PDFs can be open in
Adobe Acrobat Reader DC.

Enable Both Cloud Encryption and Protected Office Documents
If you enable both policy groups, Protected Office documents differ from non-Office documents in some
areas:

•

If the Cloud Storage Protection Providers policy is set to Allow and does not encrypt non-Office
files, protected Office documents still maintain any protection status.

•

If the Excluded Folders policy excludes a particular folder from encryption, protected Office
documents still maintain any protection status if copied to those folders.

Return to Data Guardian.

Set Policies to Protect Office Documents in Mac

267

Manage Policies
For enhanced security on Office documents (.docx, .pptx, .xlsx, .docm, .pptm, .xlsm, or .pdf), you can
implement Data Guardian's Protected Office mode. Protected Office documents are uploaded to the cloud,
not as .xen files, but with their file extensions (.docx, .pptx, .xlsx, .docm, .pptm, .xlsm, or .pdf). However,
the Office documents are encrypted. If opened or downloaded to a device that does not have Data Guardian
installed, only a cover page displays with instructions on how to obtain validated access. An authorized user
can obtain installation or activation information from the enterprise. An unauthorized user cannot access the
protected data.
Note: The cloud storage provider is optional. Protected Office documents and .xen files can be opened from
local storage.
Set Protected Office Document Policies
To set Protected-mode policies on Office documents for internal users:
1.

In Populations > Enterprise, under the Data Guardian technology group, click the Protected Office
Documents policy group.

Toggle the Protected Office Documents policy to On.

Note: The Force Protected files only policy is not available for Mac.

At the Enterprise level, under Data Guardian, click Settings.

5.
6.

Ensure the Allow Mac Data Guardian Activation check box is selected.
Set additional Protected Office policies at the Enterprise, Endpoint Groups, or Endpoints levels.
Note: For Endpoint Groups or Endpoints, click an option to access the Detail page’s Security Policies
tab.

To view protected Office documents in mobile devices, see Set Policies to Protect Office Documents
in Mobile Devices.

Return to Data Guardian.

Set Policies to Protect Office Documents in Mobile Devices
For enhanced security on Office documents (.docx, .pptx, .xlsx, .docm, .pptm, .xlsm, or .pdf), you can
implement Data Guardian's Protected Office mode. Protected Office documents are uploaded to the cloud,
not as .xen files, but with their file extensions (for example, .docx or .pdf). However, the Office documents
are encrypted.
Set Protected Office Document Policies
To set Protected-mode policies on Office documents:
1.

In Populations > Enterprise, under the Data Guardian technology group, click the Protected Office
Documents policy group.

Toggle the Protected Office Documents policy to On.

Note: The Force Protected files only policy is not available for mobile.

At the Enterprise level, under Data Guardian, click Settings.

5.
6.

Ensure the Allow Mobile Data Guardian Activation check box is selected.
Set additional Protected Office policies at the Enterprise, Domains, User Groups, or Users levels.
268

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Note: For Domains, User Groups, or Users, click an option to access the Detail page’s Security Policies
tab.

Set Policies to Protect Office Documents on the web client
For enhanced security on Office documents (.docx, .pptx, .xlsx, .docm, .pptm, .xlsm, or .pdf), you can
implement Data Guardian's Protected Office mode for internal users.
Note: You can open a protected .pdf file with Adobe Acrobat Reader DC or Microsoft Word.
Set Protected Office Document Policies
To set Protected-mode policies on Office documents:
1.

In Populations > Enterprise, under the Data Guardian technology group, click the Protected Office
Documents policy group.

Toggle the Protected Office Documents policy to On.

In the Web_Portal policy group or Global Settings, set additional policies at the Enterprise,
Domains, User Groups, or Users levels. Some polices are set at the Enterprise (node level) only.
Note: For Domains, User Groups, or Users, click an option to access the Detail page’s Security Policies
tab.

Removable Media Encryption

Removable Media Encryption
A note about Removable Storage policies: Encryption External Media for Mac policies are device-based
policies. This is different behavior than Encryption External Media for Windows, which are user-based.
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console. In this table, master policies
are in bold font.
Policy

Default Setting

Description

Windows Media Encryption
This technology works on Windows computers using Dell Encryption External Media to encrypt data on
removable devices, which can be accessed using a user-defined password. These policies allow configuration
of the Encryption External Media password requirements and the removable media allowed.

Windows Media Encryption

Off

This policy must be selected to use all other
Removable Storage policies. Not Selected
means that no encryption of removable
storage takes place, regardless of other
policy values.
Selected forces a scan of removable storage
every time it is inserted.

EMS Scan External Media

Not Selected

When this policy is Not Selected and the
Windows Media Encryption policy is Selected,
only new and changed files are encrypted.
More...
A scan occurs at every insertion so that any
files added to the removable storage without
authenticating can be caught. Files can be

269

Manage Policies
added to the removable storage if
authentication is declined, but encrypted
data cannot be accessed. The files added
will not be encrypted in this case, so the
next time removable media is authenticated
(to work with encrypted data), any files that
may have been added are scanned and
encrypted.
Block, Read Only, Full Access
Note that this policy interacts with the Port
Control System - Storage Class: External
Drive Control policy. If you intend to set this
policy to Full Access, ensure that Storage
Class: External Drive Control is not set to
Read Only or Blocked.
More...
When this policy is set to Block Access, you
have no access to removable storage unless
it is encrypted.
EMS Access to unShielded Media

Read Only

Choosing either Read-Only or Full Access
allows you to decide what removable storage
to encrypt.
If you choose not to encrypt removable
storage and this policy is set to Full Access,
you have full read/write access to removable
storage.
If you choose not to encrypt removable
storage and this policy is set to Read-Only,
you can read or delete existing files on the
unencrypted removable storage, but files
cannot be edited on, or added to, the
removable storage.
Block access to any external media that is
less than 55 MB and thus has insufficient
storage capacity to host external media
encryption (such as a 1.44MB floppy disk).
More...

Selected

EMS Block Access to UnShieldable Media

All access is blocked if Windows Media
Encryption and this policy are both Selected.
If Windows Media Encryption is Selected, but
this policy is Not Selected, data can be read
from the unencryptable external media, but
write access to the media is blocked.
If Windows Media Encryption is Off, then this
policy has no effect and access to
unencryptable external media is not
impacted.

See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Mac Media Encryption
This technology works on Mac computers using Dell Encryption External Media to encrypt data on removable
devices, which can be accessed using a user-defined password. These policies allow configuration of the
Encryption External Media password requirements and the removable media allowed.

Mac Media Encryption

Off

Toggle On to enable Mac Removable Media
Encryption policies. If this policy is toggled
to OFF, no Mac Removable Media Encryption
takes place, regardless of other policies.
HFS Plus is supported and must be enabled.
For instructions to enable HFS Plus, see the
Encryption Enterprise for Mac Administrator

270

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Guide.
Media containing Time Machine backups are
not supported. However, media recognized
by computers as Time Machine backup
destinations are automatically whitelisted,
to allow backups to continue. All other
removable media with Time Machine backups
are handled based on EMS Access to
unShielded Media and EMS Block Access to
UnShieldable Media policies.
Selected allows Encryption External Media to
scan removable storage every time
removable storage is inserted.
When this policy is Not Selected and the
Windows Media Encryption policy is Selected,
Encryption External Media only encrypts new
and changed files.
More...

EMS Scan External Media

Not Selected

A scan occurs at every insertion so that
Encryption External Media can catch any
files added to the removable storage without
authenticating. You can add files to the
removable storage if you decline to
authenticate, but you cannot access
encrypted data. The files added will not be
encrypted in this case, so the next time you
authenticate to the removable media to
work with encrypted data, Encryption
External Media scans it and encrypts any
files that may have been added without
encryption.
Block, Read Only, Full Access
When this policy is set to Block Access, you
have no access to removable storage unless
it is encrypted.
Choosing either Read-Only or Full Access
allows you to decide what removable storage
to encrypt.

EMS Access to unShielded Media

Read Only

If you choose not to encrypt removable
storage and this policy is set to Full Access,
you have full read/write access to removable
storage.
If you choose not to encrypt removable
storage and this policy is set to Read-Only,
you cannot read or delete existing files on
the unencrypted removable storage, but the
Encryption client will not allow any files to
be edited on, or added to, the removable
storage unless it is encrypted.
Block access to any removable storage that
is less than 55 MB and thus has insufficient
storage capacity to host a Removable Media
Encryption client (such as a 1.44MB floppy
disk).

EMS Block Access to UnShieldable Media

Selected

All access is blocked if Encrypt External
Media and this policy are both True. If
Encrypt External Media is True, but this
policy is False, data can be read from the
unencryptable removable storage, but write
access to the media is blocked.
If Encrypt External Media is False, then this
policy has no effect and access to
unencryptableremovable storage is not
impacted.

271

Manage Policies
See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Media Encryption Settings
This technology allows definition of what media encryption events to retain in logs.
"security", "fail", "30"
"security", "success", "30"
"application", "error", "30"
"application", "warn", "15"
"application", "info", "5"
"application", "debug", "5"
Defines the amount of time (in days) that
Encryption External Media, HCA, and PCS
event types are maintained in the Server
event log.
Each event type is defined by category and
level. You may set different retention times
for each event level in each category.

Event Retention

The "Security" category represents events
related to user authentication,
authorization, or encryption. This includes
events for Dell-encrypting devices, updating
security policies, or failed authentication
attempts. "Security" events are further
differentiated by a "fail" or "success"
indicating the outcome of the event.
The "Application" category (application type
event, rather than a security type event)
represents events related to general
application actions. These events are further
differentiated by a set of severity levels "error", "warn", "info", and "debug". You
should use longer retention times for more
severe levels.

Removable Media Policies that Require Logoff

•

Windows Media Encryption

•

EMS Scan External Media

•

EMS Encryption Algorithm

•

EMS Exclude CD/DVD Encryption

•

EMS Data Encryption Key

Advanced Removable Media Encryption
A note about Removable Storage policies: Encryption External Media for Mac policies are device-based
policies. This is different behavior than Encryption External Media for Windows, which are user-based.
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console. In this table, master policies
are in bold font.
Policy

Default Setting

Description

272

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10

Off

Not Selected

This policy must be selected to use all other Removable Storage policies. Not
Selected means that no encryption of removable storage takes place, regardless
of other policy values.
False encrypts CD/DVD devices.
This policy applies to 5.4.x Windows Encryption clients only.

EMS Allow Read-access to
unShielded Media (5.4.x
Only)

More...
Selected

If an end-user chooses not to encrypt media and this policy is set to True, they
will be able to read or delete existing files on the media that is not Dellencrypted, but the Encryption client will not allow any files to be edited on or
added to the removable storage unless it is Dell-encrypted.
AES 256, AES 128, 3DES

EMS Encryption Algorithm

AES256

Encryption algorithm used to encrypt removable storage.
Encryption algorithms in order of speed, fastest first, are AES 128, AES 256,
3DES.
Common, User, User Roaming
Choose a key to be used by the Encryption client to encrypt all data encrypted
by the Encryption External Media.

EMS Data Encryption Key

User Roaming

More...
You cannot save a policy where this policy has the same value as either User
Data Encryption Key policy or Application Data Encryption Key policy, the error
message Policy Constraint Violation: The value for EMS Data Encryption Key
conflicts with User Data Encryption Key and/or Application Data Encryption Key
will display.
Disabled, Local, Roaming

EMS Automatic
Authentication

Disabled

Local automatic authentication allows the encrypted media to be automatically
authenticated when inserted in the originally encrypting computer when the
owner of that media is logged in. When automatic authentication is Disabled,
users must always manually authenticate to access encrypted media.
Not Selecting Roaming automatic authentication helps to prevent users from
forgetting their password when they take the media home or share it with a
colleague. Not selecting Roaming automatic authentication also promotes a
sense of awareness from a security perspective for users that the data being
written to that media is protected.
Selected allows the user to access encrypted data on removable storage
whether the endpoint is Dell-encrypted or not.

EMS Access Encrypted Data
on unShielded Device

Selected

More...
When this policy is False, the user will be able to work with encrypted data
when logged on to any encrypted endpoint, regardless of the Security
Management Server the user activated against. The user will not be able to
work with encrypted data using any device that is not Dell-encrypted.
String - Maximum of 300 devices with a maximum of 500 characters per
PNPDeviceID. Maximum of 4096 total characters allowed. "Space" and "Enter"
characters used count in the total characters used.

EMS Device Whitelist

This policy allows the specification of removable storage devices to exclude
from Encryption External Media encryption [using the removable storage
device's Plug and Play device identifier (PNPDeviceID)], thereby allowing users
full access to the specified removable storage devices.
More...
This policy is available on an Enterprise, Domain, Group, and User level. Note
that local settings override inherited settings. If a user is in more than one
group, all EMS Device Whitelist entries, across all Groups, apply.
Note: This policy is particularly useful when using removable storage devices

273

Manage Policies
which provide hardware encryption. However, this policy should be used with
caution. This policy does not check whether external media devices on this list
provide hardware encryption. Whitelisting removable storage devices which do
not have hardware encryption will not have enforced security and will not be
protected.
For example, the Kingston® DataTraveler® Vault Privacy model enforces that
encryption is enabled to use the device. However, the Kingston DataTraveler
Vault model has an unsecured partition and a secured partition. Because it is
the same physical removable storage device with only one PNPDeviceID, the
two partitions cannot be distinguished, meaning that whitelisting this
particular removable storage device would allow unencrypted data to leave
the endpoint.
Additionally, if an removable storage device is protected by EMS and
subsequently added to the EMS Device Whitelist policy, it remains encrypted
and requires a reformat of the removable storage device to remove
encryption.
The following is an example of a PNPDeviceID, which contains the manufacturer
identifier, product identifier, revision, and hardware serial number:

To whitelist a removable storage device, provide a string value which matches
portions of the device’s PNPDeviceID. Multiple device PNPDeviceIDs are
allowed.
For example, to whitelist all Kingston DataTraveler Vault Privacy models, input
the string:

To whitelist both models of Kingston DataTraveler, the Vault and Vault Privacy
models, input the string:

Note that space characters are considered part of the substring to match to a
PNPDeviceID. Using the previous PNPDeviceID as an example, a space before
and after the semicolon would cause neither of the substrings to be matched,
because the space character is not part of the PNPDeviceID.
Instructions...
To find and edit the PNPDeviceID for removable storage:
1.

Insert the removable storage device into an encrypted computer.

Open the EMSService.log in C:\Programdata\Dell\Dell Data
Protection\Encryption\EMS.

Find PNPDeviceID= and enter the applicable values, explained below.
For example:
14.03.18 18:50:06.834 [I] [Volume "F:\"] PnPDeviceID =
USBSTOR\DISK&VEN_SEAGATE&PROD_USB&REV_0409\2HC015KJ&0
Specify the following:
VEN=Vendor; Green highlighted text represents the vendor's devices
to be excluded
PROD=Product/Model Name; Blue highlighted text also excludes all of
Seagate’s USB drives; a value represented by green highlighted text
must precede this value
REV=Firmware Revision; Gray highlighted text also excludes the
specific model being used; values represented by green and blue
highlighted text must precede this value
Serial number (in this example); Yellow highlighted text excludes
only this device; values represented by green, blue, and gray
highlighted text must precede this value

OR
To find the PNPDeviceID for removable storage on Windows 7 or later:

274

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
1.

Insert the removable storage device.

Open the Control Panel and go to Administrative Tools > Computer
Management.

Select the Hardware tab, select the drive, and click Properties.

A new windows displays. Select the Device Instance Path in the
Property drop-down menu.

The PNPDeviceID is displayed in the Value field.
To find the PNPDeviceID for removable storage on Windows XP:
1.

Click Start > Run...

Type msinfo32 and click Enter.

When the System Information window displays, go to Components >
USB.

A list of USB devices and their PNPDeviceIDs displays.
Available Delimiters:
Tabs
Commas
Semi colons
Hex character 0x1E (Record separator character)
EMS Alpha Characters
Required in Password

Selected

Selected requires one or more letters in the password.

EMS Mixed Case Required in
Password

Selected

Selected requires at least one uppercase and one lowercase letter in the
password.

EMS Number of Characters
Required in Password

EMS Numeric Characters
Required in Password

Selected

EMS Password Attempts
Allowed

EMS Special Characters
Required in Password

Not Selected

1-40 characters
Minimum number of characters required in the password.
Selected requires one or more numeric characters in the password.
1-10
Number of times the user can attempt to enter the correct password.
Selected requires one or more special characters in the password.
8, 16, 32

EMS Access and Device Code
Length

EMS Access Code Attempts
Allowed

Number of characters access and device codes have. 32 characters is the most
secure, while 8 is the easiest to enter.
1-10
Number of times the user can attempt to enter the access code.
Apply Cooldown, Wipe Encryption Keys
Action to take following unsuccessful EMS Access Code Attempts Allowed:

EMS Access Code Failure
Action

Apply Cooldown

EMS Access Code Required
Message

String
Authentication Failed. Please
contact your system
administrator.

Message that displays when a user needs to contact you for an access code
(after authentication failure).
More...
Message policies must have non-blank values.
"Space" and "Enter" characters used to add lines between rows count as
characters used. Messages over the 512 character limit are truncated on the

275

Manage Policies
client.
We recommend that you customize the second sentence of the message to
include specific instructions about how to contact a Help Desk or Security
Administrator for authentication failures.
0-5000 seconds
EMS Cooldown Time Delay

EMS Cooldown Time
Increment

Number of seconds the user must wait before attempting to enter the access
code after failing the specified number of times.
0-5000 seconds
Incremental time to add to the cooldown time each time the user fails to enter
the correct access code in the specified number of attempts.
String - 5-512 characters - You are not authorized to use this media. Please
contact your system administrator.
Message that displays following unsuccessful Access Code Attempts Allowed.

EMS Access Code Failed
Message

String

More...

You are not authorized to use Message policies must have non-blank values.
this media. Please contact
"Space" and "Enter" characters used to add lines between rows count as
your system administrator.
characters used. Messages over the 512 character limit are truncated on the

client.

We recommend that you customize the message to include specific instructions
about how to contact the Help Desk or Security Administrator.
Encryption rules to be used to encrypt/not encrypt certain drives, directories,
and folders.
A total of 2048 characters are allowed. "Space" and "Enter" characters used to
add lines between rows count as characters used. Any rules exceeding the 2048
limit are ignored.
See Encryption Rules for information.
More...
Storage devices which incorporate multi-interface connections, such as
Firewire, USB, eSATA, etc. may require the use of both EMS and encryption
rules to encrypt the endpoint. This is necessary due to differences in how the
Windows operating system handles storage devices based on interface type.
To ensure encrypting an iPod via EMS does not make the device unusable, use
the following rules:

EMS Encryption Rules

-R#:\Calendars
-R#:\Contacts
-R#:\iPod_Control
-R#:\Notes
-R#:\Photos
You can also force encryption of specific file types in the directories above.
Adding the following rules will ensure that ppt, pptx, doc, docx, xls, and xlsx
files are encrypted in the directories excluded from encryption via the previous
rules:
^R#:\Calendars
;ppt.doc
.xls.pptx
.docx.xlsx
^R#:\Contacts
;ppt
.doc.xls
.pptx.docx
.xlsx
^R#:
\iPod_Control
;ppt.doc
.xls.pptx
.docx.xlsx
^R#:\Notes
;ppt.doc
.xls.pptx
.docx.xlsx
^R#:\Photos
;ppt.doc
.xls.pptx

276

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
.docx.xlsx
Replacing these five rules with the following rule will force encryption of ppt,
pptx, doc, docx, xls, and xlsx files in any directory on the iPod, including
Calendars, Contacts, iPod_Control, Notes, and Photos:
^R#:\;ppt.doc.xls
.pptx.docx.xlsx
These rules disable or enable encryption for these folders and file types for all
removable devices - not just an iPod. Use care when defining rules to exclude
an iPod from encryption.
These rules have been tested against the following iPods:
iPod Video 30gb fifth generation
iPod Nano 2gb second generation
iPod Mini 4gb second generation
We do not recommend the use of the iPod Shuffle, as unexpected results may
occur.
As iPods change, this information could also change, so caution is advised when
allowing the use of iPods on EMS-enabled computers.
Because folder names on iPods are dependent on the model of the iPod, we
recommend creating an exclusion encryption policy which covers all folder
names, across all iPod models.
See basic settings

Off

Toggle On to enable Mac Removable Media Encryption policies. If this policy is
toggled to OFF, no Mac Removable Media Encryption takes place, regardless of
other policies.
AES 256, AES 128, 3DES

EMS Encryption Algorithm

AES256

Encryption algorithm used to encrypt removable storage.
Encryption algorithms in order of speed, fastest first, are AES 128, AES 256,
3DES.
Common, User, User Roaming

EMS Data Encryption Key

User Roaming

Note that although Common is available, it is not implemented in this
release.
Choose a key to be used by the Encryption client to encrypt all data encrypted
by the Encryption External Media.

EMS Alpha Characters
Required in Password

Selected

Selected requires one or more letters in the password.

EMS Mixed Case Required in
Password

Selected

Selected requires at least one uppercase and one lowercase letter in the
password.

EMS Number of Characters.
Required in Password

EMS Numeric Characters
Required in Password

Selected

EMS Password Attempts
Allowed

EMS Special Characters
Required in Password

Not Selected

EMS Access and Device Code
Length

277

Number of characters access and device codes have. 32 characters is the most
secure, while 8 is the easiest to enter.

Manage Policies
EMS Access Code Attempts
Allowed

1-10
Number of times the user can attempt to enter the access code.
Apply Cooldown, Wipe Encryption Keys
Action to take following unsuccessful Access Code Attempts Allowed:

EMS Access Code Failure
Action

Apply Cooldown

• Apply Cooldown to allow another round of attempts following the specified
cooldown period (Cooldown Time Delay and Cooldown Time Increment policies)
• Wipe Encryption Keys to have the Encryption client delete the encryption keys
on the removable storage, making the encrypted data inaccessible until the
owner takes the media to a Dell-encrypted computer for which he has a login.
String - 5-512 characters - Authentication Failed: Please contact your system
administrator.
Message that displays when a user needs to contact you for an access code
(after authentication failure).

String
EMS Access Code Required
Message

Authentication Failed.
Please contact your system
administrator.

More...
Message policies must have non-blank values.
"Space" and "Enter" characters used to add lines between rows count as
characters used. Messages over the 512 character limit are truncated on the
client.
We recommend that you customize the second sentence of the message to
include specific instructions about how to contact a Help Desk or Security
Administrator for authentication failures.
0-5000 seconds

EMS Cooldown Time Delay

EMS Cooldown Time
Increment

Number of seconds the user must wait between the first and second rounds of
access code entry attempts.
0-5000 seconds
Incremental time to add to the previous cooldown time after each unsuccessful
round of access code entry attempts.
String - 5-512 characters - You are not authorized to use this media. Please
contact your system administrator.

String
EMS Access Code Failed
Message

You are not authorized to
use this media. Please
contact your system
administrator.

Message that displays following unsuccessful Access Code Attempts Allowed.
More...
Message policies must have non-blank values.
"Space" and "Enter" characters used to add lines between rows count as
characters used. Messages over the 512 character limit are truncated on the
client.
We recommend that you customize the message to include specific instructions
about how to contact the Help Desk or Security Administrator.
Encryption rules to be used to encrypt/not encrypt certain drives, directories,
and folders.
A total of 2048 characters are allowed. "Space" and "Enter" characters used to
add lines between rows count as characters used. Any rules exceeding the 2048
limit are ignored.
See Encryption Rules for information.
More...

EMS Encryption Rules

Storage devices which incorporate multi-interface connections, such as
Firewire, USB, eSATA, etc. may require the use of both EMS and encryption
rules to encrypt the endpoint. This is necessary due to differences in how the
Windows operating system handles storage devices based on interface type.
To ensure encrypting an iPod via EMS does not make the device unusable, use
the following rules:
-R#:\Calendars
-R#:\Contacts
-R#:\iPod_Control
-R#:\Notes
-R#:\Photos
You can also force encryption of specific file types in the directories above.
Adding the following rules will ensure that ppt, pptx, doc, docx, xls, and xlsx
files are encrypted in the directories excluded from encryption via the previous

278

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
rules:
^R#:\Calendars
;ppt.doc
.xls.pptx
.docx.xlsx
^R#:\Contacts
;ppt
.doc.xls
.pptx.docx
.xlsx
^R#:
\iPod_Control
;ppt.doc
.xls.pptx
.docx.xlsx
^R#:\Notes
;ppt.doc
.xls.pptx
.docx.xlsx
^R#:\Photos
;ppt.doc
.xls.pptx
.docx.xlsx
Replacing these five rules with the following rule will force encryption of ppt,
pptx, doc, docx, xls, and xlsx files in any directory on the iPod, including
Calendars, Contacts, iPod_Control, Notes, and Photos:
^R#:\;ppt.doc.xls
.pptx.docx.xlsx
These rules disable or enable encryption for these folders and file types for all
removable devices - not just an iPod. Use care when defining rules to exclude
an iPod from encryption.
These rules have been tested against the following iPods:
iPod Video 30gb fifth generation
iPod Nano 2gb second generation
iPod Mini 4gb second generation
We do not recommend the use of the iPod Shuffle, as unexpected results may
occur.
As iPods change, this information could also change, so caution is advised when
allowing the use of iPods on EMS-enabled computers.
Because folder names on iPods are dependent on the model of the iPod, we
recommend creating an exclusion encryption policy which covers all folder
names, across all iPod models.
Disabled, Enable Local, Enable Roaming

EMS Automatic
Authentication

Local

Local automatic authentication allows the Dell-encrypted media to be
automatically authenticated when inserted in the originally Dell-encrypting
computer when the owner of that media is logged in. When the User Roaming
key is applied to Encryption External Media, Roaming Automatic Authentication
allows Dell-encrypted media to be automatically authenticated when it is
inserted in any Dell-encrypted computer the media owner is logged into. When
automatic authentication is disabled, users must always manually authenticate
to access Dell-encrypted media.
Disabling Roaming Authentication helps to prevent users from forgetting their
password when they take the media home or share it with a colleague.
Disabling Roaming Authentication also promotes a sense of awareness from a
security perspective for users that the data being written to that media is
protected.
Selected allows the user to access encrypted data on removable storage
whether the endpoint is encrypted or not.

EMS Access Encrypted Data
on unShielded Device

EMS Device Whitelist

279

Selected

When this policy is Not Selected, the user is able to work with encrypted data
when logged on to any encrypted endpoint, regardless of the Dell Server the
user activated against. The user will not be able to work with encrypted data
using any unencrypted device.
String - Maximum of 150 devices with a maximum of 500 characters per
PNPDeviceID. Maximum of 2048 total characters allowed. "Space" and "Enter"
characters count in the total characters used.

Manage Policies
This policy allows the specification of removable storage devices to exclude
from encryption [using the removable storage device's Plug and Play device
identifier (PNPDeviceID)], thereby allowing users full access to the specified
removable storage devices.
More...
This policy is available on an Enterprise, Domain, Group, and User level. Note
that local settings override inherited settings. If a user is in more than one
group, all EMS Device Whitelist entries, across all Groups, apply.
Note: This policy is particularly useful when using removable storage devices
which provide hardware encryption. However, this policy should be used with
caution. This policy does not check whether external media devices on this list
provide hardware encryption. Whitelisting removable storage devices which do
not have hardware encryption will not have enforced security and will not be
protected.
For example, the Kingston® DataTraveler® Vault Privacy model enforces that
encryption is enabled to use the device. However, the Kingston DataTraveler
Vault model has an unsecured partition and a secured partition. Because it is
the same physical removable storage device with only one PNPDeviceID, the
two partitions cannot be distinguished, meaning that whitelisting this
particular removable storage device would allow unencrypted data to leave
the endpoint.
Additionally, if a removable storage device is encrypted and is subsequently
added to the EMS Device Whitelist policy, it remains encrypted and requires a
reformat of the removable storage device to remove encryption.
The following is an example of a PNPDeviceID, which contains the manufacturer
identifier, product identifier, revision, and hardware serial number:

To whitelist a removable storage device, provide a string value which matches
portions of the device’s PNPDeviceID. Multiple device PNPDeviceIDs are
allowed.
For example, to whitelist all Kingston DataTraveler Vault Privacy models, input
the string:

To whitelist both models of Kingston DataTraveler, the Vault and Vault Privacy
models, input the string:

Note that space characters are considered part of the substring to match to a
PNPDeviceID. Using the previous PNPDeviceID as an example, a space before
and after the semicolon would cause neither of the substrings to be matched,
because the space character is not part of the PNPDeviceID.
Instructions...
1.

Insert USB removable media.

Open System Profiler.

Under Hardware, select the USB device and find the Product ID and
Vendor ID, as follows:
Capacity:2.06 GB (2,055,019,008 bytes)
Removable Media:Yes
Detachable Drive:Yes
BSD Name:disk2
Product ID:0x5406
Vendor ID:0x0781 (SanDisk Corporation)
Version: 0.10
Serial Number:0000188C36725BC8
Speed:Up to 480 Mb/sec
Manufacturer:SanDisk
Location ID:0x24100000

280

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Current Available (mA):500
Current Required (mA):200
Partition Map Type:MBR (Master Boot Record)
S.M.A.R.T. status:Not Supported
4.

The following Whitelist Rules can be used:
USBVendorName=abc
USBVendorNum=0x02
USBVendorNum=2,USBProductNum=3
USBVendorNum=2,USBProdName=abc
For this example, in the Security Management Server, add the
following key/pair string to the EMS Device Whitelist policy, as shown
below:
"USBVendorNum=0x0781,USBProductNum=0x05406"
(including quotes)

EMS Trust for Unsupported
File Systems

When satisfied with the EMS Device Whitelist rules, save and commit
the policy.

Ignore, Provisioning Rejected, Unshieldable
Ignore

Specifies how media are handled when formatted by file systems that are not
supported with Encryption External Media.
Users matching this dictionary are restricted from unencrypted media use.
Example:
AccessUnencryptedMediaRestrictionUsers

Restricted user list for
access to unencrypted
media

Dictionary

dsAttrTypeStandard:AuthenticationAuthority

;Kerberosv5;;username1@domainName.com;domainName.com*
;Kerberosv5;;@domainName.org;domainName.org

Restrict Access to
Unencrypted Media

Full, Read Only, Block
Full

Specify how media encrypted with Encryption External Media is handled for
users matching unencrypted media restriction.

See basic settings

Removable Media Policies that Require Logoff

•

Windows Media Encryption

•

EMS Scan External Media

•

EMS Encryption Algorithm

•

EMS Exclude CD/DVD Encryption

•

EMS Data Encryption Key

Mac Encryption

Mac Encryption
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console. In this table, master policies
are in bold font.

281

Manage Policies

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Dell Volume Encryption
This technology allows the use of either Mac FileVault full disk encryption or Dell's proprietary Dell Volume
Encryption.
On
Off
Dell Volume Encryption

Toggle ON to enable Dell Volume Encryption
policies. If this policy is toggled to OFF, no
Dell Volume Encryption takes place,
regardless of other policies.
On
Off

Encrypt Using FileVault for Mac

Off

Toggle ON to enable FileVault to encrypt all
volumes including System Volumes and Fusion
Drives.
Highest, High, Normal, Low, Lowest

Normal

Workstation Scan Priority

Specifies the relative priority of encrypted
folder scanning. High and Highest prioritize
scanning speed over computer
responsiveness, Low and Lowest prioritize
computer responsiveness over scanning speed
and favor other resource-intensive activities,
and Normal balances the two.
The Encryption client checks for a changed
Workstation Scan Priority before processing
the next file.
NOTE: This policy applies to Dell Encryption,
not FileVault encryption.

See advanced settings

Policy

Default Setting

Description

Mac Global Settings
This technology defines Mac encryption behavior, including targeted volumes, polling intervals, and restart
policies.

Volumes Targeted for Encryption

All Fixed Volumes

System Volume Only
All Fixed Volumes
The System Volume Only setting secures only
the currently running system volume.
String - maximum of 1500 characters
List fully qualified Policy Proxy hostnames, or
IP addresses, separated by carriage returns.
More...
Once the Encryption client finds a valid
entry, the remainder of the entries are
ignored.

Policy Proxy Connections

282

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
Policy Proxy Polling Interval policy.
You cannot specify ports in this policy.
The Encryption client communicates with
Policy Proxies using the GKPORT
specified during client installation (the
default is 8000).
Inherited values for this policy accumulate.
In order for the Encryption client to connect
to a Policy Proxy specified in this policy, it
must be in the same group as the Policy
Proxy specified during client installation.
Because the Shield supports up to 255 users
per endpoint, this policy is available only at
the Enterprise Policies level.
1-1440 minutes

Policy Proxy Polling Interval

360

The interval that the Encryption client
attempts to poll Policy Proxy for policy
updates, and send inventory information to
Policy Proxy.
Setting the Policy Proxy Polling Interval
below 60 minutes is not recommended, due
to potential degradation of performance.
The Encryption client also attempts to poll
Policy Proxy each time a user logs on.

Force Restart on Policy Updates

Selected

If this policy is set to Selected, the
Encryption client will force a computer
restart after the specified delay upon
receiving a policy update requiring a restart.
The delay is specified by the Length of Each
Restart Delay and Number of Restart Delays
Allowed policies.
If this policy is set to Not Selected, the
Encryption client will neither force nor
prompt for a restart. The policy requiring the
restart will take effect the next time the user
restarts their computer.
If Force Restart on Policy Updates is set to
Selected, this value is the number of minutes
the user can delay the restart before another
restart prompt is displayed.
If Force Restart on Policy Updates is set to
Not Selected, this policy is ignored.
More...

Length of Each Restart Delay

The Encryption client displays the restart
prompt for five minutes each time. If the
user does not respond to the prompt, the
dialog is dismissed and next delay begins. If
the five-minute timer expires and no restart
delays remain, the computer will restart
immediately.
Tip: Calculate the maximum possible delay as
follows (a maximum delay would involve the
user responding to each delay prompt
immediately prior to the 5-minute mark):
(Number of Reboot Delays Allowed x Length
of Each Reboot Delay) + (5 minutes x
[Number of Reboot Delays Allowed + 1]).

Number of Restart Delays Allowed

283

If Force Restart on Policy Update is set to
Selected, this value is the number of times
the user can delay the restart. If this policy is
set to "0", the Encryption client will prompt
the user to restart immediately and will force
the restart if the user does not acknowledge

Manage Policies
the prompt within five minutes.
If Force Restart on Policy Updates is set to
Not Selected, this policy is ignored.

Advanced Mac Encryption
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console. In this table, master policies
are in bold font.
Policy

Default Setting

Description

Dell Volume Encryption
This technology allows the use of either Mac FileVault full disk encryption or Dell's proprietary Dell Volume
Encryption.
On
Off
Dell Volume Encryption

Toggle ON to enable Dell Volume Encryption policies. If
this policy is toggled to OFF, no Dell Volume Encryption
takes place, regardless of other policies.
Highest, High, Normal, Low, Lowest

Workstation Scan Priority

Normal

Specifies the relative Mac priority of encrypted folder
scanning. High and Highest prioritize scanning speed
over computer responsiveness, Low and Lowest prioritize
computer responsiveness over scanning speed and favor
other resource-intensive activities, and Normal balances
the two.
The Encryption client checks for a changed Workstation
Scan Priority before processing the next file.
AES 256, AES 128
Encryption algorithm used to encrypt data at the
endpoint (all users) level.

Encryption Algorithm

AES256

Encryption algorithms in order of speed, fastest first, are
AES 128, AES 256.
NOTE: This policy applies to Dell Encryption, not
FileVault encryption.
Required, Optional

Firmware Password Mode

Required

Specify if the firmware password in older hardware is
optional or required for Dell Volume Encryption.
Ignore, Report, Convert
Specify behavior when volume is Dell encrypted and
policy is for FV2 encryption.

FileVault 2 Policy Conflict Behavior

Ignore

Ignore – Default behavior, Dell encrypted volumes are
reported as protected if the policy requires FV2
encryption.
Report – Conflicted volumes are reported to the Server
as unprotected.
Convert – Dell encrypted volumes are converted to FV2
volumes and reported as unprotected while converting.

See basic settings

Mac Global Settings
This technology defines Mac encryption behavior, including targeted volumes, polling intervals, and restart
policies.

284

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
0-32400 seconds
Limits the maximum delay in seconds that can be set in
the system preferences “max password delay after
screen saver or sleep” of the Security panel.

Max Password Delay

300

Delay Authentication

Not Selected

If Selected, users aren’t prompted to activate or
authenticate to the Dell Server until required, such as to
use media encrypted with Encryption External Media.
Users matching this dictionary are not required to
activate or authenticate to the Dell Server.
Example:
NoAuthenticateUsers

No Auth User List

Dictionary

dsAttrTypeStandard:AuthenticationAuthority
;Kerberosv5;;@students.school.edu;
students.school.edu

Users matching this dictionary are allowed to add
themselves to FileVault Preboot Authentication.
Example:
FV2PBAUsers

FileVault 2 PBA User List

Dictionary

dsAttrTypeStandard:AuthenticationAuthority
;Kerberosv5;;*@students.school.edu;
students.school.edu*

Port Control

Port Control
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console. In this table, master policies
are in bold font.
Policy

Default Setting

Description

Windows Port Control
This technology allows for control of all the physical ports on a Windows computer (disable/enable/bypass),
and can be customized by port type.

Port Control System

Disabled

Enable or Disable all Port Control System
policies. If this policy is set to Disable, no
Port Control System policies are applied,
regardless of other Port Control System
policies.
All PCS policies require a reboot before the
policy takes effect.

Port: Express Card Slot

Enabled

Enable, Disable, or Bypass ports exposed
through the Express Card Slot.
Enable, Disable, or Bypass port access to
external USB ports.

Port: USB

285

Enabled

Note: USB port-level blocking and HID classlevel blocking is only honored if we can
identify the computer chassis as a
laptop/notebook form-factor. We rely on the
computer's BIOS for the identification of the

Manage Policies
chassis.
Enabled

Port: eSATA

Enable, Disable, or Bypass port access to
external SATA ports.

See advanced settings

Windows Device Control
This technology allows for control of all the devices on a Windows computer (disable/enable), and can be
customized by device type.

Enabled

Class: Storage

Enabled

Class: Windows Portable Device (WPD)

PARENT to the next 3 policies. Set this policy
to Enabled to use the next 3 Subclass Storage
polices. Setting this policy to Disabled
disables all 3 Subclass Storage policies - no
matter what their value.
PARENT to the next policy. Set this policy to
Enabled to use the Subclass Windows
Portable Device (WPD): Storage policy.
Setting this policy to Disabled disables the
Subclass Windows Portable Device (WPD):
Storage policy - no matter what its value.
Control access to all Windows Portable
Devices.
CHILD of Class: Windows Portable Device
(WPD) . Class: Windows Portable Device
(WPD) must be set to Enabled to use this
policy.

Subclass Windows Portable Device (WPD):
Storage

Full Access

Full Access: Port does not have read/write
data restrictions applied.
Read Only: Allows read capability. Write data
is disabled.
Blocked: Port is blocked from read/write
capability.
Control access to all Human Interface
Devices (keyboards, mice).

Enabled

Class: Human Interface Device (HID)

See advanced settings

Advanced Port Control
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console. In this table, master policies
are in bold font.
Policy

Default Setting

Description

Windows Port Control
This technology allows for control of all the physical ports on a Windows computer (disable/enable/bypass),
and can be customized by port type.

Subclass Storage: External Drive Control

Full Access

CHILD of Class: Storage. Class: Storage must
be set to Enabled to use this policy.
This policy interacts with the Removable
Storage - EMS Access to unShielded Media

286

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
policy. If you intend to have Full Access to
media, also set this policy to Full Access to
ensure that the media is not set to read only
and the port is not blocked.
Full Access: External Drive port does not
have read/write data restrictions applied
Read Only: Allows read capability. Write data
is disabled
Blocked: Port is blocked from read/write
capability
This policy is endpoint-based and cannot be
overridden by user policy.
CHILD of Class: Storage. Class: Storage must
be set to Enabled to use this policy.
Full Access: Optical Drive port does not have
read/write data restrictions applied
UDF Only: Blocks all data writes that are not
in the UDF format (CD/DVD burning, ISO
burning). Read data is enabled.
Read Only: Allows read capability. Write data
is disabled

Subclass Storage: Optical Drive Control

UDF Only

Blocked: Port is blocked from read/write
capability
This policy is endpoint-based and cannot be
overridden by user policy.
Universal Disk Format (UDF) is an
implementation of the specification known
as ISO/IEC 13346 and ECMA-167 and is an
open vendor-neutral file system for computer
data storage for a broad range of media.
To encrypt data written to CD/DVD media:
Set EMS Encrypt External Media = True, EMS
Exclude CD/DVD Encryption = False, and
Storage Class: Optical Drive Control = UDF
Only.
CHILD of Class: Storage. Class: Storage must
be set to Enabled to use this policy.
Full Access: Floppy Drive port does not have
read/write data restrictions applied

Subclass Storage: Floppy Drive Control

Read Only

Read Only: Allows read capability. Write data
is disabled
Blocked: Port is blocked from read/write
capability
This policy is endpoint-based and cannot be
overridden by user policy.

Port: PCMCIA

Enabled

Enable, Disable, or Bypass port access to
PCMCIA ports.

Port: Firewire (1394)

Enabled

Enable, Disable, or Bypass port access to
external Firewire (1394) ports.

Port: SD

Enabled

Enable, Disable, or Bypass port access to SD
card ports.

Port: Memory Transfer Device (MTD)

Enabled

Enable, Disable, or Bypass access to Memory
Transfer Device (MTD) ports.

See basic settings

Windows Device Control
This technology allows for control of all the devices on a Windows computer (disable/enable), and can be
customized by device type.

287

Manage Policies

Enabled

Class: Other

Control access to all devices not covered by
other Classes.

See basic settings

Global Settings
Global Settings policies are available at the Enterprise, Endpoint Groups, and Endpoints levels. All Global
Settings policies are endpoint-based, meaning the policies follow the endpoint, not the user.
Audit Control policies are available at the Enterprise, Endpoint Groups, Endpoints, User Groups, and Users
levels.
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console.
Policy

Default

Description

Settings
This technology allows control over general settings such as polling intervals, support dialogs, in-app
feedback, auto updates, data auditing, and client retention periods.
Defines the period of inactivity (in days)
before an encrypted endpoint is
automatically removed from the list of
managed clients.

Device Lease Period

The inactivity period is based on the number
of days since the Dell Server last received
inventory information from the encrypted
endpoint. Once removed, the endpoint will
no longer be included in reports, statistics,
and other administrative views.
If the encrypted endpoint communicates with
the Dell Server after the inactivity period has
expired, the endpoint will be returned to the
list of actively-managed clients.
Note: The Dell Server will always keep
encryption keys in escrow, even for removed
endpoints. This ensures recoverability of
encrypted data through various workflows,
such as Encryption client re-activation and
forensic analysis.

Enable In-App Feedback

Not selected

Server Polling Interval

360 minutes

When selected, an end user can submit
feedback and satisfaction ratings to Dell via a
link within the client application to a web
form.
1-1440 minutes

Custom Support Dialog

String

How often in minutes the SED client attempts
to contact the Dell Server for updates.
Customizable text that provides information
for users to contact IT support for the
organization. This allows a maximum of
10,000 characters, which can be four lines
with a maximum of 2500 characters each.
The text cannot contain line feeds, Enters, or
similar characters unless they are escaped. If
an administrator enters an invalid character
(non-JSON format), this may cause Data
Guardian clients to stop activating. For user
experience on Windows devices, a maximum
of 2000 characters is recommended; for
Mobile devices and Mac, a maximum of 1000

288

Security Management Server - AdminHelp v9.10
characters is recommended.

Dell Encryption Auto Updates

Selected
Not Selected

Enable Software Auto Updates

Not Selected

Selected enables the client update agent to
automatically check for updates to Dell
Security software. If this policy is not
selected, no Dell Auto Updates take place,
regardless of other policies. If this policy is
set, the On Premise Update Staging Location
must have a network location in its value.
String

On Premise Update Staging Location

String

Update Check Period

10080

Network location (UNC) where Dell Server
stages Dell update packages. If a network
location is not specified in this policy, the
Enable Software Auto Updates policy should
not be published.
1-43200 minutes (30 days)
The period in minutes between checks for
updates.

See advanced settings
Audit Control

Selected
Not Selected
Data Guardian Audit Data Enabled

Data Guardian Geo Location Audit Data

Selected

Selected enables Audit Control policies. If
this policy is not selected, no Audit Control
takes place, regardless of other policies. It
also enables the collection of audit data from
Data Guardian clients.
Selected
Not Selected
Selected includes geo tracking location data
in audit data.
1-365 days. 30 days default.

Client Retention Period

30 days

Specifies the number of days that the client
will hold on to audit data without
transmission.
Megabytes of storage space

Client Retention Storage

512

Specifies the maximum storage space used by
the client for audit data without
transmission.

Mobile Audit Control

Selected
Not Selected
Data Guardian Audit Data Enabled

See advanced settings

Advanced Global Settings

289

Selected

Manage Policies
Global Settings policies are available at the Enterprise, Endpoint Groups, and Endpoints levels. All Global
Settings policies are endpoint-based, meaning the policies follow the endpoint, not the user.
Audit Control policies are available at the Enterprise, Endpoint Groups, Endpoints, User Groups, and Users
levels.
Policy descriptions also display in tooltips in the Remote Management Console.
Policy

Default

Description

Settings
This technology allows control over general settings such as polling intervals, support dialogs, in-app
feedback, auto updates, data auditing, and client retention periods.
DDP Auto Updates

1-43200 minutes (30 days)
Update Check Period

10080

The period in minutes between checks for
updates.

See basic settings
Mobile Audit Control

Data Guardian Geo Location Audit Data

Selected

Selected
Not Selected
Selected includes geo tracking location data
in audit data.

See basic settings

290

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Dell Inc.
Subject                         : Reference Guide4
Description                     : Reference Guide4
Title                           : AdminHelp - Security Management Server v9.10
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 10.0; modified using iTextSharp 5.1.3 (c) 1T3XT BVBA
Create Date                     : 2018:02:05 11:02:11-06:00
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 10.1 for Word
Modify Date                     : 2018:02:05 12:17:46-06:00
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Page Count                      : 304
Author                          : Dell Inc.
Comments                        : 
Company                         : CREDANT Technologies, Inc.
Keywords                        : esuprt_software#esuprt_endpoint_security_soln#Dell, Encryption#dell-data-protection-encryption#Reference, Guide4
Source Modified                 : D:20180205170130
Productcode                     : dell-data-protection-encryption
Typecode                        : rg4
Typedescription                 : Reference Guide4
Languagecodes                   : en-us
Sectioncode                     : 
Sectiondescription              : 
Publishdate                     : 2018-02-05 00:00:00
Expirydate                      : 9999-09-09 00:00:00
Manualurl                       : http://downloads.dell.com/Manuals/all-products/esuprt_software/esuprt_endpoint_security_soln/dell-data-protection-encryption_Reference-Guide4_en-us.pdf
Readytocopy                     : True
Futureproductindication         : No
Categorypathforfutureproducts   : 
Businesskeywords                : esuprt_software#esuprt_endpoint_security_soln#Dell Encryption#dell-data-protection-encryption#Reference Guide4
Filesize                        : 2575
Isrestricted                    : True
Productpath                     : 
Tokenid                         : 990824f6-fb3b-495a-8470-a3925bf3ee92
Createdby                       : Elsie_Sanders@Dell.com

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Dell Data Protection Encryption AdminHelp Security Management Server V9.10 User Manual Admin Help Reference Guide4 En Us

%PRODUCTNAME%

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation